Traverse 2015

2k15_chev_traverse_23121149A.
ai
(Modern Bridge - Level 2 / #23321109)
Spine = Printer Adjust
Color = Black
Date = 03/19/14
2015
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico- Black plate (1,1)
7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
2015 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Trademarks and License
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-45 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-52 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-32
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-54
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-32

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
2015 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 OnStar Additional
Special Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on the vehicle
because of optional equipment that Propriétaires Canadiens
was not purchased on the vehicle, A French language manual can be
model variants, country obtained from your dealer, at
specifications, features/applications www.helminc.com, or from:
that may not be available in your
The names, logos, emblems, region, or changes subsequent to On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and the printing of this owner manual. ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited Refer to the purchase savant:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, documentation relating to your
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and specific vehicle to confirm the Helm, Incorporated
TRAVERSE are trademarks and/or features. Attention: Customer Service
service marks of General Motors 47911 Halyard Drive
Keep this manual in the vehicle for Plymouth, MI 48170
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, quick reference.
or licensors.
Using this Manual
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General To quickly locate information about
Motors of Canada Limited” for the vehicle, use the Index in the
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it back of the manual. It is an
appears in this manual. alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 23121149 A First Printing 2013 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
iv Introduction
Danger, Warnings, and Vehicle Symbol Chart

Cautions Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
Warning messages found on vehicle and what they mean. For more
labels and in this manual describe information on the symbol, refer to
hazards and what to do to avoid or the Index.
reduce them. A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
{ Danger Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
this happen.” % : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls
Danger indicates a hazard with a
or OnStar (if equipped)
high level of risk which will result Symbols
in serious injury or death. $ : Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of " : Charging System
text. Symbols are shown along with I : Cruise Control
{ Warning the text describing the operation or B : Engine Coolant Temperature
information relating to a specific
Warning indicates a hazard that component, control, message, O : Exterior Lamps
could result in injury or death. gauge, or indicator. # : Fog Lamps
M : This symbol is shown when . : Fuel Gauge
you need to see your owner manual
+ : Fuses
{ Caution for additional instructions or
information. 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Caution indicates a hazard that * : This symbol is shown when Changer
could result in property or vehicle you need to see a service manual j : LATCH System Child
damage. for additional instructions or Restraints
information.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Introduction v
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure
g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
t : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
M : Windshield Washer Fluid

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
vi Introduction
2 NOTES

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)

Steering Wheel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Lane Departure
Instrument Panel Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Side Blind Zone
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Initial Drive Information Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Rear Vision
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Rear Cross Traffic Alert
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Vehicle Features (RCTA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Universal Remote System . . . 1-25
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-21 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Steering Wheel Controls Performance and Maintenance
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 (Radio without Traction Control/Electronic
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Heated and Cooled Front Steering Wheel Controls Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-26
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 (Radio with Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-26
Head Restraint Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Driving for Better Fuel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Driver Information Center Roadside Assistance
Passenger Sensing (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 1-23 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8-11. 8. Hood Release. See Hood on 16. Driver Information Center (DIC)
2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and page 10-4. Buttons. See Driver Information
Lane-Change Signals on 9. Parking Brake on page 9-27. Center (DIC) (With DIC
page 6-4 (Out of View). Buttons) on page 5-25 or
10. Data Link Connector (DLC) Driver Information Center (DIC)
Windshield Wiper/Washer on (Out of View). See Malfunction (Without DIC Buttons) on
page 5-5 (Out of View). Indicator Lamp on page 5-18. page 5-31.
3. Instrument Cluster on page 5-12. 11. Dome Lamp Override. See 17. Climate Control Systems on
4. Instrument Panel Storage on Dome Lamps on page 6-5. page 8-1 (If Equipped).
page 4-1. Instrument Panel Illumination Dual Automatic Climate Control
5. CD Player. See CD Player Control on page 6-5. System on page 8-4 (If
(Radio with Touchscreen) on 12. Cruise Control on page 9-30. Equipped).
page 7-22 or CD Player (Radio 13. Steering Wheel Adjustment on 18. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
without Touchscreen) on page 5-2. Park on page 9-19.
page 7-20.
14. Horn on page 5-5. 19. USB Port. See Auxiliary
6. Infotainment on page 7-1. Devices on page 7-31.
15. Steering Wheel Controls
7. Exterior Lamp Controls on (Radio with Touchscreen) on 20. Power Outlets on page 5-9.
page 6-1. page 5-3 or Steering Wheel
Fog Lamps on page 6-4 (If Controls (Radio without
Equipped). Touchscreen) on page 5-2 (If
Equipped).

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-4 In Brief
21. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on Initial Drive

page 5-5.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Information
Disable Button. See Traction This section provides a brief
Control/Electronic Stability overview about some of the
Control on page 9-28. important features that may or may
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) not be on your specific vehicle.
System on page 9-32 (If For more detailed information, refer
Equipped). to each of the features which can be
Lane Departure Warning found later in this owner manual.
(LDW) on page 9-41 (If
Equipped). Remote Keyless Entry
Press K to unlock the driver door.
Tow/Haul Button (If Equipped). (RKE) System
Press K again within five seconds
See Tow/Haul Mode on The RKE transmitter is used to to unlock all remaining doors.
page 9-25. remotely lock and unlock the doors
Power Liftgate Button (If from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from Press Q to lock all doors.
Equipped). See Liftgate on the vehicle.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
page 2-8. personalized.
22. Heated and Cooled Front To open or close the liftgate, press
Seats on page 3-8 (If and hold 8 until the liftgate
Equipped).
begins to move.
23. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6-3. Press L and release to locate the
vehicle.
24. Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-30.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-5
Press L and hold for more than When the vehicle starts, the parking Door Locks
two seconds to sound the panic lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The To lock or unlock a door manually:
alarm.
doors will be locked and the climate . From the inside use the door
Press L again to cancel the panic control system may come on. lock knob on the window sill.
alarm. The engine will continue to run for . From the outside turn the key
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a toward the front or rear of the
System Operation on page 2-2. 10-minute time extension. Remote vehicle, or press the K or Q
start can be extended only once.
button on the Remote Keyless
Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Starting the Vehicle To cancel a remote start:
With this feature the engine can be . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
started from outside of the vehicle. vehicle and press and hold /
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the until the parking lamps turn off.
vehicle. . Turn on the hazard warning
2. Press and release Q. flashers.
. Turn the ignition switch on and
3. Immediately after completing
then off.
Step 2, press and hold / until
the parking lamps flash. See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2-4.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-6 In Brief
Power Door Locks K: Press to unlock the doors.

Q: Press to lock the doors.
See Power Door Locks on page 2-7.
Liftgate
To open the liftgate the vehicle must
be in P (Park). Press the touch pad
under the liftgate handle and lift up.
To close the liftgate, use the pull
cup or pull strap as an aid.
Power Liftgate . Press O.
Base Model If equipped with a power liftgate, the . Press the touch pad on the
vehicle must be in P (Park) to
outside liftgate handle.
operate it.
See Liftgate on page 2-8.
. Press and hold 8 on the
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
Uplevel Model

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-7
Windows Seat Adjustment To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the handle (1) under the seat
Manual Seats to unlock it.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position, and then release the
handle (1).
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
Move the lever (2) up or down to
raise or lower the seat.
Use the lever (3) to adjust the
Uplevel Shown, Base Similar seatback.
Press the switch to lower the See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3
window. Pull the switch up to 1. Seat Adjustment Handle and Reclining Seatbacks on
raise it. 2. Driver Seat Height page 3-5.
For more information, see Power Adjustment Lever
Windows on page 2-17. 3. Seatback Lever

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-8 In Brief
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
Power Seats
moving the rear of the control (1)
Memory Features
up or down.
. Adjust the seatback by tilting the
top of the control (2) forward or
rearward.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3-5.
. Increase or decrease lumbar
support by pressing the front or
rear of the control (3).
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3-4.
1. Seat Adjustment Control See Power Seat Adjustment on If equipped, the controls on the
2. Seatback Control page 3-4. driver door are used to program and
3. Lumbar Control recall memory settings for the driver
seat and outside mirrors.
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
See Memory Seats on page 3-6 and
. Move the seat forward or
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
rearward by sliding the
Buttons) on page 5-45.
control (1) forward or rearward.
. Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control (1) up
or down.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-9
Second Row Seats To fold the third row seatback:

1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
3. Pull up on the release lever on

the back of the seat.
The second row seat can be folded 4. Push the seatback forward to
to access the third row. Pull the lay flat.
sliding seat lever forward; the seat 2. Disconnect the rear safety belt
mini-latch using a key in the slot See Third Row Seats on page 3-11.
cushion folds, and the seat slides
forward. on the mini-buckle, and let the
belt retract into the headliner.
See Rear Seats on page 3-9. Stow the mini-latch in the holder
in the headliner.
Third Row Seats
The third row seatbacks can be
folded forward, and the seats can
be removed.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-10 In Brief
Heated and Cooled Front Press the button once for the Safety Belts
highest setting. With each press of
Seats the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and one
for the lowest.
See Heated and Cooled Front Seats
on page 3-8.
Head Restraint
Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons Adjustment
Shown, Heated Seat Buttons Do not drive until the head restraints
Similar for all occupants are installed and
Refer to the following sections for
If equipped, the buttons are on the adjusted properly.
important information on how to use
center stack. To operate, the engine To achieve a comfortable seating safety belts properly:
must be running. position, change the seatback . Safety Belts on page 3-13.
I: If equipped, press to heat the recline angle as little as necessary
seatback only. while keeping the seat and the head . How to Wear Safety Belts
restraint height in the proper Properly on page 3-15.
H : If equipped, press to cool the position.
entire seat. . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-16.
See Head Restraints on page 3-2
J: Press to heat the seat and and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
seatback. Children (LATCH System) on
page 3-44.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-11
Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status 3. Return the switch to the center
indicator will light on the instrument to deselect the mirror.
System panel when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5-17.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
United States
Uplevel Model
To adjust the mirrors:
Canada and Mexico
1. Press (1) or (2) to select a
The passenger sensing system will mirror.
turn off the front outboard 2. Press the control pad to adjust
passenger frontal airbag under the mirror.
certain conditions. No other airbag Base Model
is affected by the passenger 3. Press (1) or (2) again to deselect
To adjust the mirrors: the mirror.
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3-30. 1. Press o or p to select a mirror.
2. Press the control pad to adjust
the mirror.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-12 In Brief
Folding Mirrors Interior Mirror Steering Wheel

For vehicles with manual folding Adjustment Adjustment
mirrors, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. Pull the mirror out to return Adjust the rearview mirror to clearly
to its original position. view the area behind the vehicle.
For vehicles with power folding Manual Rearview Mirror

mirrors: For vehicles with a manual rearview
mirror, push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
use to avoid glare from the
headlamps from behind. See
Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2-17.
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror
To adjust the steering wheel:
The mirror will automatically reduce
the glare from the headlamps from 1. Pull the lever down.
behind. The dimming feature comes 2. Move the steering wheel up
on when the vehicle is started. See or down.
1. Press (1) to fold the mirrors out Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
to the driving position. on page 2-17.
2. Press (2) to fold the mirrors in to
the folded position.
See Folding Mirrors on page 2-15.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-13
3. Pull or push the steering wheel Dome Lamp Override

closer or away from you.
4. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps are in the
overhead console and above the
rear seat passengers. AMBIENT OFF (If Equipped):
The dome lamps come on when a The dome lamp override button is Press the button to turn the ambient
door is opened, unless the dome next to the exterior lamps control. lights off. Press the button again to
lamp override button is pressed in. turn ambient lights on.
E DOME OFF: Press the button
To manually turn them on, turn the and the dome lamps remain off Reading Lamps
instrument panel brightness control when a door is opened. An indicator Press the button near each lamp to
clockwise to the farthest position. light on the button comes on to turn them on or off.
show that the dome lamps are off.
Press the button again so the dome For more information, see:
lamps come on when a door is . Dome Lamps on page 6-5.
opened. . Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6-5.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-14 In Brief
Exterior Lighting 5 : Turns on the headlamps

together with the parking lamps and
instrument panel lights. A warning
chime sounds if the driver door is
opened when the ignition switch is
off and the headlamps are on.
# : If equipped, it turns the fog
lamps on or off. 8: Use for a single wiping cycle.
See: OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on 6: Delays wiping cycle. Turn the
The exterior lamp control is on the page 6-1 band up for more frequent wipes or
instrument panel, to the left of the down for less frequent wipes.
. Fog Lamps on page 6-4
steering wheel. LO: Slow wipes.
O : Briefly turn to this position to Windshield Wiper/Washer HI: Fast wipes.
turn the automatic light control off or
on again. The windshield wiper/washer lever Windshield Washer
is located on the left side of the J FRONT: Press the button at the
AUTO: Turns the headlamps on steering column.
automatically at normal brightness, end of the lever to spray washer
together with the other exterior Turn the band with the wiper symbol fluid on the windshield.
lamps and instrument panel lights. to control the windshield wipers.
; : Turns on the parking lamps
including all lamps, except the
headlamps.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-15
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Climate Controls

The rear wiper and rear wash button
is on the center stack below the
climate control system.
Z : Press to turn the rear wiper on
and off. The wiper speed cannot be
changed.
Y : Press to spray washer fluid on
the rear window. The window wiper
will also come on.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5-5 and Rear Window Wiper/
Washer on page 5-5.
1. Fan Control 5. Air Delivery Mode Control
2. REAR (Rear Climate Control) 6. Air Conditioning
3. Temperature Control 7. Rear Window Defogger
4. Recirculation

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-16 In Brief
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode
ERS mode allows you to choose the
top-gear limit of the transmission
and the vehicle's speed while
driving downhill or towing a trailer.
The vehicle has an electronic shift
position indicator within the
instrument cluster. When using the
ERS mode a number will display
next to the L, indicating the current
gear that has been selected.
1. Driver and Passenger Side 9. Recirculation To use this feature:
Temperature Controls 10. A/C (Air Conditioning) 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).
2. Air Delivery Mode Controls See Climate Control Systems on 2. Press the plus/minus button on
3. SYNC (Synchronized page 8-1 or Dual Automatic Climate the shift lever, to increase or
Temperature) Control System on page 8-4 (If decrease the gear range
Equipped). For more information available.
4. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
about the rear climate control, see See Manual Mode on page 9-24.
5. REAR (Rear Climate Control) Rear Climate Control System on
6. Defrost page 8-9 or Rear Climate Control
System (with Rear Seat Audio) on
7. Rear Window Defogger page 8-10.
8. Fan Control

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-17
Vehicle Features Radio(s)

Radio without Touchscreen
Infotainment System
If the vehicle has a base radio it is
included in this manual. See the
separate infotainment manual for
information on the connected radios,
audio players, phone, navigation
system, and voice or speech
recognition. There is also
information on settings and
downloadable applications (if
equipped).
O : Press to turn the system on f : Select radio stations or set

and off. Turn to increase or Tone options.
decrease the volume. © or ¨ : Seek or scan stations or
BAND: Press to choose between tracks.
FM, AM, or SiriusXM®, if equipped.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-18 In Brief
4: Change the display between the Storing a Favorite Station Setting the Clock
radio station frequency and the A maximum of 36 stations can be To set the time and date:
time, if equipped. While the ignition stored as favorites using the six 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
is off, press 4 to display the time. softkeys located below the radio ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
For more information about these station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to press O to turn the radio on.
and other radio features, see
Operation (Radio without go through up to six pages of 2. Press H to display HR, MIN,
Touchscreen) on page 7-5 or favorites, each having six favorite
MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
Operation (Radio with Touchscreen) stations available per page. Each
month, day, and year).
on page 7-8. page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM 3. Press the pushbutton located
If equipped with Rear Seat stations, if equipped. under any one of the labels to be
Entertainment (RSE), see the changed.
infotainment manual. See AM-FM Radio (Radio without
Touchscreen) on page 7-10 or 4. To increase or decrease the time
AM-FM Radio (Radio with or date, turn f clockwise or
Touchscreen) on page 7-12. counterclockwise.
See Clock (Radio without
Touchscreen) on page 5-7 or Clock
(Radio with Touchscreen) on
page 5-8.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-19
Radio with Touchscreen D : Press to go to the Home Page.

See “Home Page” in Operation
(Radio without Touchscreen) on
page 7-5 or Operation (Radio with
Touchscreen) on page 7-8.
SRCE: Press to change the audio
source to AM, FM, CD, and if
equipped, SiriusXM®, front auxiliary,
rear auxiliary, and iPod/USB.
FAV: Press to display the favorite
list or add a favorite. See Operation
Touchscreen) on page 7-8.
© SEEK or SEEK ¨ : Seek or scan
stations and tracks. See Operation
PUSH/O : Press to turn the system AUX Port: 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Touchscreen) on page 7-8.
on and off. Turn to adjust the connection for external audio / BACK: Press to return to the
volume. devices. previous screen in a menu.
Z: Press to eject a disc from the PUSH/SEL: Turn to manually find a
CD. See CD Player (Radio with station or highlight a menu
Touchscreen) on page 7-22 or CD selection. Press to select a
Player (Radio without Touchscreen) highlighted selection.
on page 7-20.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-20 In Brief
. Press and hold to quickly
Storing Radio Station Presets
increase or decrease the time
Satellite Radio
Up to 30 preset stations can be settings. If equipped, vehicles with a
stored. AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if SiriusXM® satellite radio tuner and a
equipped) can be mixed.
. Press OK to save the
valid SiriusXM satellite radio
adjustments.
1. From the AM, FM, or SiriusXM subscription can receive SiriusXM
main page, press and hold any
. Press the Back or Cancel screen programming.
1−5 buttons or one of the preset button to cancel the
adjustments. SiriusXM Satellite Radio
screen buttons at the bottom of
the screen. After a few seconds,
Service
Set Date:
a beep is heard and the new SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
. Press the up or down arrows to
preset information displays on based in the 48 contiguous United
increase or decrease the Month,
that screen button. States and 10 Canadian provinces.
Day, and Year settings.
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
2. Repeat for each preset. . Press and hold to quickly variety of programming and
Setting the Clock increase or decrease the date commercial-free music, coast to
settings. coast, and in digital-quality sound.
Press Settings on the Home Page, A fee is required to receive the
then press the Set Time or Set Date . Press OK to save the
adjustments. SiriusXM service.
settings screen button to display the
different options for setting the time . Press the Back or Cancel screen Refer to:
and date. button to cancel the . www.siriusxm.com or call
Set Time: adjustments. 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
. Press the up or down arrows to . www.xmradio.ca or call
change the Hours, Minutes, AM, 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
PM, or 24 hour setting on the
clock.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-21
See Satellite Radio (Radio without Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls

Touchscreen) on page 7-15 or
Satellite Radio (Radio with
®
The Bluetooth system allows users (Radio without
Touchscreen) on page 7-18. with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile Touchscreen)
phone to make and receive
Portable Audio Devices hands-free calls using the vehicle
audio system and controls.
The vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
The Bluetooth-enabled mobile
auxiliary input jack on the faceplate
phone must be paired with the
and a USB port in the center stack.
in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it
External devices such as iPods,
can be used in the vehicle. Not all
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD
phones will support all functions.
changers, USB storage devices,
etc. can be connected to the See Bluetooth on page 7-34.
auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
input jack or the USB port
depending on the audio system.
If equipped, there are two USB
ports on the rear of the center w or c /x : Press to change
console that can be used for favorite radio stations, select tracks
charging only. They can charge on a CD, or navigate tracks or
devices that draw 2.1 amps or less. folders on an iPod or USB device.
See the device’s owner manual for
the specification. b /g : Press to mute the speakers,
press again to unmute. Press and
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-31. hold to interact with Bluetooth and
OnStar®, if equipped.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-22 In Brief
c /x : Press to reject an Steering Wheel Controls SRCE: Press to switch between

incoming call, or end a current call. AM, FM, CD, and if equipped,
(Radio with Touchscreen) SiriusXM®, front auxiliary, rear
SRCE: Press to switch between auxiliary, and iPod/USB.
AM, FM, CD, and if equipped,
SiriusXM®, front auxiliary, rear Press and hold to mute/pause the
auxiliary, and iPod/USB. system.
¨ : Press to seek the next radio ¨ : Press to seek the next radio
station, track, or chapter while station, track, or chapter while
sourced to the CD slot, or to select sourced to the CD slot, or to select
tracks and folders on an iPod or tracks and folders on an iPod or
USB device. USB device.
+ e or − e : Press to increase or to + e or − e : Press to increase or to

decrease the volume. decrease the volume.
See Steering Wheel Controls (Radio See Steering Wheel Controls (Radio
with Touchscreen) on page 5-3 or with Touchscreen) on page 5-3 or
Steering Wheel Controls (Radio w or c /x : Press to change Steering Wheel Controls (Radio
without Touchscreen) on page 5-2. favorite radio stations, select tracks without Touchscreen) on page 5-2.
on a CD, or navigate tracks or
folders on an iPod or USB device.
b /g : Press to interact with
Bluetooth and OnStar®, if equipped.
c /x : Press to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-23
Cruise Control SET–: Press briefly to set the U: Press to customize the feature
speed and activate cruise control. settings on your vehicle. See
If cruise control is already active, Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
use to decrease vehicle speed. Buttons) on page 5-45 for more
[ : Press to disengage cruise information.
control without erasing the set T: Press to display the oil life,
speed from memory. park assist on vehicles with this
See Cruise Control on page 9-30. feature, units, tire pressure readings
on vehicles with this feature, and
Driver Information Center compass calibration and zone
setting on vehicles with this feature.
(DIC) (With DIC Buttons)
3 : Press this button to display
To access the DIC, some vehicles the odometer, trip odometers, fuel
have buttons located on the range, average economy, timer, fuel
instrument panel. used, and average speed.
T : Press to turn cruise control on
or off. The indicator light on the Some vehicles do not have the
button comes on when the cruise buttons shown, however some of
control is on. the menus can be viewed by using
the trip odometer reset stem.
+RES: If there is a set speed in
memory, press briefly to resume to See Driver Information Center (DIC)
that speed or press and hold to (With DIC Buttons) on page 5-25 or
accelerate. If cruise control is Driver Information Center (DIC)
already active, use to increase V : Press to set or reset certain (Without DIC Buttons) on page 5-31.
vehicle speed. functions and to turn off or
acknowledge messages on the DIC.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-24 In Brief
Forward Collision Alert departs the lane, the light will See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
change to amber and flash. In page 9-38.
(FCA) System addition, beeps will sound.
If equipped, FCA may help avoid or See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Rear Cross Traffic Alert
reduce the harm caused by on page 9-41. (RCTA) System
front-end crashes. FCA provides a
green indicator, V, when a vehicle If equipped, when backing, the
Side Blind Zone RCTA system uses a triangle with
is detected ahead. This indicator
displays amber if you follow a
Alert (SBZA) an arrow displayed on the RVC
vehicle much too closely. When If equipped, SBZA will detect screen to warn of traffic behind your
approaching a vehicle ahead too vehicles in the next lane over in the vehicle that may cross your
quickly, FCA provides a red flashing vehicle's side blind zone area. vehicle's path. In addition, beeps
alert on the windshield and rapidly When this happens, the SBZA will sound.
beeps. display will light up in the See “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) corresponding outside side mirror (RCTA)” under Rear Vision Camera
System on page 9-32. and will flash if the turn signal is on. (RVC) on page 9-38.
See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
Lane Departure on page 9-36. Parking Assist
Warning (LDW) If equipped, this system uses
Rear Vision sensors on the rear bumper to
If equipped, LDW may help avoid assist with parking and avoiding
unintentional lane departures at
Camera (RVC)
objects while in R (Reverse).
speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or If equipped, RVC displays a view of It operates at speeds less than
greater. LDW uses a camera sensor the area behind the vehicle, on the 8 km/h (5 mph). Rear Parking Assist
to detect the lane markings. The center stack display, when the (RPA) uses audible beeps to
LDW light, @, is green if a lane vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). provide distance and system
marking is detected. If the vehicle information.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-25
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's Universal Remote System

rear bumper clean to ensure proper
operation.
See Parking Assist on page 9-34.
Power Outlets
The vehicle has 12-volt accessory
power outlets, which can be used to
plug in electrical equipment, such as If equipped, the Universal Home
a cell phone or MP3 player. Remote System allows for garage
door openers, security systems, and
The power outlets are located:
home automation devices to be
. On the center stack below the programmed to work with these Vent: Press the front or rear of the
climate controls. buttons in the vehicle. switch to vent or close the sunroof.
. Inside the center console. See Universal Remote System on Express-open/Express-close:
. At the rear of the center console. page 5-52. Press and release the rear or front
. of the switch to express-open or
In the rear cargo area. Sunroof express-close the sunroof.
To use the outlets, remove the The ignition must be in ON/RUN or See Sunroof on page 2-19.
cover. ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained
See Power Outlets on page 5-9. Accessory Power (RAP) must be
active to operate the sunroof and
power sunshade. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9-18.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-26 In Brief
Performance and Tire Pressure Monitor tire pressures are getting low and
the tires need to be inflated to the
Maintenance This vehicle may have a Tire proper pressure.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS does not replace normal
Traction Control/ monthly tire maintenance. Maintain
Electronic Stability the correct tire pressures.
Control See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10-44.
The vehicle has a traction control
system that limits wheel spin, and
the StabiliTrak system that assists Engine Oil Life System
with directional control of the vehicle The low tire pressure warning light The engine oil life system calculates
in difficult driving conditions. Both alerts to a significant loss in engine oil life based on vehicle use
systems turn on automatically every pressure of one of the vehicle's and displays the CHANGE ENGINE
time the vehicle is started. tires. If the warning light comes on, OIL SOON message when it is time
stop as soon as possible and inflate to change the engine oil and filter.
. To turn off traction control and the tires to the recommended The oil life system should be reset
StabiliTrak, press and release 4 pressure shown on the Tire and to 100% only following an oil
on the center stack, and the Loading Information label. See change.
appropriate DIC message Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-9.
displays. See Ride Control The warning light will remain on until Resetting the Oil Life System
System Messages on page 5-41. the tire pressure is corrected. 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
. Press and release 4 again to The low tire pressure warning light with the engine off.
turn on both systems. may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
See Traction Control/Electronic turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
Stability Control on page 9-28. may be an early indicator that the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Brief 1-27
2. If the vehicle has Driver 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

. Combine several trips into a
Information Center (DIC) single trip.
See Engine Oil Life System on
buttons: Press the vehicle page 10-9.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
information button until OIL LIFE the same TPC Spec number
REMAINING displays. molded into the tire's sidewall
Driving for Better Fuel
If the vehicle does not have near the size.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Economy . Follow recommended scheduled
buttons: The vehicle must be in Driving habits can affect fuel maintenance.
P (Park) to access this display. mileage. Here are some driving tips
Press the trip odometer reset to get the best fuel economy Roadside Assistance
stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING possible.
displays. Program
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
3. If the vehicle has Driver smoothly. U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
Information Center (DIC) . Brake gradually and avoid TTY Users (U.S. Only):
buttons: Press and hold the set/ abrupt stops. 1-888-889-2438
reset button until “100%” is
displayed. Three chimes sound . Avoid idling the engine for long Canada: 1-800-268-6800
and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL periods of time. New Chevrolet owners are
SOON message goes off. . When road and weather automatically enrolled in the
If the vehicle does not have conditions are appropriate, use Roadside Assistance Program.
Driver Information Center (DIC) cruise control. See Roadside Assistance Program
buttons: Press and hold the trip . Always follow posted speed on page 13-5.
odometer reset stem until OIL limits or drive more slowly when
LIFE REMAINING shows conditions require.
“100%.” Three chimes sound
and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
. Keep vehicle tires properly
SOON message goes off. inflated.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
1-28 In Brief
OnStar®
This vehicle may be equipped with a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live OnStar
Advisor for Emergency, Security,
Navigation, Connection, and
Diagnostic Services. OnStar
services may require a paid
subscription. See OnStar Overview
on page 14-1.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keys and Locks
Windows Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
2-15 Keys
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Keys and Locks Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 { Warning
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Interior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-16 the ignition key is dangerous and
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) children or others could be
Automatic Dimming Rearview seriously injured or killed. They
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4 could operate the power windows
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Windows or other controls or make the
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 vehicle move. The windows will
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 function with the keys in the
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 ignition, and children or others
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 could be caught in the path of a
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Roof closing window. Do not leave
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 children in a vehicle with the
Doors
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 ignition key.
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-12
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-13

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
If equipped, with an active OnStar Remote Keyless Entry

subscription, an OnStar Advisor
may remotely unlock the vehicle.
(RKE) System Operation
See “OnStar,” if equipped. The RKE transmitter functions work
up to 60 m (195 ft) away from the
Remote Keyless Entry vehicle.
(RKE) System Other conditions can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See
See Radio Frequency Statement on
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
page 13-12.
System on page 2-2.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
The key is used for the ignition and . Check the distance. The
all door locks. transmitter may be too far from
The key has a bar-coded key tag the vehicle.
that the dealer or qualified locksmith . Check the location. Other
can use to make new keys. Store vehicles or objects may be
this information in a safe place, not blocking the signal.
in the vehicle. . Check the transmitter's battery.
If it becomes difficult to turn the key, See “Battery Replacement” later
inspect the key blade for debris. in this section.
See your dealer if a replacement . If the transmitter is still not With Remote Start and Power
key or additional key is needed. working correctly, see your Liftgate Shown, Without Similar
If locked out of the vehicle, call dealer or a qualified technician
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside for service. / (Remote Vehicle Start):
If equipped, see Remote Vehicle
Assistance Program on page 13-5. Start on page 2-4.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the Pressing K on the RKE transmitter Programming Transmitters to
doors. disarms the content theft-deterrent the Vehicle
If enabled through the Driver system. See Vehicle Alarm System Only RKE transmitters programmed
Information Center (DIC), the on page 2-12. to this vehicle will work. If a
parking lamps flash once to indicate 8 (Power Liftgate): Press and transmitter is lost or stolen, a
locking has occurred. If enabled hold until the liftgate begins to move replacement can be purchased and
through the DIC, the horn sounds to open or close the liftgate. The programmed through your dealer.
when Q is pressed again within taillamps flash and a chime sounds When the replacement transmitter is
five seconds. See Vehicle to indicate when the liftgate is programmed to this vehicle, all
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) opening or closing. remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
on page 5-45. L (Vehicle Locator/Panic transmitters will no longer work
Pressing Q may arm the content Alarm): Press and release to
once the new transmitter is
locate the vehicle. The parking
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle programmed. Each vehicle can
lamps flash and the horn sounds
Alarm System on page 2-12. have up to eight transmitters
three times.
programmed to it. See your dealer
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
Press and hold L for more than to program transmitters to this
only the driver door. If K is pressed vehicle.
two seconds to activate the panic
again within five seconds, all
alarm. The parking lamps flash and Battery Replacement
remaining doors unlock. The interior
the horn sounds repeatedly for
lamps come on and stay on for Replace the battery if the REPLACE
30 seconds. The alarm turns off
20 seconds or until the ignition is BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
when the ignition is moved to ON/
turned on. message displays in the DIC.
RUN or L is pressed again. The
If enabled through the DIC, the ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
parking lamps flash twice to indicate the panic alarm to work.
unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 5-45.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
transmitter. Do not insert when doing so. Check local

{ Caution the tool too far. Stop as regulations for any requirements on
soon as resistance is felt. remote starting of vehicles.
When replacing the battery, do
not touch any of the circuitry on
. Twist the tool until the Do not use the remote start feature
the transmitter. Static from your transmitter is separated. if the vehicle is low on fuel. The
body could damage the 2. Remove the old battery. Do not vehicle could run out of fuel.
transmitter. use a metal object. If the vehicle has the remote start
3. Insert the new battery, positive feature, the RKE transmitter range
side facing down. Replace with a may be less while the vehicle is
CR2032 or equivalent battery. running.
4. Snap the transmitter back Other conditions can affect the

together. performance of the transmitter. See
System on page 2-2.
Remote Vehicle Start
This vehicle may have a remote Starting the Engine Using
starting feature that starts the Remote Start
engine from outside of the vehicle. To start the vehicle:
/ (Remote Start): This button is 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
on the RKE transmitter if the vehicle vehicle.
1. Separate the transmitter with a has remote start.
2. Press and release Q on the
flat, thin object, such as a flat Laws in some communities may RKE transmitter.
head screwdriver. restrict the use of remote starters.
. For example, some laws may 3. Immediately after completing
Carefully insert the tool into
the notch located along the require a person using the remote Step 2, press and hold / until
parting line of the start to have the vehicle in view the parking lamps flash. If the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
vehicle's lights cannot be seen, After entering the vehicle during a 10 minutes are added, allowing the
press and hold / for at least remote start, insert and turn the key engine to run for a total of
four seconds. to the ON/RUN position to drive the 15 minutes.
vehicle. A maximum of two remote starts or
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as If the vehicle is left running it remote start attempts are allowed
long as the engine is running. The automatically shuts off after between ignition cycles.
doors will be locked and the climate 10 minutes unless a time extension After the vehicle's engine has been
control system will operate has been done. started two times using the remote
automatically if the vehicle has the Extending Engine Run Time start button, the ignition must be
automatic system, or at the same turned on and then back off before
setting as when the vehicle was last To extend the engine run time by the remote start procedure can be
turned off. 10 minutes, repeat Steps 1–3 while used again.
the engine is still running. The
If the vehicle has an automatic engine run time can only be Canceling a Remote Start
climate control system and heated extended if it is the first remote start
seats, the heated seats turn on To manually shut off a remote start:
since the vehicle has been driven.
during colder outside temperatures Remote start can be extended . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
and shut off when the key is turned one time. vehicle and press / until the
to ON/RUN. See Heated and
If the remote start procedure is used parking lamps turn off.
Cooled Front Seats on page 3-8.
again before the first 10-minute time . Turn on the hazard warning
The rear window defogger and frame has ended, the first flashers.
heated mirrors, if the vehicle has 10 minutes will immediately expire
them, turn on during colder outside and the second 10-minute time
. Turn the ignition switch on and
temperatures and turn off when the frame will start. then off.
key is turned to ON/RUN.
For example, if Q and then / are
pressed again after the vehicle has
been running for five minutes,

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Conditions in Which the To lock or unlock a door manually:

Remote Start Will Not Work Warning (Continued) . From the inside use the door
The vehicle cannot be started using crash is increased if the lock knob on the window sill.
the remote start feature if the key is doors are not locked. So, all . From the outside turn the key
in the ignition, the hood is open, or if passengers should wear toward the front or rear of the
there is an emission control system safety belts properly and the vehicle, or press the or button on
malfunction. doors should be locked the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
whenever the vehicle is transmitter.
The engine turns off during a remote
driven.
start if the coolant temperature gets
too high or if the oil pressure . Young children who get into
gets low. unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
Door Locks be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
{ Warning heat stroke. Always lock the
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
locked, the handle will not happening.
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Power Door Locks K (Unlock): Press to unlock the This feature can also be
doors. programmed. See Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. on page 5-45.
Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks
This feature delays the locking of The doors will lock automatically
the doors until five seconds after all when all doors are closed, the
doors are closed. ignition is on, and the shift lever is
When Q is pressed on the power moved out of P (Park).
door lock switch while the door or To unlock the doors:
liftgate is open, a chime will sound
three times indicating delayed
. Press K on a door.
Base Model locking is active. . Shift the transmission into
The doors will lock automatically P (Park).
five seconds after all doors are Automatic door unlocking can be
closed. If a door is reopened before programmed through the Driver
that time, the five-second timer will Information Center (DIC). See
reset when all doors are closed Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
again. Buttons) on page 5-45.
Press Q on the door lock switch
Lockout Protection
again or press Q on the RKE
transmitter to lock doors When locking is requested with the
immediately. driver door open and the key in the
ignition, all the doors will lock and
Uplevel Model then the driver door will unlock.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
This can be manually overridden by The vehicle has rear door security Doors
pressing and holding Q on the locks to prevent passengers from
power door lock switch. opening the rear doors from the
inside. Liftgate
If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout is
turned on, the vehicle is off with the
driver door open, and door locking
{ Warning
is requested, all the doors will lock Exhaust gases can enter the
and only the driver door will unlock. vehicle if it is driven with the
The Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout liftgate or trunk/hatch open,
feature can be turned on or off using or with any objects that pass
the vehicle personalization menus. through the seal between the
See Vehicle Personalization (With body and the trunk/hatch or
DIC Buttons) on page 5-45. liftgate. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
Safety Locks cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
{ Caution Open the rear doors to access the death.
Pulling the inside door handle security locks on the inside edge of If the vehicle must be driven with
each door. the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
while the rear door safety locks
are engaged could damage your To set the locks, insert a key into . Close all of the windows.
vehicle. Do not pull the inside the slot and turn it to the horizontal
position. The door can only be
. Fully open the air outlets on
door handle while the rear door
opened from the outside with the or under the instrument
safety locks are engaged. panel.
door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to the (Continued)
vertical position.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Manual Liftgate
Warning (Continued)
To unlock the liftgate, press the
{ Warning
. Adjust the climate control power door lock switch or press K You, or others, could be injured if
system to a setting that on the Remote Keyless Entry caught in the path of the power
brings in only outside air and (RKE) transmitter twice. See liftgate. Make sure there is no one
set the fan speed to the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) in the way of the liftgate as it is
highest setting. See “Climate System Operation on page 2-2. opening and closing.
Control Systems” in the
Index. To open the liftgate, press the touch
pad under the liftgate handle and lift The power liftgate can be power
. If the vehicle is equipped with up. The vehicle must be in P (Park) opened and closed in the
a power liftgate, disable the and the battery must be charged. following ways:
power liftgate function. Use the pull cup or pull strap to
lower and close the liftgate.
. Press and hold 8 on the
See Engine Exhaust on
RKE transmitter. See Remote
page 9-21. Always close the liftgate before Keyless Entry (RKE) System
driving. Operation on page 2-2.
Power Liftgate
{ Caution If equipped with a power liftgate, the
To avoid damage to the liftgate or vehicle must be in P (Park) to
liftgate glass, make sure the area operate. The taillamps flash and a
above and behind the liftgate is chime sounds when the power
liftgate moves.
clear before opening it.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
continue to completion. If the

vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and
accelerated before the power liftgate
latch closes, the liftgate may
reverse to the open position. Cargo
could fall out of the vehicle. Always
make sure the power liftgate is
closed and latched before
driving away.
If the power liftgate is used and the
liftgate support struts have lost
pressure, the taillamps will flash and
Power Liftgate Touch Pad a chime will sound. The liftgate will
. Press O.
The liftgate can also be closed by stay open temporarily, and then
. Press the touch pad on the slowly close. See your dealer for
outside liftgate handle. pressing l next to the liftgate service before using the liftgate if
Pressing the buttons or touch pad a latch. Press l a second time this occurs.
second time while the liftgate is during the liftgate operation to
reverse the operation. Obstacle Detection Features
moving reverses the direction.
The power liftgate may be If an obstacle is encountered during
temporarily disabled under extreme the power open or close cycle, a
temperatures or under low battery warning chime will sound and the
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate liftgate will automatically reverse
can be operated manually. direction to the full closed or open
position. After removing the obstacle
If the vehicle is shifted out of the liftgate will resume normal
P (Park) while the liftgate power operation.
function is in progress, it will

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
If more obstacles are encountered Manual Operation of Power Press the touch pad on the outside
on the same power cycle, the power Liftgate of the liftgate pull cup and lift to
function deactivates. The liftgate open. Use the pull cup to lower and
must be opened or closed manually close the liftgate. The liftgate latch
if this occurs. A message displays will power close.
on the Driver Information Always close the liftgate before
Center (DIC) to indicate that the driving.
liftgate is open. See Door Ajar
Messages on page 5-35. After 8 on the RKE transmitter or
If
removing the obstacles, manually l on the liftgate is pressed while
open the liftgate fully or close and in manual operation mode, the
latch the liftgate. The liftgate will taillamps will flash three times, but
resume normal power operation. the liftgate will not move.
The vehicle also has pinch sensors It is not recommended to drive with
along the side edges of the liftgate. the liftgate open. However, if the
If the sensors press against an To change the liftgate to manual vehicle must be driven with the
object while closing, the liftgate will operation, press OFF on the power liftgate open, the liftgate should be
reverse direction and open fully. The liftgate switch. A message displays set to manual operation.
liftgate will remain open until it is on the DIC indicating manual
activated again or closed manually. operation mode. See Door Ajar
Do not force the liftgate open or Messages on page 5-35.
closed during a power cycle. With the liftgate in manual mode
and all of the doors unlocked, the
liftgate can be manually opened and
closed.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Security The security light flashes. horn chirps and the lights flash.
When the door is closed, the If the key is not placed in the
This vehicle has theft-deterrent ignition and turned to START or the
security light stops flashing and
features; however, they do not make door is not unlocked by pressing Q
stays on solid for approximately
the vehicle impossible to steal. during the 10-second pre-alarm, the
30 seconds. The content
theft-deterrent alarm is not alarm goes off. The headlamps flash
Vehicle Alarm System armed until the security light and the horn sounds for about
On vehicles with an anti-theft alarm goes off. 30 seconds, then turns off to save
system, to activate the system: the battery power.
If the delayed locking feature is
active, the alarm is not activated The vehicle can be started with the
. Press Q on the Remote Keyless
until all doors are closed and the correct ignition key if the alarm has
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the been set off.
power door lock switch when security light goes off.
any door is open. . Press Q when the driver door is To avoid setting off the alarm by
closed. The security light comes accident:
on solid for approximately . Lock the vehicle with the door
30 seconds and then goes off. key after the doors are closed.
The content theft-deterrent alarm . Unlock the door with the RKE
is not armed until the security transmitter. Unlocking a door any
light goes off. other way sets off the alarm if
The theft-deterrent system will not the system has been armed.
activate if the doors are locked with
the vehicle's key or the manual Press K or place the key in the
door lock. ignition and turn it to START to turn
off the alarm.
If a locked door is opened without
using the RKE transmitter, a
10-second pre-alarm occurs. The

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Testing the Alarm Immobilizer When the PASS-Key III+ system

senses an incorrect key, the vehicle
To test the alarm: See Radio Frequency Statement on does not start. Anyone using a
1. From inside the vehicle, lower page 13-12. trial-and-error method to start the
the driver side window, and open vehicle will be discouraged because
the driver door. Immobilizer Operation of the high number of electrical key
This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ codes.
2. Press Q.
(Personalized Automotive Security If the engine does not start and the
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the System) theft-deterrent system. security light on the instrument
door, and wait for the security PASS-Key III+ is a passive panel comes on when trying to start
light to go out. theft-deterrent system. the vehicle, there may be a problem
4. Reach in through the window, The system is automatically armed with the theft-deterrent system. Turn
unlock the door with the manual when the key is removed from the the ignition off and try again.
door lock, and open the door. ignition. If the engine still does not start, and
This should set off the alarm. the key appears to be undamaged,
The system is automatically
If the alarm does not sound when it disarmed when the key is turned to try another ignition key and check
should, but the headlamps flash, ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit
check to see if the horn works. The or START from the LOCK/OFF Breakers on page 10-29 for
horn fuse may be blown. To replace position. additional information. If the engine
the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit still does not start with the other key,
Breakers on page 10-29. You do not have to manually arm or the vehicle needs service. If the
disarm the system. vehicle does start, the first key may
If the alarm does not sound or the
The security light comes on if there be faulty. See your dealer who can
headlamps do not flash, see your
is a problem with arming or service the PASS-Key III+ to have a
dealer for service.
disarming the theft-deterrent new key made. In an emergency,
system. contact Roadside Assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 13-5.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ 3. After the engine has started, turn Exterior Mirrors
decoder to learn the transponder the key to LOCK/OFF, and
value of a new or replacement key. remove the key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed Convex Mirrors
4. Insert the key to be programmed
to the vehicle. The following and turn it to the ON/RUN
procedure is for programming position within five seconds of { Warning
additional keys only. If all currently the original key being turned to
programmed keys are lost or do not A convex mirror can make things,
the LOCK/OFF position. like other vehicles, look farther
operate, you must see your dealer
or a locksmith who can service The security light turns off once away than they really are. If you
PASS-Key III+ to have keys made the key has been programmed. cut too sharply into the right lane,
and programmed to the system. 5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additional you could hit a vehicle on the
See your dealer or a locksmith who keys are to be programmed. right. Check the inside mirror or
can service PASS-Key III+ to get a glance over your shoulder before
If the PASS-Key III+ key is lost or
new key blank that is cut exactly as changing lanes.
damaged, see your dealer or a
the ignition key that operates the locksmith to have a new key made.
system. The passenger side mirror is convex
The SERVICE THEFT
To program the new additional key: shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
DETERRENT SYSTEM message
curved so more can be seen from
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 displays on the Driver Information
the driver seat.
stamped on it. Center (DIC) when there is a
problem with the theft-deterrent
2. Insert the already programmed system. See Security Messages on
key in the ignition and start the page 5-41 for additional information.
engine. If the engine does not
start, see your dealer for service. Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors

For vehicles with manual folding
mirrors, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. Pull the mirror out to return
to its original position.
For vehicles with power folding
mirrors:
Uplevel Model
Base Model To adjust the mirrors:
To adjust the mirrors: 1. Press (1) or (2) to select a
mirror.
1. Press o or p to select a mirror. 2. Press the control pad to adjust
2. Press the control pad to adjust the mirror.
the mirror.
3. Press (1) or (2) again to deselect
3. Return the switch to the center the mirror. 1. Press (1) to fold the mirrors out
to deselect the mirror.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) to the driving position.
If the vehicle has the SBZA system, 2. Press (2) to fold the mirrors in to
see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) the folded position.
on page 9-36.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Resetting the Power Folding Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors

Mirrors
If equipped with memory seats, the
Reset the power folding mirrors if: passenger and/or driver mirror tilts Interior Rearview Mirrors
. The mirrors are accidentally to a preselected position when the Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
obstructed while folding. vehicle is in R (Reverse). This view of the area behind your
allows the curb to be seen when vehicle.
. They are accidentally manually parallel parking.
folded/unfolded. If equipped with OnStar, the vehicle
The mirror(s) return to the original may have three control buttons at
. The mirrors vibrate at normal position when:
driving speeds. the bottom of the mirror. See your
. The vehicle is shifted out of dealer for more information about
To reset the mirrors, fold and unfold R (Reverse), or remains in OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
the mirrors one time using the R (Reverse) for about See “Onstar,” if equipped.
power folding mirror controls. 30 seconds.
A popping noise may be heard Do not spray glass cleaner directly
during the resetting. This sound is
. The ignition is turned off. on the mirror. Use a soft towel
normal during the reset operation. . The vehicle is driven in dampened with water.
R (Reverse) above a set speed.
Heated Mirrors To turn this feature on or off, see
For vehicles with heated mirrors: Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 5-45.
1 (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8-4.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Manual Rearview Mirror Windows The vehicle aerodynamics are

designed to improve fuel economy
If equipped, push the tab forward for performance. This may result in a
daytime use and pull it for nighttime { Warning pulsing sound when either rear
use to avoid glare from the window is down and the front
headlamps from behind. Never leave a child, a helpless windows are up. To reduce the
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, sound, open either a front window
Automatic Dimming especially with the windows or the sunroof, if equipped.
Rearview Mirror closed in warm or hot weather.
They can be overcome by the Power Windows
If equipped, automatic dimming extreme heat and suffer
reduces the glare of the headlamps permanent injuries or even death
from behind. This feature comes on from heat stroke. { Warning
when the vehicle is started.
Children could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Never
leave keys in a vehicle with
children. When there are children
in the rear seat, use the window
lockout button to prevent
operation of the windows. See
Keys on page 2-1.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Express-Up/Express-Down 2. Press and continue to hold the

Windows window switch until the window
is fully open.
A window with the express-up/down
feature allows it to be raised or 3. Pull up and hold the window
lowered without holding the switch. switch to close the window.
Press or pull the window switch fully Continue to hold it briefly after
and release it to activate the the window is fully closed.
express feature. The express mode 4. Repeat for each window that has
can be canceled by pressing or the express-up feature.
pulling the switch.
Anti-Pinch Feature
Programming the Power
Uplevel Shown, Base Similar Windows The anti-pinch feature is on
windows with the express-up
The driver door has switches that If the vehicle battery has been feature. If an object is in the way of
control the passenger and rear recharged, disconnected, the window as it is express-closing,
windows. The power windows work or replaced, windows with the or in certain weather conditions like
with the ignition in ACC/ express-up feature need to be severe icing, the window will stop
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN or with reprogrammed for this feature to and open to a factory preset
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) work. To program the window: position. The window functions
active. See Retained Accessory 1. Close all doors with the ignition normally once the obstruction is
Power (RAP) on page 9-18. in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/ removed.
Press the switch to lower the RUN position, or with Retained
window. Pull up on the front edge of Accessory Power (RAP) active.
the switch to raise the window. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9-18.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Rear Window Lockout Sun Visors Roof

Sunroof
The ignition must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) must be
active to operate the sunroof and
power sunshade. See Retained
page 9-18.
Pull the sun visor down to block If equipped, there may be a rear
glare. Detach the sun visor from the sunroof over the second row seats.
center mount to pivot to the side The rear sunroof does not open.
The rear window lockout feature window or, if equipped, extend
prevents the rear passenger along the rod.
windows from operating, except
from the driver position.
Press v to activate the rear
window lockout switch. The
indicator light comes on when
activated.
Press v again to deactivate the
lockout switch.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vent: Press and hold the front of

the switch to vent the sunroof. Press
and hold the rear of the switch to
close the sunroof.
Express-open/Express-close:
Press and release the rear of the
switch to express-open the sunroof.
Press and release the front of the
switch to express-close the sunroof.
Dirt and debris may collect on the
Manual Sunshade sunroof seal or in the track. This
The sunshades must be opened could cause an issue with sunroof
and closed manually. To open the operation or noise. It could also plug
sunshade, press the button on the the water drainage system.
sunshade handle to release it and Periodically open the sunroof and
guide it back. To close the remove any obstacles or loose
sunshade, pull the sunshade debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
forward until it latches. roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
If water is seen dripping into the
water drainage system, this is
normal.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Adding Equipment to the

Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-35
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-35
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Replacing Airbag System
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-21 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Head Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Replacing Safety Belt System Child Restraints
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Front Seats Infants and Young
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-41
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-25 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-43
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 When Should an Airbag Lower Anchors and Tethers
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 for Children (LATCH
Heated and Cooled Front What Makes an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Replacing LATCH System
How Does an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
What Will You See after an (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-53
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
Front Seats
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and Adjust the head restraint so that the To raise or lower the head restraint,
adjusted properly. top of the restraint is at the same press the button located on the side
height as the top of the occupant's of the head restraint, and pull up or
head. This position reduces the push the head restraint down, and
The vehicle's front seats have
chance of a neck injury in a crash. release the button. Pull and push on
adjustable head restraints in the
the head restraint after the button is
outboard seating positions.
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
To adjust the head restraint forward,
grasp the head restraint and pull
forward until the desired locking
position is reached.
To adjust the head restraint
rearward, press the button located
on the side of the head restraint,

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
and push the head restraint Front Seats 2. Driver Seat Height
rearward until the desired locking Adjustment Lever
position is reached. Try to move the 3. Seatback Lever
head restraint after the button is Seat Adjustment
To adjust a manual seat:
released to make sure that it is
locked in place. { Warning 1. Lift the handle (1) under the seat
to unlock it.
The front seat outboard head You can lose control of the
restraints are not removable. 2. Slide the seat to the desired
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
position, and then release the
Rear Seats seat while the vehicle is moving. handle (1).
Adjust the driver seat only when
The vehicle's second row seats 3. Try to move the seat back and
the vehicle is not moving.
have head restraints in the outboard forth to be sure it is locked in
seating positions that cannot be place.
adjusted.
Move the lever (2) up or down to
The vehicle's third row seats have raise or lower the seat.
headrests in the outboard seating
positions that cannot be adjusted. Use the lever (3) to adjust the
seatback. See Reclining Seatbacks
The second row head restraints and on page 3-5.
third row headrests are not
removable.
1. Seat Adjustment Handle

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Raise or lower the entire seat by
Power Seat Adjustment moving the rear of the control (1)
Lumbar Adjustment
up or down. Manual Lumbar
. Adjust the seatback by tilting the
top of the control (2) forward or
rearward.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3-5.
. Increase or decrease lumbar
support by pressing the front or
rear of the control (3).
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3-4.
1. Seat Adjustment Control
2. Seatback Control If equipped, move the handle
3. Lumbar Control forward or rearward to increase or
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: decrease lumbar support.
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the
control (1) forward or rearward.
. Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control (1) up
or down.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Power Lumbar Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you Do not have a seatback reclined if
could go into it, receiving neck or the vehicle is moving.
If equipped, press and hold the front other injuries.
or rear of control to increase or
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
The lap belt could go up over
decrease lumbar support. Release your abdomen. The belt forces
the control when the seatback would be there, not at your pelvic { Warning
reaches the desired level of lumbar bones. This could cause serious
support. If either seatback is not locked, it
internal injuries.
could move forward in a sudden
For proper protection when the stop or crash. That could cause
vehicle is in motion, have the injury to the person sitting there.
seatback upright. Then sit well Always push and pull on the
back in the seat and wear the seatbacks to be sure they are
safety belt properly. locked.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
2. Push and pull on the seatback to Memory Seats

make sure it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
If equipped, the controls on the
2. Move the seatback to the
driver door are used to program and
desired position, and then
To adjust a power seatback, recall memory settings for the driver
release the lever to lock the
if equipped: seat and outside mirrors.
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to . Tilt the top of the control Storing Memory Positions
make sure it is locked. rearward to recline. To save into memory:
To return the seatback to the upright . Tilt the top of the control forward 1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
position: to raise. recliner, and both outside
1. Lift the lever fully without mirrors.
applying pressure to the Not all vehicles will have the
seatback, and the seatback will ability to save and recall the
return to the upright position. mirror positions.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
2. Press and hold “1” until This feature is turned on or off using S (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press
two beeps sound. the vehicle personalization menu. to activate the recall. The vehicle
3. Repeat for a second driver See Vehicle Personalization (With must be in P (Park).
position using “2.” DIC Buttons) on page 5-45.
If this feature is programmed on in
To recall, press and release “1” or To stop recall movement, press one the vehicle personalization menu,
“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park). of the power seat controls, memory automatic seat movement occurs
A single beep will sound. The seat buttons, or the power mirror buttons. when the ignition key is removed.
and outside mirrors will move to the If something has blocked the driver A single beep sounds. The driver
position previously stored for the seat while recalling a memory seat moves back approximately
identified driver. position, the recall may stop. 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back
Remove the obstruction; then press
Memory Remote Recall farther, press S again until the seat
and hold the appropriate manual
is all the way back.
The memory feature can recall the control for the memory item that is
driver seat and outside mirrors to not recalling for two seconds. Try If something has blocked the driver
stored positions when entering the recalling the memory position again seat while recalling the exit position,
vehicle. by pressing the appropriate memory the recall may stop. Remove the
button. If the memory position is still obstruction; then press and hold the
To activate, unlock the driver door
not recalling, see your dealer for power seat control rearward for
with the Remote Keyless
service. two seconds. Try recalling the exit
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The driver
position again. If the exit position is
seat and outside mirrors will move Easy Exit Driver Seat still not recalling, see your dealer for
to the memory position associated
This feature can move the seat service.
with the transmitter used to unlock
the vehicle. rearward to allow extra room to exit See Vehicle Personalization (With
the vehicle. DIC Buttons) on page 5-45.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Heated and Cooled Front the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and one
Seats for the lowest.
The passenger heated seat may
{ Warning take longer to heat up.
If you cannot feel temperature The heated and/or cooled seats are
change or pain to the skin, the canceled after the ignition is
seat heater may cause burns. To turned off.
reduce the risk of burns, people Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
Remote Start Heated Seats
with such a condition should use Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
care when using the seat heater, Similar When it is cold outside, the heated
especially for long periods of seats may turn on automatically
If equipped, the buttons are on the during a remote vehicle start. The
time. Do not place anything on
center stack. To operate, the engine heated seats will be canceled when
the seat that insulates against must be running.
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, the ignition is turned on. Press the
cover, or similar item. This may I (Heated Seatback): If equipped, desired heated seat button to use
cause the seat heater to press to heat the seatback only. the heated seats after the vehicle is
started.
overheat. An overheated seat H (Cooled Seat): If equipped,
heater may cause a burn or may press to cool the entire seat. The heated seat button lights will
damage the seat. not turn on during a remote start.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to heat the seat and The temperature of an unoccupied
seatback. seat may be reduced.
Press the button once for the See Remote Vehicle Start on
highest setting. With each press of page 2-4.
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Rear Seats Entering and Exiting the

Third Row
{ Warning
Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return
the seat to the passenger seating
position. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure it is locked into To access the third row:
place. 1. Remove objects on the floor in
1. Seat Adjustment Handle front of or on the second row
2. Reclining Seatback Strap seat, or in the seat tracks on the
3. Sliding Seat Lever { Caution floor.
2. Move the front center console
Folding a rear seat with the safety armrest completely forward. See
belts still fastened may cause Center Console Storage on
damage to the seat or the safety page 4-2.
belts. Always unbuckle the safety 3. Place the folding armrests in the
belts and return them to their upright position.
normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat. 4. Make sure that the safety belt is
unfastened and in the stowed
position.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
5. Pull the sliding seat lever (3) 5. Push and pull on the seatback 3. Pull forward on the reclining
forward. The seatback will tilt and seat cushion to make sure seatback strap (2).
forward, and the seat will begin they are locked in place. The head restraint will fold down
sliding forward. Continue to push 6. Check that the safety belt is not automatically.
forward on the seatback until the under the seat cushion.
entire seat moves all the way To return the seatback to the
forward and the seat cushion is Reclining the Seatbacks seating position, lift the seatback
folded. and push it rearward until it locks
To recline the seatback: into place. Push and pull on the
Returning the Seat to the 1. Leaning rearward in the seat, seatback to make sure it is locked.
Seating Position pull the reclining seatback Pull up on the head restraint to
To return the second row seat to its strap (2). return it to the upright, locked
normal seating position: position.
2. Move the seatback to the
1. Remove objects on the floor desired position, and then Adjusting the Seats
behind the second row seat or in release the strap (2) to lock the
seatback in place. To adjust the second row seats, pull
the seat tracks on the floor. outward on the seat adjustment
2. Slide the seat rearward by 3. Push and pull on the seatback to handle (1). Slide the seat forward or
pushing on the seatback until make sure it is locked. rearward to the desired position.
the seat is locked into place. Release the handle (1), and push
Folding the Seatback
and pull on the seat to make sure it
3. Continue pushing the seatback To fold the second row seatbacks: is locked.
rearward until the seatback is
locked into place. 1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
4. Push down on the rear of the
seat cushion until it is locked in 2. Place the armrest in the upright
place. position, and unfasten the
safety belt.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Third Row Seats To fold the third row seatback:

1. If the second row seat is in the
{ Warning full rear position, adjust it
forward to allow the third row
Using the third row seating seat to fold fully flat.
position while the second row is 2. Remove anything on or under
folded, or pushed forward in the the seat.
entry position, could cause injury
in a sudden stop or crash. Be
sure to return the seat to the
passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure
it is locked into place. 4. Pull up on the release lever on
the back of the seat.
Folding the Seatback 5. Push the seatback forward to
lay flat.
{ Caution Returning the Seat to the
Seating Position
Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause To return the seatback to the
damage to the seat or the safety 3. Disconnect the rear safety belt seating position:
mini-latch, using a key in the slot
belts. Always unbuckle the safety 1. From the rear of the vehicle,
on the mini-buckle, and let the
belts and return them to their raise the seatback to the upright
belt retract into the headliner. position using the pull strap on
normal stowed position before Stow the mini-latch in the holder
folding a rear seat. the back of the third row seat,
in the headliner.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
or lift the seatback and push it

into place from inside the Warning (Continued) { Caution
vehicle.
sure that the safety belts are Folding a rear seat with the safety
properly routed and attached, and belts still fastened may cause
{ Warning are not twisted. damage to the seat or the safety
If either seatback is not locked, it belts. Always unbuckle the safety
could move forward in a sudden 3. Reconnect the center safety belt belts and return them to their
stop or crash. That could cause mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do normal stowed position before
injury to the person sitting there. not let it twist. folding a rear seat.
Always push and pull on the 4. Pull on the safety belt to be sure
seatbacks to be sure they are the mini-latch is secure. 3. Fold the seatback down. See
locked. “Folding the Seatback” earlier in
Removing the Third Row Seats this section.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to To remove a third row seat: 4. Remove the rear bolts on the
make sure it is locked in place. 1. Remove the cargo management floor on each side of the seat.
system, if it is installed. See 5. Remove the seat by tilting it
{ Warning Cargo Management System on slightly upward, and then pulling
page 4-3. it out of the rear of the vehicle in
A safety belt that is improperly one motion.
2. Remove anything on or under
routed, not properly attached,
the seat. 6. Replace the bolts in the floor
or twisted will not provide the
holes for storage.
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Installing the Third Row Seats 2. Place the seat on the vehicle Safety Belts
floor so that the front seat hooks
To reinstall a third row seat: This section of the manual
are on the vehicle bars.
1. Before installing the seat, the describes how to use safety belts
3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to
seatback must be folded properly. It also describes some
55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the
forward. See “Folding the things not to do with safety belts.
seat to make sure it is locked in
Seatback” earlier in this section.
place.
The seats must be placed in the
4. Raise the seatback to its upright
{ Warning
proper locations to attach
position. Push and pull on the Do not let anyone ride where a
correctly. The wider seat must
seatback to make sure it is safety belt cannot be worn
be installed on the driver side
locked into place. properly. In a crash, if you or your
and the narrower seat on the
passenger side. Remove the 5. Reconnect the center safety belt passenger(s) are not wearing
bolts from the holes in the floor mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do safety belts, injuries can be much
before installing the seats. not let it twist. worse than if you are wearing
safety belts. You can be seriously
injured or killed by hitting things
inside the vehicle harder or by
being ejected from the vehicle. In
addition, anyone who is not
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing

Warning (Continued) safety belts makes such good
sense.
are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow Questions and Answers About
passengers to ride in any area of Safety Belts
the vehicle that is not equipped Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
with seats and safety belts. after a crash if I am wearing a
Always wear a safety belt, and safety belt?
check that all passenger(s) are A: You could be — whether you are
restrained properly too. wearing a safety belt or not.
Your chance of being conscious
This vehicle has indicators as a during and after a crash, so you
reminder to buckle the safety belts. can unbuckle and get out, is
See Safety Belt Reminders on When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted.
page 5-15. as fast as the vehicle does. If the Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. belts?
It could be the windshield, the
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts — not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. them. Whether or not an airbag
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Also, in nearly all states and in There are important things to know would apply force on your
all Canadian provinces, the law about wearing a safety belt properly. abdomen. This could cause
requires wearing safety belts. serious or even fatal injuries.
. Wear the shoulder belt over the
How to Wear Safety Belts shoulder and across the chest.
Properly These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
This section is only for people of
forces. The shoulder belt locks if
adult size.
there is a sudden stop or crash.
There are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller
{ Warning
children and infants. If a child will be You can be seriously injured,
riding in the vehicle, see Older or even killed, by not wearing
Children on page 3-36 or Infants your safety belt properly.
and Young Children on page 3-38. . Sit up straight and always keep
. Never allow the lap or
Follow those rules for everyone's your feet on the floor in front
protection. of you. shoulder belt to become
loose or twisted.
It is very important for all occupants . Always use the correct buckle
to buckle up. Statistics show that for your seating position.
. Never wear the shoulder belt
unbelted people are hurt more often under both arms or behind
. Wear the lap part of the belt low your back.
in crashes than those who are and snug on the hips, just
wearing safety belts. touching the thighs. In a crash,
. Never route the lap or
this applies force to the strong shoulder belt over an
pelvic bones and you would be armrest.
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
If you are using a rear seating
position with a detachable safety
belt and the safety belt is not
attached, see “Returning the Seat to
the Seating Position” under Third
Row Seats on page 3-11 for
instruction on reconnecting the
safety belt to the mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt the belt across you. Do not let it buckle until it clicks.
properly. get twisted. 4. Pull up on the latch plate to
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt
adjustable, so you can sit up you pull the belt across you very is not long enough, see Safety
straight. To see how, see “Seats” quickly. If this happens, let the Belt Extender on page 3-21.
in the Index. belt go back slightly to unlock it. Position the release button on
Then pull the belt across you the buckle so that the safety belt
more slowly. could be quickly unbuckled if
If the shoulder portion of a necessary.
passenger belt is pulled out all 5. If equipped with a shoulder belt
the way, the child restraint height adjuster, move it to the
locking feature may be engaged. height that is right for you. See
If this happens, let the belt go “Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
back all the way and start again.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
later in this section for Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

instructions on use and
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
important safety information.
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
but not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to but not
contacting the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
To unlatch the belt, push the button the safety belt in a crash. See How
on the buckle. The belt should to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
return to its stowed position. Slide page 3-15.
the latch plate up the safety belt
6. To make the lap part tight, pull webbing when the safety belt is not
up on the shoulder belt. in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt,
It may be necessary to pull the
near the guide loop on the side wall.
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully Before a door is closed, be sure the
tighten the lap belt on smaller safety belt is out of the way. If a
occupants. door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort

This vehicle has safety belt Guides
pretensioners for the front outboard Rear safety belt comfort guides may
occupants. Although the safety belt provide added safety belt comfort
pretensioners cannot be seen, they for older children who have
are part of the safety belt assembly. outgrown booster seats and for
They can help tighten the safety some adults. When installed on a
belts during the early stages of a shoulder belt and properly adjusted,
moderate to severe frontal, near the comfort guide positions the
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold shoulder belt away from the neck
conditions for pretensioner and head.
activation are met. Safety belt
To move it down, push down on the pretensioners can also help tighten Second Row Seats
release button and move the height the safety belts in a side crash or a There are comfort guides for the
adjuster to the desired position. You rollover event. rear outboard seating positions in
can move the height adjuster up by Pretensioners work only once. If the the second row stored on a clip on
pushing up on the shoulder belt pretensioners activate in a crash, the interior trim next to the outboard
guide. they will need to be replaced, and seatback.
After the adjuster is set to the probably other new parts for the
desired position, try to move it down vehicle's safety belt system. See
without pushing the release button Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
to make sure it has locked into after a Crash on page 3-22.
position.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
To install:
2. Place the guide over the belt, 3. Be sure that the belt is not
and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The
1. Remove the guide from its belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be behind the
storage clip on the interior trim belt with the plastic guide on the
next to the outboard seatback. front.
{ Warning
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
To remove and store the comfort

Warning (Continued) guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
and across the chest. These parts be removed from the guide. Slide
of the body are best able to take the guide onto its storage clip.
belt restraining forces.
Third Row Seats
{ Warning
An adjustable comfort guide is used
A safety belt that is not properly
for the center seating position in the
worn may not provide the
third row seat. The adjustable
protection needed in a crash. The comfort guide attaches to a loop on
person wearing the belt could be the upper part of the seatback,
seriously injured. The shoulder behind the left outboard headrest.
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the Comfort guides for the third row
safety belt as described seating positions are available from
previously in this section. Make your dealer. Instructions are
sure the shoulder portion of the included with the guide.
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
For the third row outboard seating A pregnant woman should wear a use it for securing child seats. To
positions, the comfort guide, once lap-shoulder belt, and the lap wear it, attach it to the regular safety
installed, is a clip on the interior trim portion should be worn as low as belt. See the instruction sheet that
next to the outboard seatback. possible, below the rounding, comes with the extender.
throughout the pregnancy.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
Pregnancy to protect the mother. When a safety Now and then, check that the safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely belt reminder light, safety belts,
Safety belts work for everyone,
that the fetus will not be hurt in a buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
including pregnant women. Like all
crash. For pregnant women, as for anchorages are all working properly.
occupants, they are more likely to
anyone, the key to making safety Look for any other loose or
be seriously injured if they do not
belts effective is wearing them damaged safety belt system parts
wear safety belts.
properly. that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
Safety Belt Extender to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
But if a safety belt is not long frayed, get a new one right away.
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5-15.
long enough for you. To help avoid Keep safety belts clean and dry.
personal injury, do not let someone See Safety Belt Care on page 3-22.
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that
Crash were used during any crash may
{ Warning have been stressed or damaged.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

{ Warning See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety replaced.
a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5-16.
possible.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Airbag System The vehicle may have the following

airbag:
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
The vehicle has the following inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
. A front center airbag for the
airbags: very quickly to do their job.
driver and front outboard
. A frontal airbag for the driver. passenger. Here are the most important things
. A frontal airbag for the front All vehicle airbags have the word to know about the airbag system:
outboard passenger. AIRBAG on the trim or on an
. A seat-mounted side impact attached label near the deployment { Warning
airbag for the driver. opening.
You can be severely injured or
. A seat-mounted side impact For frontal airbags, the word killed in a crash if you are not
airbag for the front outboard AIRBAG is on the center of the wearing your safety belt, even
passenger. steering wheel for the driver and on with airbags. Airbags are
the instrument panel for the front designed to work with safety
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver outboard passenger.
and for the second and third row belts, not replace them. Also,
passengers seated directly For the front center airbag, the word airbags are not designed to inflate
behind the driver. AIRBAG is on the inboard side of in every crash. In some crashes
the driver seatback. safety belts are the only restraint.
. A roof-rail airbag for the front
For seat-mounted side impact See When Should an Airbag
outboard passenger and the
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the Inflate? on page 3-27.
second and third row
passengers seated directly side of the seatback closest to Wearing your safety belt during a
behind the front outboard the door. crash helps reduce the chance of
passenger. For roof-rail airbags, the word hitting things inside the vehicle or
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim. being ejected from it. Airbags are
Airbags are designed to supplement “supplemental restraints” to the
the protection provided by safety (Continued)
belts. Even though today's airbags

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued) { Warning

safety belts. Everyone in the should sit as far back as possible Children who are up against,
vehicle should wear a safety belt while still maintaining control of or very close to, any airbag when
properly, whether or not there is the vehicle. it inflates can be seriously injured
an airbag for that person. Occupants should not lean on or or killed. Always secure children
sleep against the front center properly in the vehicle. To read
armrest or console in vehicles how, see Older Children on
page 3-36 or Infants and Young
{ Warning with a front center airbag.
Children on page 3-38.
Occupants should not lean on or
Because airbags inflate with great
sleep against the door or side
force and faster than the blink of
windows in seating positions with
an eye, anyone who is up
seat-mounted side impact airbags
against, or very close to any
and/or roof-rail airbags.
airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not
sit unnecessarily close to any
airbag, as you would be if sitting
on the edge of the seat or leaning There is an airbag readiness light
forward. Safety belts help keep on the instrument cluster, which
shows the airbag symbol.
you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear a safety The system checks the airbag
belt, even with airbags. The driver electrical system for malfunctions.
(Continued) The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5-16 for
more information.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Where Are the Airbags?
The front outboard passenger If the vehicle has a front center

frontal airbag is in the passenger airbag, it is in the inboard side of the
The driver frontal airbag is in the side instrument panel. driver seatback.
center of the steering wheel.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Warning (Continued)
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger Do not use seat or console
Side Similar Side Similar accessories that block the
The driver and front outboard The roof-rail airbags for the driver, inflation path of a seat-mounted
passenger seat-mounted side front outboard passenger, and side impact airbag or the front
impact airbags are in the side of the second and third row outboard center airbag, if equipped.
seatbacks closest to the door. passengers are in the ceiling above Never secure anything to the roof
the side windows. of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie-down
{ Warning through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
If something is between an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
occupant and an airbag, the blocked.
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
When Should an Airbag It depends on what is hit, the side. The front center airbag is not
direction of the impact, and how designed to inflate in frontal
Inflate? quickly the vehicle slows down. impacts, near frontal impacts,
This vehicle is equipped with Frontal airbags may inflate at or rear impacts.
airbags. See Airbag System on different crash speeds depending on Seat-mounted side impact airbags
page 3-23. Airbags are designed to whether the vehicle hits an object are designed to inflate in moderate
inflate if the impact exceeds the straight on or at an angle, and to severe side crashes depending
specific airbag system's deployment whether the object is fixed or on the location of the impact.
threshold. Deployment thresholds moving, rigid or deformable, narrow Seat-mounted side impact airbags
are used to predict how severe a or wide. are not designed to inflate in frontal
crash is likely to be in time for the impacts, near frontal impacts,
airbags to inflate and help restrain Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear rollovers, or rear impacts.
the occupants. The vehicle has A seat-mounted side impact airbag
electronic sensors that help the impacts, or many side impacts.
is designed to inflate on the side of
airbag system determine the In addition, the vehicle has the vehicle that is struck.
severity of the impact. Deployment advanced technology frontal
thresholds can vary with specific airbags. Advanced technology Roof-rail airbags are designed to
vehicle design. frontal airbags adjust the restraint inflate in moderate to severe side
according to crash severity. crashes depending on the location
Frontal airbags are designed to of the impact. In addition, these
inflate in moderate to severe frontal The front center airbag, if equipped, roof-rail airbags are designed to
or near frontal crashes to help is designed to inflate in moderate to inflate during a rollover or in a
reduce the potential for severe severe side crashes depending severe frontal impact. Roof-rail
injuries, mainly to the driver's or upon the location of the impact, airbags are not designed to inflate in
front outboard passenger's head when either side of the vehicle is rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags
and chest. struck. In addition, the front center will inflate when either side of the
Whether the frontal airbags will or airbag is designed to inflate when vehicle is struck, if the sensing
should inflate is not based primarily the sensing system predicts that the
on how fast the vehicle is traveling. vehicle is about to roll over on its

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
system predicts that the vehicle is wheel or the instrument panel. In Airbags should never be regarded
about to roll over on its side, or in a moderate to severe side collisions, as anything more than a supplement
severe frontal impact. even belted occupants can contact to safety belts.
In any particular crash, no one can the inside of the vehicle.
say whether an airbag should have Airbags supplement the protection What Will You See after
inflated simply because of the provided by safety belts by an Airbag Inflates?
vehicle damage or the repair costs. distributing the force of the impact
After the frontal airbags and
more evenly over the
seat-mounted side impact airbags
What Makes an Airbag occupant's body.
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
Inflate? Rollover capable roof-rail airbags quickly that some people may not
are also designed to help contain even realize an airbag inflated. The
In a deployment event, the sensing
the head and chest of occupants in front center airbag, if equipped, and
system sends an electrical signal
the outboard seating positions in the the roof-rail airbags may still be at
triggering a release of gas from the
first, second, and third rows. The least partially inflated for some time
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
rollover capable roof-rail airbags are after they inflate. Some components
airbag causing the bag to break out
designed to help reduce the risk of of the airbag module may be hot for
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
full or partial ejection in rollover several minutes. For location of the
and related hardware are all part of
events, although no system can airbags, see Where Are the
the airbag module.
prevent all such ejections. Airbags? on page 3-25.
For airbag locations, see Where Are
But airbags would not help in many The parts of the airbag that come
the Airbags? on page 3-25.
types of collisions, primarily into contact with you may be warm,
because the occupant's motion is but not too hot to touch. There may
How Does an Airbag not toward those airbags. See When be some smoke and dust coming
Restrain? Should an Airbag Inflate? on from the vents in the deflated
page 3-27 for more information. airbags. Airbag inflation does not
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted prevent the driver from seeing out of
occupants can contact the steering

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
the windshield or being able to steer fuel system after the airbags inflate. In many crashes severe enough to
the vehicle, nor does it prevent The feature may also activate, inflate the airbag, windshields are
people from leaving the vehicle. without airbag inflation, after an broken by vehicle deformation.
event that exceeds a predetermined Additional windshield breakage may
{ Warning threshold. You can lock the doors,
and turn off the interior lamps and
also occur from the front outboard
passenger airbag.
When an airbag inflates, there hazard warning flashers by using . Airbags are designed to inflate
may be dust in the air. This dust the controls for those features. only once. After an airbag
could cause breathing problems inflates, you will need some new
for people with a history of { Warning parts for the airbag system.
asthma or other breathing trouble. If you do not get them, the
To avoid this, everyone in the A crash severe enough to inflate airbag system will not be there
vehicle should get out as soon as the airbags may have also to help protect you in another
it is safe to do so. If you have damaged important functions in crash. A new system will include
breathing problems but cannot the vehicle, such as the fuel airbag modules and possibly
get out of the vehicle after an system, brake and steering other parts. The service manual
airbag inflates, then get fresh air systems, etc. Even if the vehicle for the vehicle covers the need
by opening a window or a door. appears to be drivable after a to replace other parts.
If you experience breathing moderate crash, there may be . The vehicle has a crash sensing
problems following an airbag concealed damage that could and diagnostic module which
deployment, you should seek make it difficult to safely operate records information after a
medical attention. the vehicle. crash. See Vehicle Data
Use caution if you should attempt Recording and Privacy on
to restart the engine after a crash page 13-14 and Event Data
The vehicle has a feature that may
has occurred. Recorders on page 13-14.
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Let only qualified technicians occupant and determine if the front
work on the airbag systems. outboard passenger frontal airbag
Improper service can mean that should be allowed to inflate or not.
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for According to accident statistics,
service. children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
Canada and Mexico child restraint for their weight
Passenger Sensing and size.
System The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible Whenever possible, children age
The vehicle has a passenger during the system check. When the 12 and under should be secured in
sensing system for the front system check is complete, either the a rear seating position.
outboard passenger position. The word ON or OFF, or the symbol for
passenger airbag status indicator Never put a rear-facing child seat in
on or off, will be visible. See the front. This is because the risk to
will light on the instrument panel Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
when the vehicle is started. the rear-facing child is so great,
on page 5-17.
if the airbag inflates.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag under
{ Warning
certain conditions. No other airbag A child in a rear-facing child
is affected by the passenger restraint can be seriously injured
sensing system. or killed if the passenger frontal
United States The passenger sensing system airbag inflates. This is because
works with sensors that are part of the back of the rear-facing child
the front outboard passenger seat. restraint would be very close to
The sensors are designed to detect the inflating airbag. A child in a
the presence of a properly-seated (Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
The passenger sensing system is The passenger sensing system is

Warning (Continued) designed to turn off the front designed to turn on the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag if: outboard passenger frontal airbag
forward-facing child restraint can anytime the system senses that a
be seriously injured or killed if the
. The front outboard passenger
seat is unoccupied. person of adult size is sitting
passenger frontal airbag inflates properly in the front outboard
and the passenger seat is in a . The system determines that an passenger seat.
forward position. infant is present in a child
restraint. When the passenger sensing
Even if the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
system has turned off the . A front outboard passenger enabled, the on indicator will light
passenger frontal airbag, no takes his/her weight off of the and stay lit as a reminder that the
system is fail-safe. No one can seat for a period of time. airbag is active.
guarantee that an airbag will not . There is a critical problem with For some children, including
inflate under some unusual the airbag system or the children in child restraints, and for
circumstance, even though the passenger sensing system. very small adults, the passenger
airbag is off. sensing system may or may not turn
When the passenger sensing
Secure rear-facing child restraints system has turned off the front off the front outboard passenger
in a rear seat, even if the airbag outboard passenger frontal airbag, frontal airbag, depending upon the
is off. If you secure a the off indicator will light and stay lit person’s seating posture and body
forward-facing child restraint in as a reminder that the airbag is off. build. Everyone in the vehicle who
See Passenger Airbag Status has outgrown child restraints should
the front outboard passenger
Indicator on page 5-17. wear a safety belt properly —
seat, always move the seat as far
whether or not there is an airbag for
back as it will go. It is better to that person.
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
3. Remove any additional items Also make sure the child

{ Warning from the seat such as blankets, restraint is not trapped under the
cushions, seat covers, seat vehicle head restraint. If this
If the airbag readiness light ever heaters, or seat massagers. happens, adjust the head
comes on and stays on, it means restraint. See Head Restraints
that something may be wrong 4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions provided on page 3-2.
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, by the child restraint 6. Restart the vehicle.
have the vehicle serviced right manufacturer and refer to The passenger sensing system
Securing Child Restraints (Rear may or may not turn off the
away. See Airbag Readiness
Seat) on page 3-51 or Securing airbag for a child in a child
Light on page 5-16 for more
Child Restraints (Front restraint depending upon the
information, including important Passenger Seat) on page 3-53.
safety information. child’s size. It is better to secure
5. If, after reinstalling the child the child restraint in a rear seat.
restraint and restarting the
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
Child Restraint turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
The passenger sensing system is recline the vehicle seatback and
designed to turn off the front adjust the seat cushion,
outboard passenger frontal airbag if if adjustable, to make sure that
the system determines that an infant the vehicle seatback is not
is present in a child restraint. If a pushing the child restraint into
child restraint has been installed the seat cushion.
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an 2. Remove any additional material

Adult-Sized Occupant from the seat, such as blankets, Warning (Continued)
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers. Also serious injury or even death. An
remove laptops, or other adult-sized occupant should not
electronic devices. ride in the front outboard
passenger seat, if the passenger
3. Place the seatback in the fully airbag off indicator is lit.
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
Additional Factors Affecting
cushion, with legs comfortably System Operation
extended. Safety belts help keep the
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger in position on the seat
person remain in this position for during vehicle maneuvers and
two to three minutes after the on braking, which helps the passenger
If a person of adult size is sitting in sensing system maintain the
indicator is lit.
the front outboard passenger seat, passenger airbag status. See
but the off indicator is lit, it could be “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
because that person is not sitting { Warning in the Index for additional
properly in the seat. Use the information about the importance of
following steps to allow the system If the front outboard passenger
proper restraint use.
to detect that person and enable the airbag is turned off for an
adult-sized occupant, the airbag A thick layer of additional material,
front outboard passenger frontal
will not be able to inflate and help such as a blanket or cushion,
airbag:
protect that person in a crash, or aftermarket equipment such as
1. Turn the vehicle off. resulting in an increased risk of seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
(Continued) passenger sensing system

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
operates. We recommend that you the seat. If the passenger airbag Servicing the
not use seat covers or other is turned on, the on indicator will
aftermarket equipment except when be lit.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
approved by GM for your specific If the passenger seat gets wet, dry Airbags affect how the vehicle
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the seat immediately. If the airbag should be serviced. There are parts
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on readiness light is lit, do not install a of the airbag system in several
page 3-35 for more information child restraint or allow anyone to places around the vehicle. Your
about modifications that can affect occupy the seat. See Airbag dealer and the service manual have
how the system operates. Readiness Light on page 5-16 for information about servicing the
A wet seat can affect the important safety information. vehicle and the airbag system. To
performance of the passenger purchase a service manual, see
The on indicator may be lit if an Service Publications Ordering
sensing system. Here is how: object, such as a briefcase, Information on page 13-11.
. The passenger sensing system handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
may turn off the passenger other electronic device, is put on an
airbag when liquid is soaked into unoccupied seat. If this is not
{ Warning
the seat. If this happens, the off desired remove the object from For up to 10 seconds after the
indicator will be lit, and the the seat. vehicle is turned off and the
airbag readiness light on the battery is disconnected, an airbag
instrument panel will also be lit. { Warning can still inflate during improper
. Liquid pooled on the seat that service. You can be injured if you
has not soaked in may make it Stowing of articles under the are close to an airbag when it
more likely that the passenger passenger seat or between the inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
sensing system will turn on the passenger seat cushion and They are probably part of the
passenger airbag while a child seatback may interfere with the airbag system. Be sure to follow
restraint or child occupant is on proper operation of the passenger
sensing system. (Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Your dealer and the service manual If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail
Warning (Continued) have information about the location airbags, see Different Size Tires
of the airbag sensors, sensing and and Wheels on page 10-52 for
proper service procedures, and diagnostic module, and airbag additional information.
make sure the person performing wiring.
work for you is qualified to do so. If you have to modify your vehicle
In addition, the vehicle has a because you have a disability and
passenger sensing system that you have questions about whether
Adding Equipment to the includes sensors as part of the front the modifications will affect the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle outboard passenger seat. The vehicle's airbag system, or if you
passenger sensing system may not have questions about whether the
Adding accessories that change the operate properly if the original seat airbag system will be affected if the
vehicle's frame, bumper system, trim is replaced with non-GM vehicle is modified for any other
height, front end, or side sheet covers, upholstery, or trim, or; with reason, call Customer Assistance.
metal may keep the airbag system GM covers, upholstery, or trim See Customer Assistance Offices
from working properly. designed for a different vehicle. Any on page 13-3.
The operation of the airbag system object, such as an aftermarket seat
can also be affected by changing heater or a comfort-enhancing pad Airbag System Check
any parts of the front seats, safety or device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also The airbag system does not need
belts, airbag sensing and diagnostic regularly scheduled maintenance or
module, steering wheel, instrument interfere with the operation of the
passenger sensing system. This replacement. Make sure the airbag
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, readiness light is working. See
ceiling or pillar garnish trim, could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger Airbag Readiness Light on
overhead console, front sensors, page 5-16.
side impact sensors, airbag wiring, airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
or the front center console if the sensing system from properly
vehicle has a front center airbag. turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-30.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
{ Caution Warning (Continued) Child Restraints

If an airbag covering is damaged, protect you and your Older Children
opened, or broken, the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
may not work properly. Do not in serious injury or even death. To
open or break the airbag help make sure the airbag
coverings. If there are any systems are working properly
opened or broken airbag after a crash, have them
coverings, have the airbag inspected and any necessary
covering and/or airbag module replacements made as soon as
replaced. For the location of the possible.
airbags, see Where Are the
Airbags? on page 3-25. See your If an airbag inflates, you will need to
dealer for service. replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer for service.
Replacing Airbag System If the airbag readiness light stays on Older children who have outgrown
Parts after a Crash after the vehicle is started or comes booster seats should wear the
on when you are driving, the airbag vehicle safety belts.
system may not work properly. Have
{ Warning the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
A crash can damage the airbag
page 5-16.
systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system may
not work properly and may not
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
The manufacturer instructions that

. Can proper safety belt fit be In a crash, children who are not
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the buckled up can strike other people
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no, who are buckled up, or can be
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat. thrown out of the vehicle. Older
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to children need to use safety belts
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts? properly.
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the { Warning
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. Never allow more than one child
belt can provide. The shoulder
to wear the same safety belt. The
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit safety belt cannot properly spread
Does the shoulder belt rest on the impact forces. In a crash, they
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs. can be crushed together and
If no, try using the rear safety
This applies belt force to the seriously injured. A safety belt
belt comfort guide, if available.
child's pelvic bones in a crash. must be used by only one person
See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt It should never be worn over the at a time.
on page 3-16. If a comfort guide abdomen, which could cause
is not available, or if the severe or even fatal internal
shoulder belt still does not rest injuries in a crash.
on the shoulder, then return to Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
the booster seat. Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
. Does the lap belt fit low and page 3-16.
snug on the hips, touching the According to accident statistics,
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, children are safer when properly
return to the booster seat. restrained in a rear seating position.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Warning (Continued)
Infants and Young
Children
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the
the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
{ Warning restrained while in a vehicle.
Never allow a child to wear the

safety belt with the shoulder belt
{ Warning
behind their back. A child can be Children can be seriously injured
seriously injured by not wearing or strangled if a shoulder belt is
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a wrapped around their neck. The
crash, the child would not be shoulder belt can tighten but
restrained by the shoulder belt. cannot be loosened if it is locked.
The child could move too far The shoulder belt locks when it is
forward increasing the chance of pulled all the way out of the
head and neck injury. The child retractor. It unlocks when the
might also slide under the lap shoulder belt is allowed to go all
(Continued) (Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Children who are not restrained

Warning (Continued) properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
the way back into the retractor,
but it cannot do this if it is
wrapped around a child’s neck. { Warning
If the shoulder belt is locked and Never hold an infant or a child
tightened around a child’s neck, while riding in a vehicle. Due to
the only way to loosen the belt is crash forces, an infant or a child
to cut it. will become so heavy it is not
Never leave children unattended possible to hold it during a crash.
in a vehicle and never allow For example, in a crash at only
children to play with the safety 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
belts. infant will suddenly become a { Warning
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
Children who are up against,
arms. An infant should be
Every time infants and young or very close to, any airbag when
children ride in vehicles, they should secured in an appropriate
it inflates can be seriously injured
have the protection provided by restraint.
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
appropriate child restraints. Neither child restraint in the front
the vehicle's safety belt system nor passenger seat. Secure a
its airbag system is designed rear-facing child restraint in a
for them. rear seat.
It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a
rear seat. If a forward-facing child
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
sure it is designed to be used in

Warning (Continued) a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
restraint must be secured in the that it meets federal motor
front passenger seat, always vehicle safety standards.
move the front passenger seat as
The restraint manufacturer
far back as it will go.
instructions that come with the
If a child restraint is installed in restraint state the weight and
the second row center seat, move height limitations for a particular
the second row seat to the child restraint. In addition, there
rearward position, whenever are many kinds of restraints
possible, to minimize contact with available for children with
the front center airbag, Q: What are the different types of special needs.
if equipped. add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which { Warning
are purchased by the vehicle
owner, are available in four basic To reduce the risk of neck and
types. Selection of a particular head injury during a crash, infants
restraint should take into need complete support. In a
consideration not only the child's crash, if an infant is in a
weight, height, and age but also rear-facing child restraint, the
whether or not the restraint will crash forces can be distributed
be compatible with the motor across the strongest part of an
vehicle in which it will be used. infant's body, the back and
For most basic types of child shoulders. Infants should always
restraints, there are many be secured in rear-facing child
different models available. When restraints.
purchasing a child restraint, be

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Child Restraint Systems

{ Warning
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal Forward-Facing Child Seat
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides
crash, young children should restraint for the child's body with the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness.
always be secured in appropriate restraint with the seating surface
child restraints. against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a

Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
{ Warning When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual.
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
Booster Seats instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured
A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a
designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure
vehicle's safety belt system. people in the vehicle. Be sure to
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas of the United States
seats by lap belts or the lap belt and Canada, Certified Child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Passenger Safety Technicians
the LATCH system. See Lower (CPSTs) are available to inspect
Anchors and Tethers for Children and demonstrate how to correctly
(LATCH System) on page 3-44. use and install child restraints. In
the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Administration (NHTSA) website to Whenever possible, children age

locate the nearest child safety seat 12 and under should be secured in Warning (Continued)
inspection station. For CPST a rear seating position.
availability in Canada, check with injured or killed if the right front
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger airbag inflates and the
Transport Canada or the Provincial front center airbag in the inboard
Ministry of Transportation office. passenger seat is in a forward
side of the driver seat. Even with a position.
Securing the Child Within the front center airbag, a child restraint
can be installed in any second row Even if the passenger sensing
Child Restraint
seating position. system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
{ Warning Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
system is fail-safe. No one can
A child can be seriously injured or the rear-facing child is so great if the guarantee that an airbag will not
killed in a crash if the child is not airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual
properly secured in the child circumstance, even though it is
turned off. Secure rear-facing
restraint. Secure the child { Warning child restraints in a rear seat,
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint. A child in a rear-facing child even if the front passenger frontal
restraint can be seriously injured airbag is off.
or killed if the right front It is also better to secure a
Where to Put the passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in a
Restraint because the back of the rear seat. If a forward-facing child
rear-facing child restraint would restraint must be secured in the
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when be very close to the inflating right front seat, always move the
properly restrained in a child airbag. A child in a forward-facing front passenger seat as far back
restraint system or infant restraint child restraint can be seriously as it will go.
system secured in a rear seating (Continued) (Continued)
position.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
to access adjacent safety belt restraint to the anchors in the

Warning (Continued) assemblies or LATCH anchors for vehicle. The LATCH system is
additional passengers or child designed to make installation of a
See Passenger Sensing System restraints. Adjacent seating child restraint easier.
on page 3-30 for additional positions should not be used if the
information. In order to use the LATCH system in
child restraint prevents access to or your vehicle, you need a child
If a child restraint is installed in a interferes with the routing of the restraint that has LATCH
second row center seat, move the safety belt. attachments. LATCH-compatible
second row seat to the rearward Wherever a child restraint is rear-facing and forward-facing child
position, whenever possible, to installed, be sure to secure the child seats can be properly installed
minimize contact with the front restraint properly. using either the LATCH anchors or
center airbag, if equipped. Keep in mind that an unsecured the vehicle’s safety belts. Do not
child restraint can move around in a use both the safety belts and the
collision or sudden stop and injure LATCH anchorage system to secure
When securing a child restraint in a
people in the vehicle. Be sure to a rear-facing or forward-facing
rear seating position, study the
properly secure any child restraint in child seat.
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is the vehicle — even when no child is Booster seats use the vehicle’s
compatible with this vehicle. in it. safety belts to secure the child in
the booster seat. If the manufacturer
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some Lower Anchors and recommends that the booster seat
be secured with the LATCH system,
may fit in certain seating positions Tethers for Children this can be done as long as the
better than others. Always make (LATCH System) booster seat can be positioned
sure the child restraint is properly
The LATCH system secures a child properly and there is no interference
secured.
restraint during driving or in a crash. with the proper positioning of the
Depending on where you place the LATCH attachments on the child lap-shoulder belt on the child.
child restraint and the size of the restraint are used to attach the child
child restraint, you may not be able

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Make sure to follow the instructions Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor
that came with the child restraint,
and also the instructions in this
manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
The LATCH anchorage system can
be used until the combined weight
of the child plus the child restraint is
29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt Lower anchors (1) are metal bars A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of
alone instead of the LATCH built into the vehicle. There are two the child restraint to the vehicle.
anchorage system once the lower anchors for each LATCH A top tether anchor is built into
combined weight is more than seating position that will the vehicle. The top tether
29.5 kg (65 lbs). accommodate a child restraint with attachment (2) on the child restraint
lower attachments (2). connects to the top tether anchor in
The following explains how to attach the vehicle in order to reduce the
a child restraint with these forward movement and rotation of
attachments in the vehicle. the child restraint during driving or in
Not all vehicle seating positions or a crash.
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
The child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be Second Row — 60/40 Bench
attached. Be sure to read and follow I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
the instructions for your child positions with top tether anchors.
Second Row — Bucket
restraint.
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors. positions with two lower anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Be sure to use an anchor on the

same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
To assist in locating the top tether

anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is near the anchor.
Third Row
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
Third Row
The third row has one top tether
anchor at the bottom rear of the
center seatback. This anchor should
be used for the center seating
Second Row — Bucket Shown, position only. Never install two top
To assist in locating the lower Bench Similar tethers using the same top tether
anchors, each second row anchor The top tether anchors are at the anchor.
position has a label, near the crease bottom rear of the seatback for each Do not secure a child restraint in a
between the seatback and the seat seating position in the second row. position without a top tether anchor
cushion. if a national or local law requires

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
that the top tether be attached, or if

the instructions that come with the Warning (Continued) { Warning
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. restraint properly using the Children can be seriously injured
anchors, or use the vehicle safety or strangled if a shoulder belt is
According to accident statistics, belts to secure the restraint, wrapped around their neck. The
children and infants are safer when following the instructions that shoulder belt can tighten but
properly restrained in a child came with the child restraint and cannot be loosened if it is locked.
restraint system or infant restraint the instructions in this manual. The shoulder belt locks when it is
system secured in a rear seating
pulled all the way out of the
position. See Where to Put the
retractor. It unlocks when the
Restraint on page 3-43 for
shoulder belt is allowed to go all
additional information. { Warning the way back into the retractor,
Securing a Child Restraint Do not attach more than one child but it cannot do this if it is
Designed for the LATCH restraint to a single anchor. wrapped around a child’s neck.
System Attaching more than one child If the shoulder belt is locked and
restraint to a single anchor could tightened around a child’s neck,
{ Warning cause the anchor or attachment the only way to loosen the belt is
to cut it.
to come loose or even break
If a LATCH-type child restraint is during a crash. A child or others Buckle any unused safety belts
not attached to anchors or with could be injured. To reduce the behind the child restraint so
the safety belt, the child restraint risk of serious or fatal injuries children cannot reach them. Pull
will not be able to protect the child during a crash, attach only one the shoulder belt all the way out
correctly. In a crash, the child child restraint per anchor. of the retractor to set the lock,
could be seriously injured or and tighten the belt behind the
killed. Install a LATCH-type child child restraint after the child
(Continued) restraint has been installed.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
the rearward position, whenever child restraint manufacturer

{ Caution possible, to minimize contact with instructions and the instructions
the front center airbag. in this manual.
Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the If you need to secure more than one 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
vehicle’s safety belts. This may child restraint in the rear seat, see the desired seating
damage these parts. If necessary, Where to Put the Restraint on position.
move buckled safety belts to page 3-43. 1.2. To access the lower
avoid rubbing the LATCH This system is designed to make anchors in the second row,
attachments. installation of child restraints easier. it may help to recline the
When using lower anchors, do not seatback.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
use the vehicle's safety belts. Third row seatbacks must
with a safety belt buckled. This Instead, use the vehicle's anchors
could damage the safety belt or be upright before placing
and child restraint attachments to the child restraint on
the seat. Unbuckle and return the secure the restraints. Some
safety belt to its stowed position, the seat.
restraints also use another vehicle
before folding the seat. anchor to secure a top tether. 1.3. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
The vehicle may be equipped with a attachments to the lower 1.4. Attach and tighten the lower
front center airbag in the inboard anchors. If the child restraint attachments on the child
side of the driver seat. Even with a does not have lower restraint to the lower
front center airbag, a child restraint attachments or the desired anchors.
can be installed in any second row seating position does not have If necessary, adjust the
seating position. If a child restraint is lower anchors, secure the child angle of the second row
installed in a second row center restraint with the top tether and seatback to achieve a tight
seat, move the second row seat to the safety belts. Refer to your installation. Make sure the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
second row bench If the position you are using

seatbacks are aligned at does not have a headrest
the same angle. or head restraint and you
2. If the child restraint manufacturer are using a single tether,
recommends that the top tether route the tether over the
be attached, attach and tighten seatback.
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if the vehicle has one.
Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following If the position you are using
steps: has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. using a dual tether, route
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the tether around the
the top tether according to headrest or head restraint.
your child restraint
instructions and the If the position you are using
following instructions: does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using

has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
using a single tether, route seat, move the second row seat to
the tether over the headrest Warning (Continued) the rearward position, whenever
or head restraint. possible, to minimize contact with
working properly after a crash, the front center airbag.
3. Before placing a child in the see your dealer to have the
child restraint, make sure it is system inspected and any When securing a child restraint in a
securely held in place. To check, necessary replacements made as rear seating position, study the
grasp the child restraint at the soon as possible. instructions that came with the child
LATCH path and attempt to restraint to make sure it is
move it side to side and back compatible with this vehicle.
and forth. There should be no If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a If the child restraint has the LATCH
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of system, see Lower Anchors and
movement, for proper crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed. Tethers for Children (LATCH
installation. System) on page 3-44 for how and
New parts and repairs may be where to install the child restraint
Replacing LATCH System necessary even if the LATCH using LATCH. If a child restraint is
Parts After a Crash system was not being used at the secured in the vehicle using a
time of the crash. safety belt and it uses a top tether,
{ Warning Securing Child Restraints
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
A crash can damage the LATCH (Rear Seat) page 3-44 for top tether anchor
system in the vehicle. A damaged locations.
The vehicle may be equipped with a
LATCH system may not properly Do not secure a child seat in a
front center airbag in the inboard
secure the child restraint, position without a top tether anchor
side of the driver seat. Even with a
resulting in serious injury or even front center airbag, a child restraint if a national or local law requires
death in a crash. To help make can be installed in any second row that the top tether be anchored, or if
sure the LATCH system is seating position. If you install a child
(Continued) restraint in a second row center

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
the instructions that come with the or around the restraint. The child
child restraint say that the top strap restraint instructions will show
must be anchored. you how.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint or vehicle seat
position does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the safety
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
restraint. Secure the child in the out of the retractor to set the
child restraint when and as the lock. When the retractor lock is
instructions say. set, the shoulder belt can be
3. Push the latch plate into the tightened but not pulled out of
If more than one child restraint buckle until it clicks. the retractor.
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on
the Restraint on page 3-43. the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
1. Put the child restraint on necessary.
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
(Front Passenger Seat)
regarding the use of the top The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat
tether. See Lower Anchors and is a safer place to secure a
Tethers for Children (LATCH forward-facing child restraint. See
System) on page 3-44 for more Where to Put the Restraint on
information. page 3-43.
7. Before placing a child in the In addition, the vehicle has a
child restraint, make sure it is passenger sensing system which is
securely held in place. To check, designed to turn off the front
grasp the child restraint at the outboard passenger frontal airbag
5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to under certain conditions. See
on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back Passenger Sensing System on
shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child page 3-30 and Passenger Airbag
tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed, Status Indicator on page 5-17 for
and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than more information, including
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. important safety information.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint, Never put a rear-facing child seat in
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and the front. This is because the risk to
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position. the rear-facing child is so great,
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top if the airbag deploys.
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In Canada, the law requires that

{ Warning Warning (Continued) forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints attached.
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the
or killed if the front outboard airbag is off. If you secure a When using the lap-shoulder belt to
passenger frontal airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in secure the child restraint in this
This is because the back of the the front seat, always move the position, follow the instructions that
rear-facing child restraint would front passenger seat as far back came with the child restraint and the
following instructions:
be very close to the inflating as it will go. It is better to secure
airbag. A child in a forward-facing the child restraint in a rear seat. 1. Move the seat as far back as it
child restraint can be seriously will go before securing the
See Passenger Sensing System forward-facing child restraint.
injured or killed if the front on page 3-30 for additional
outboard passenger frontal airbag information. When the passenger sensing
inflates and the passenger seat is system has turned off the front
in a forward position. outboard passenger frontal
If the child restraint uses a top airbag, the off indicator on the
Even if the passenger sensing tether, see Lower Anchors and
system has turned off the front passenger airbag status
Tethers for Children (LATCH indicator should light and stay lit
outboard passenger frontal System) on page 3-44 for top tether when the vehicle is started. See
airbag, no system is fail-safe. No anchor locations. Passenger Airbag Status
one can guarantee that an airbag Indicator on page 5-17.
Do not secure a child seat in a
will not deploy under some
position without a top tether anchor 2. Put the child restraint on
unusual circumstance, even
if a national or local law requires the seat.
though it is turned off. that the top tether be anchored, or if
(Continued) the instructions that come with the 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
child restraint say that the top strap the lap and shoulder portions of
must be anchored. the vehicle's safety belt through

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
or around the restraint. The child

restraint instructions will show
you how.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
4. Push the latch plate into the not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
buckle until it clicks. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
Position the release button on
may be helpful to use your knee
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
necessary.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked repeat
Steps 5 and 6.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in
the passenger airbag status
indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 3-30 for more
information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Instrument Panel Storage

Compartments
Storage Compartments
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1 { Warning
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Do not store heavy or sharp
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 objects in storage compartments.
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 In a crash, these objects may
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 cause the cover to open and
could result in injury.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cargo Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 This vehicle has an instrument
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 panel storage area. To open the
cover, pull the latch forward.
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
4-2 Storage
Glove Box Armrest Storage Center Console Storage

Lift the glove box handle to open it.
Use the key to lock and unlock the
glove box.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders, with
removable liners, in front of the
center console. There may be
cupholders in the second row seat
armrest. To access, pull the armrest
down. There are additional
cupholders on each side of the third
row seat and in each door.
If equipped, the rear seat armrest Pull up the lever on the front of the
may have two cupholders. Pull the center console armrest to slide it
armrest down to access the forward and backward. To open the
cupholders. armrest storage area, press the
button on the front of the armrest.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Storage 4-3
Additional Storage
Features
Cargo Cover
For vehicles with a cargo cover, it
can be used to cover items in the
rear of the vehicle. To install the
cover, place the loops on each
corner of the cover on the four
hooks in the rear of the vehicle. The
cover should be stored securely
There is additional storage under when not in use. To remove the cargo management
the armrest. Move the armrest all cover:
the way to the rear position, then Cargo Tie-Downs 1. Open the cover. It remains open
slide the storage cover back to when lifted.
access. Four cargo tie‐downs are located in
the rear compartment of the vehicle. 2. Pull the cover up making sure to
There is a removable tray in the The tie-downs can be used to unhook the hinges at the rear of
storage area. Pull up on the tray to secure small loads. the cover.
remove and access the lower
storage area and power outlet. See 3. Store the cover outside the
Power Outlets on page 5-9.
Cargo Management vehicle or reattach before
System driving.
There may be two charging USB
ports on the rear of the console. This vehicle has a cargo
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-31. management system located in
the rear.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
4-4 Storage
Convenience Net For vehicles with a convenience

{ Warning net (4), attach it to the vehicle using
only the cargo tie-downs (3) on
An improperly latched and closed each side. The net is used to store
cargo cover, or cargo cover left in small loads and should not be used
the open position, could be for heavy loads.
thrown about the vehicle during a
crash or sudden maneuver. The cargo cover hooks (2) are used
Someone could be injured. Be to attach the cargo cover (1) to the
vehicle only. Do not use the hooks
sure to return the cover to the
to secure loads or other items to the
closed position and latch before
vehicle as the hooks could be
driving. If the cover is removed, damaged.
always store it outside of the
vehicle. When it is replaced,
always be sure that it is securely Power Liftgate Shown, Manual
reattached. Liftgate Similar
1. Cargo Cover
2. Cargo Cover Hooks
3. Cargo Tie-Downs
4. Convenience Net

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Storage 4-5
Roof Rack System For vehicles with a roof rack, the

rack can be used to load items. For
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
when driving, check to make sure
roof racks that do not have crossrails and cargo are securely
{ Warning crossrails included, GM Certified fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
crossrails can be purchased as an rack will make the vehicle’s center
If something is carried on top of accessory. See your dealer for of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
the vehicle that is longer or wider additional information. sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
than the roof rack — like paneling, braking, or abrupt maneuvers;
plywood, or a mattress — the
wind can catch it while the vehicle
{ Caution otherwise it may result in loss of
control. If driving for a long distance,
is being driven. The item being Loading cargo on the roof rack on rough roads, or at high speeds,
carried could be violently torn off, that weighs more than 91 kg occasionally stop the vehicle to
and this could cause a collision (200 lb) or hangs over the rear or make sure the cargo remains in its
and damage the vehicle. Never sides of the vehicle may damage place. Do not exceed the maximum
carry something longer or wider the vehicle. Load cargo so that it vehicle capacity when loading the
than the roof rack on top of the rests evenly between the vehicle.
vehicle unless using a GM crossrails and fasten cargo See Vehicle Load Limits on
certified accessory carrier. securely. page 9-9.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
4-6 Storage
2 NOTES

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Information Displays
Driver Information Center
Controls Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Engine Coolant Temperature
(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 5-25
Driver Information Center
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 (DIC) (Without DIC
Controls Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16 Vehicle Messages
Steering Wheel Controls (Radio Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
without Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . 5-2 Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Battery Voltage and Charging
Steering Wheel Controls (Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
with Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17
Malfunction Brake System Messages . . . . 5-35
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-4 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-35
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Brake System Warning Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5 Engine Cooling System
Rear Window Wiper/ Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-37
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-22 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-37
Clock (Radio without Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-38
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-38
Clock (Radio with Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-22
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-23 Object Detection System
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Ride Control System
Indicators Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-24 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-41
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-42
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-43 Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel

Vehicle Reminder while driving.
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-44 Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Controls
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-44 Adjustment (Radio without
Vehicle Personalization Touchscreen)
Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-52
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down. Vehicles with audio steering wheel
2. Move the steering wheel up controls could differ depending on
or down. the vehicle's options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted at the
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
steering wheel.
closer or away from you.
4. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
w or c /x (Next/Previous): c /x (End): Press to reject an Steering Wheel Controls

Press to select preset or favorite incoming call or end a current call. (Radio with Touchscreen)
radio stations, select tracks on a SRCE (Source): Press to switch
CD, or select tracks and navigate between AM, FM, CD, and if
folders on an iPod® or USB device. equipped, SiriusXM®, front auxiliary,
To select tracks on an iPod or USB rear auxiliary, and iPod/USB.
device: ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next
. Press and hold w or c /x radio station while in AM, FM,
while listening to a song listed in or SiriusXM®.
the main audio page to quickly Press ¨ to go to the next track or
move forward or in reverse chapter while sourced to the
through the tracks. CD slot.
. Track information is displayed
Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
on the screen. Release w
when navigating folders on an iPod
or c /x when the desired or USB device. Vehicles with audio steering wheel
track is reached. controls could differ depending on
+ e or − e (Volume): Press to the vehicle's options. Some audio
b /g (Mute/Press to Talk): Press increase or to decrease the volume. controls can be adjusted at the
to mute the speakers, press again steering wheel.
to unmute. Press and hold to
interact with Bluetooth and OnStar ®, w or c /x (Next/Previous):
if equipped. See Bluetooth on Press to select preset or favorite
page 7-34 and “OnStar,” if radio stations, select tracks on a
equipped. CD, or select tracks and navigate
folders on an iPod® or USB device.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
To select tracks on an iPod or USB SRCE (Source): Press to switch Heated Steering Wheel
device: between AM, FM, CD, and if
equipped, SiriusXM®, front auxiliary,
. Press and hold w or c /x rear auxiliary, and iPod/USB.
while listening to a song listed in
the main audio page to quickly Press and hold to mute/pause the
move forward or in reverse system.
through the tracks. ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next
. Track information is displayed radio station while in AM, FM,
or SiriusXM®.
on the screen. Release w
or c /x when the desired Press ¨ to go to the next track or
track is reached. chapter while sourced to the
CD slot.
b /g (Press to Talk): Press to
interact with Bluetooth and OnStar ®, Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
if equipped. See Bluetooth on when navigating folders on an iPod
page 7-34 and “OnStar,” if
( (Heated Steering Wheel):
or USB device. If equipped with a heated steering
equipped.
+ e or − e (Volume): Press to wheel, press to turn it on or off.
c /x (End): Press to reject an increase or to decrease the volume. A light on the button displays when
incoming call or end a current call. the feature is turned on.
The steering wheel takes about
three minutes to start heating.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Horn LO: Slow wipes.

HI: Fast wipes.
{ Warning
Press a on the steering wheel pad
to sound the horn. Clear ice and snow from the wiper In freezing weather, do not use
blades before using them. If frozen the washer until the windshield is
to the windshield, carefully loosen or warmed. Otherwise the washer
Windshield Wiper/Washer fluid can form ice on the
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
The windshield wiper/washer lever should be replaced. See Wiper windshield, blocking your vision.
is located on the left side of the Blade Replacement on page 10-25.
steering column.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
Turn the band with the wiper symbol wipers. A circuit breaker stops them is displayed on the Driver
to control the windshield wipers. until the motor cools. Information Center (DIC) when the
washer fluid is low. See Washer
Windshield Washer
Fluid Messages on page 5-44.
J FRONT (Washer Fluid): Press
the button at the end of the lever, to Rear Window Wiper/
spray washer fluid on the
windshield. The wipers clear the
Washer
windshield and either stop or return The rear wiper and rear wash button
to the preset speed. The ignition key is on the center stack below the
8 (Mist): Use for a single wiping must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or climate control system.
cycle. ON/RUN for this to work. See Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the
Washer Fluid on page 10-19. rear wiper on and off. The wiper
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
speed cannot be changed.
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
Delays wiping cycle. Turn the band Y (Wash): Press to spray washer
up for more frequent wipes or down fluid on the rear window. The
for less frequent wipes. window wiper will also come on.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Release the button when enough Under certain circumstances, such Press the vehicle information
fluid has been sprayed on the as during a long distance button until PRESS V TO
window. The rear wiper will run a cross-country trip or moving to a CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
few more cycles after it is released. new state or province, it will be displays.
If the rear wiper function was necessary to compensate for
already on prior to pressing the compass variance by resetting the
wash button, it stays on until the zone through the DIC if the zone is
wiper button is pressed again. not set correctly.
The rear window washer uses the Compass variance is the difference
same fluid that is in the windshield between the earth's magnetic north
washer reservoir. See Washer Fluid and true geographic north. If the
on page 10-19. compass is not set to the zone
where you live, the compass may
Compass give false readings. The compass
must be set to the variance zone in
Your vehicle may have a compass which the vehicle is traveling.
in the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See Driver Information To adjust for compass variance, use
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on the following procedure: 2. Find the vehicle's current
page 5-25 or Driver Information location and variance zone
Compass Variance (Zone)
Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) number on the map.
Procedure
on page 5-31 for more information Zones 1 through 15 are
about the DIC. 1. Do not set the compass zone
available.
when the vehicle is moving. Only
Compass Zone set it when the vehicle is in 3. Press the set/reset button to
The zone is set to zone eight upon P (Park). scroll through and select the
leaving the factory. Your dealer will appropriate variance zone.
set the correct zone for your
location.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
4. Press the trip/fuel button until strong magnetic field interfering with 2. Press the vehicle information
the vehicle heading, for the compass. Such interference button until PRESS V TO
example, N for North, is may be caused by a magnetic CB or CALIBRATE COMPASS
displayed in the DIC. cell phone antenna mount, a displays.
5. If calibration is necessary, magnetic emergency light, magnetic
note pad holder, or any other 3. Press the set/reset button to
calibrate the compass. See start the compass calibration.
“Compass Calibration magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
Procedure” following. move the magnetic item, then turn 4. The DIC will display
on the vehicle and calibrate the CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
Compass Calibration compass. CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in
The compass can be manually To calibrate the compass, use the tight circles at less than 8 km/h
calibrated. Only calibrate the following procedure: (5 mph) to complete the
compass in a magnetically clean calibration. The DIC will display
and safe location, such as an open Compass Calibration Procedure CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a
parking lot, where driving the 1. Before calibrating the compass, few seconds when the
vehicle in circles is not a danger. make sure the compass zone is calibration is complete. The DIC
It is suggested to calibrate away set to the variance zone in which display will then return to the
from tall buildings, utility wires, the vehicle is located. See previous menu.
manhole covers, or other industrial “Compass Variance (Zone)
structures, if possible. Procedure” earlier in this Clock (Radio without
If CAL should ever appear in the section. Touchscreen)
DIC display, the compass should be Do not operate any switches To adjust the time and date:
calibrated. such as window, sunroof,
climate controls, seats, etc. 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
If the DIC display does not show a ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
heading, for example, N for North, during the calibration procedure.
press O to turn the radio on.
or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
2. Press G to display HR, MIN, To change the time default setting Set Time:
MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, from 12 hour to 24 hour or to . Press the up or down arrows to
month, day, and year). change the date default setting from increase or decrease the Hours,
month/day/year to day/month/year: Minutes, AM, PM, or the 24 hour
3. Press the pushbutton located
under any one of the labels to be 1. Press G and then the setting on the clock.
changed. pushbutton located under the . Press and hold to quickly
4. To increase the time or date, do forward arrow that displays on increase or decrease the time
one of the following: the radio screen until the time settings.
12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and
. Press the pushbutton below the date MM/DD (month and
the selected label. day) and DD/MM (day and adjustments.
month) display. . Press Back or Cancel screen
. Press ¨ SEEK. button to cancel the
2. Press the pushbutton located
. Press \ FWD. under the desired option. adjustments.
Set Date:
. Turn f clockwise. 3. Press G again to apply the
selected default, or let the
5. To decrease the time or date, do increase or decrease the Month,
one of the following: screen time out.
Day, and Year settings.
. Press © SEEK. Clock (Radio with . Press and hold to quickly
Touchscreen) increase or decrease the date
. Press s REV. settings.
. Turn f counterclockwise. Press Settings on the Home Page
Menu, then press the Set Time or
Set Date settings screen button to adjustments.
display the different options for . Press Back or Cancel screen
setting the time and date. button to cancel the
adjustments.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Power Outlets When adding electrical equipment,

{ Caution be sure to follow the proper
The vehicle has 12-volt outlets that installation instructions included with
can be used to plug in electrical Leaving electrical equipment the equipment. See Add-On
equipment, such as a cell phone or plugged in for an extended period Electrical Equipment on page 9-54.
MP3 player. of time while the vehicle is off will
drain the battery. Always unplug
The power outlets are located:
electrical equipment when not in
{ Caution
. On the center stack below the use and do not plug in equipment Hanging heavy equipment from
climate controls. that exceeds the maximum the power outlet can cause
. Inside the center console. 20 amp rating. damage not covered by the
. At the rear of the center console. vehicle warranty. The power
. Certain accessory plugs may not be outlets are designed for
In the rear cargo area.
compatible with the accessory accessory power plugs only, such
Lift the cover to access the outlet power outlet and could overload as cell phone charge cords.
and replace when not in use. vehicle and adapter fuses. If a
problem is experienced, see your
{ Warning dealer.
Power is always supplied to the

outlets. Do not leave electrical
equipment plugged in when the
vehicle is not in use because the
vehicle could catch fire and cause
injury or death.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Power Outlet 120 Volt The indicator light does not come on
. Other equipment requiring an
Alternating Current when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or extremely stable power supply
if the equipment is not fully seated such as:
If equipped with this power outlet it into the outlet. microcomputer-controlled
can be used to plug in electrical electric blankets, touch sensor
equipment that uses a maximum If equipment is connected using lamps, etc.
limit of 150 watts. more than 150 watts or a system
fault is detected, a protection circuit See High Voltage Devices and
shuts off the power supply and the Wiring on page 10-28.
indicator light turns off. To reset the
circuit, unplug the item and plug it
back in or turn the Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) off and
then back on. See Retained
page 9-18. The power restarts when
equipment using 150 watts or less is
The power outlet is on the rear of plugged into the outlet and a system
the center console. fault is not detected.
An indicator light on the outlet turns The power outlet is not designed for
on to show it is in use. The light and may not work properly, if the
comes on when the ignition is in following are plugged in:
ON/RUN, equipment requiring less . Equipment with high initial peak
than 150 watts is plugged into the wattage such as:
outlet, and no system fault is compressor-driven refrigerators
detected. and electric power tools.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Warning Lights, Warning lights come on when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
Gauges, and function. Some warning lights come driving, or when one of the gauges
on briefly when the engine is started shows there may be a problem,
Indicators to indicate they are working. check the section that explains what
Warning lights and gauges can Gauges can indicate when there to do. Waiting to do repairs can be
signal that something is wrong could be a problem with a vehicle costly and even dangerous.
before it becomes serious enough function. Often gauges and warning
to cause an expensive repair or lights work together to indicate a
replacement. Paying attention to the problem with the vehicle.
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Instrument Cluster
English Uplevel Shown, Metric Similar

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Speedometer Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuel

gauge shows how much fuel is left
The speedometer shows the in the tank.
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per An arrow on the fuel gauge
hour (mph). indicates the side of the vehicle the
fuel door is on.
Odometer The gauge will first indicate empty
before the vehicle is out of fuel, but
The odometer shows how far the
the vehicle's fuel tank should be
vehicle has been driven, in either
filled soon.
kilometers or miles.
When the fuel tank is low on fuel,
Tachometer the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will
appear on the Driver Information
The tachometer displays the engine Metric Center (DIC). For more information
speed in revolutions per see Fuel System Messages on
minute (rpm). page 5-38.
Here are some situations that may
{ Caution occur with the fuel gauge. None of
If the engine is operated with the these indicate a problem with the
fuel gauge.
rpm’s in the warning area at the
high end of the tachometer, the . At the gas station, the gas pump
vehicle could be damaged, and shuts off before the gauge
the damage would not be covered reads full.
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the rpm’s
in the warning area. English

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
Engine Coolant
indicated. For example, the Temperature Gauge
gauge might have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
. The gauge does not go back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off. English
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the gauge
Metric
pointer moves into the red area, it
means that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been
operated under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10-16 for more information.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Voltmeter Gauge Readings in the low warning zone

can occur when a large number of
electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left
idling for an extended period.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, a SERVICE When the vehicle is started, this
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM light flashes and a chime may come
message will appear in the Driver on to remind the driver to fasten
Information Center (DIC) and/or the their safety belt. Then the light stays
charging system light comes on. on solid until the belt is buckled.
See Battery Voltage and Charging This cycle may continue several
Messages on page 5-34 for more times if the driver remains or
information. becomes unbuckled while the
vehicle is moving.
When the engine is not running, but However, readings in either warning
the ignition is on, this gauge zone may indicate a possible If the driver safety belt is buckled,
displays the battery voltage in problem in the electrical system. neither the light nor the chime
DC volts. Have the vehicle serviced as soon comes on.
as possible.
When the engine is running, this Passenger Safety Belt
gauge shows the condition of the Reminder Light
charging system. The vehicle's Safety Belt Reminders
charging system regulates voltage There is a passenger safety belt
Driver Safety Belt Reminder reminder light near the passenger
based on the state of charge of the
Light airbag status indicator. See
battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.
This is normal. Readings between There is a driver safety belt Passenger Sensing System on
the low and high warning zones reminder light on the instrument page 3-30.
indicate the normal operating range. cluster.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Airbag Readiness Light

{ Warning
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag If the airbag readiness light stays
system. The system check includes on after the vehicle is started or
the airbag sensor(s), passenger comes on while driving, it means
sensing system, the pretensioners, the airbag system might not be
When the vehicle is started, this the airbag modules, the wiring, and working properly. The airbags in
light flashes and a chime may come the crash sensing and diagnostic the vehicle might not inflate in a
on to remind passengers to fasten module. For more information on the
their safety belt. Then the light stays crash, or they could even inflate
airbag system, see Airbag System without a crash. To help avoid
on solid until the belt is buckled. on page 3-23.
This cycle continues several times if injury, have the vehicle serviced
the passenger remains or becomes right away.
unbuckled while the vehicle is
moving. If there is a problem with the airbag
If the passenger safety belt is system, a Driver Information Center
buckled, neither the chime nor the (DIC) message may also come on.
light comes on. See Airbag System Messages on
page 5-41.
The front passenger safety belt The airbag readiness light comes on
reminder light and chime may turn for several seconds when the
on if an object is put on the seat vehicle is started. If the light does
such as a briefcase, handbag, not come on then, have it fixed
grocery bag, laptop, or other immediately.
electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light and/or chime, remove
the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Passenger Airbag Status as a system check. Then, after

Indicator several more seconds, the status { Warning
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
The vehicle has a passenger or either the on or off symbol to let If the airbag readiness light ever
sensing system. See Passenger you know the status of the front comes on and stays on, it means
Sensing System on page 3-30 for outboard passenger frontal airbag. that something may be wrong
important safety information. The with the airbag system. To help
If the word ON or the on symbol is avoid injury to yourself or others,
instrument panel has a passenger lit on the passenger airbag status
airbag status indicator. have the vehicle serviced right
indicator, it means that the front
away. See Airbag Readiness
outboard passenger frontal airbag is
Light on page 5-16 for more
allowed to inflate.
information, including important
If the word OFF or the off symbol is safety information.
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has Charging System Light
United States turned off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
Canada and Mexico your dealer for service. The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned
When the vehicle is started, the on, but the engine is not running, as
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
a check to show the light is working. are at acceptable levels, helping to assists the service technician in
It should go out when the engine is maintain a clean environment. The correctly diagnosing any
started. malfunction indicator lamp comes malfunction.
If the light stays on, or comes on on when the vehicle is placed in
while driving, there may be a ON/RUN, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
{ Caution
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your vehicle serviced by your dealer. See If the vehicle is continually driven
dealer. Driving while this light is on Ignition Positions on page 9-14. with this light on, the emission
could drain the battery. controls might not work as well,
the vehicle fuel economy might
When this light comes on, the Driver not be as good, and the engine
Information Center (DIC) also
might not run as smoothly. This
displays the SERVICE BATTERY
could lead to costly repairs that
CHARGING SYSTEM message.
might not be covered by the
See Vehicle Messages on vehicle warranty.
page 5-34 for more information. If the malfunction indicator lamp
If a short distance must be driven comes on while the engine is
with the light on, be sure to turn off running, this indicates that the OBD
all accessories, such as the radio II system has detected a problem { Caution
and air conditioner. and diagnosis and service might be
required. Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake,
Malfunction Malfunctions often are indicated by or fuel system of the vehicle or
Indicator Lamp the system before any problem is
the replacement of the original
apparent. Being aware of the light
A computer system called OBD II tires with other than those of the
can prevent more serious damage
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second to the vehicle. This system also same Tire Performance Criteria
Generation) monitors the operation (Continued)
of the vehicle to ensure emissions

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Avoid hard accelerations. improperly installed. A loose or
Caution (Continued) . Avoid steep uphill grades. missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
(TPC) can affect the vehicle's . If towing a trailer, reduce the A few driving trips with the cap
emission controls and can cause amount of cargo being hauled as properly installed should turn the
this light to come on. soon as it is possible. light off.
Modifications to these systems If the light continues to flash, find a
could lead to costly repairs not
. Check that good quality fuel is
safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes
covered by the vehicle warranty. vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at the engine not to run as
This could also result in a failure least 10 seconds, and restart the efficiently as designed and may
to pass a required Emission engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up,
Inspection/Maintenance test. See follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is
Accessories and Modifications on your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring,
page 10-2. possible. hesitation on acceleration,
Light On Steady: An emission or stumbling on acceleration.
This light comes on during a control system malfunction has These conditions might go away
malfunction in one of two ways: been detected on the vehicle. once the engine is warmed up.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
Light Flashing: A misfire condition required.
has been detected. A misfire occurs, change the fuel brand used.
increases vehicle emissions and The following may correct an It may require at least one full tank
could damage the emission control emission control system of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis malfunction: See Fuel on page 9-42.
and service might be required. . Check that the fuel cap is fully If none of the above have made the
To prevent more serious damage to installed. See Filling the Tank on light turn off, your dealer can check
the vehicle: page 9-44. The diagnostic the vehicle. The dealer has the
system can determine if the fuel proper test equipment and
. Reduce vehicle speed. cap has been left off or

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
diagnostic tools to fix any The vehicle may not pass system readiness, your dealer
mechanical or electrical problems inspection if: can prepare the vehicle for
that might have developed. . The malfunction indicator lamp is inspection.
Emissions Inspection and on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when Brake System Warning
Maintenance Programs
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN Light
Depending on where you live, your while the engine is off. See your
vehicle may be required to The vehicle brake system consists
dealer for assistance in verifying
participate in an emission control of two hydraulic circuits. If one
proper operation of the
system inspection and maintenance circuit is not working, the remaining
malfunction indicator lamp.
program. For the inspection, the circuit can still work to stop the
emission system test equipment will
. The OBD II (On-Board vehicle. For normal braking
likely connect to the vehicle's Data Diagnostics) system determines performance, both circuits need to
Link Connector (DLC). that critical emission control be working
systems have not been
If the warning light comes on, there
completely diagnosed. The
is a brake problem. Have the brake
vehicle would be considered not
system inspected right away.
ready for inspection. This can
happen if the 12-volt battery has
recently been replaced or run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
The DLC is under the instrument emission control systems during
panel to the left of the steering normal driving. This can take
wheel. See your dealer if assistance several days of routine driving. Metric English
is needed. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
This light should come on briefly Antilock Brake System

when the ignition key is turned to { Warning (ABS) Warning Light
ON/RUN. If it does not come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready The brake system might not be
to warn if there is a problem. working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
This light may also come on due to Driving with the brake system
low brake fluid. See Brake Fluid on warning light on can lead to a
page 10-21. crash. If the light is still on after
When the ignition is on, the brake the vehicle has been pulled off
system warning light also comes on the road and carefully stopped, The ABS warning light comes on
when the parking brake is set. The have the vehicle towed for briefly when the ignition key is
light will stay on if the parking brake service. turned to ON/RUN. This is normal.
does not release fully. If it stays on If the light does not come on then,
after the parking brake is fully have it fixed so it will be ready to
released, it means there is a brake The brake message remains on until warn you if there is a problem.
problem. any DIC button is pressed. The
brake light remains on until the If the light stays on, turn the ignition
If the light comes on while driving, problem is fixed. See Brake System to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes on
pull off the road and stop carefully. Messages on page 5-35. while driving, stop as soon as
Make sure the parking brake is fully possible and turn the ignition off.
released. The pedal may be harder Then start the engine again to reset
to push or, the pedal may go closer the system. If the light still stays on,
to the floor. It may take longer to or comes on again while driving, the
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle needs service. If the regular
vehicle towed for service. See brake system warning light is not
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-70. on, there are still brakes, but no
antilock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on,

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
there are no antilock brakes and Lane Departure Warning Vehicle Ahead Indicator
there is a problem with the regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning
(LDW) Light
Light on page 5-20.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
If equipped, this indicator will

This light comes on briefly while display green when a vehicle is
starting the vehicle. If it does not, detected ahead and amber when
have the vehicle serviced by your you are following a vehicle ahead
dealer. If the system is working much too closely.
This light comes on when the Tow/ normally, the light then turns off. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
Haul mode has been activated.
This light comes on green when the System on page 9-32.
For more information, see Tow/Haul system is on and ready to operate.
Mode on page 9-25. When the system determines that
the vehicle is leaving its lane
without using the turn signal, this
light will change to amber and flash.
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
on page 9-41.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
StabiliTrak® Indicator Engine Coolant Tire Pressure Light

Light Temperature Warning
Light
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure

The StabiliTrak light comes on Monitor System (TPMS), this light
briefly as the engine is started. If it comes on briefly when the engine is
The engine coolant temperature started. It provides information
does not come on, have the vehicle warning light comes on briefly when
serviced by your dealer. about tire pressures and the TPMS.
the vehicle is started.
This light flashes while the When the Light Is On Steady
If it does not, have the vehicle
StabiliTrak system or the Traction serviced by your dealer. If the This indicates that one or more of
Control System (TCS) is working. system is working normally, the the tires are significantly
The light comes on when there is a indicator light then goes off. underinflated.
problem with the StabiliTrak system.
See Traction Control/Electronic If the light comes on and stays on A Driver Information Center (DIC)
Stability Control on page 9-28. while driving, the vehicle may have tire pressure message may also
a problem with the cooling system. display. See Tire Messages on
Stop and turn off the vehicle to page 5-42. Stop as soon as
avoid damage to the engine. possible, and inflate the tires to the
A warning chime sounds when this pressure value shown on the Tire
light is on. and Loading Information label. See
Tire Pressure on page 10-43.
See Engine Overheating on

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
When the Light Flashes First and Security Light

Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle. This light should come on briefly as
See Tire Pressure Monitor the engine is started. If it does not
Operation on page 10-45. come on, have the vehicle serviced The security light should come on
by your dealer. briefly as the engine is started. If the
Engine Oil Pressure Light If the light comes on and stays on, it system is working normally, the
means that oil is not flowing through indicator light turns off. If it does not
{ Caution the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
Lack of proper engine oil some other system problem. See If the light stays on and the engine
maintenance can damage the your dealer. does not start, there could be a
engine. Driving with the engine problem with the theft-deterrent
oil low can also damage the system.
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Check the oil level as soon as
possible. Add oil if required, but if
the oil level is within the operating
range and the oil pressure is still
low, have the vehicle serviced.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
This light is also used to indicate the Cruise Control Light Information Displays
status of the anti-theft alarm system
when the ignition is turned off. The
light will flash rapidly if the alarm Driver Information Center
system is arming and one or more (DIC) (With DIC Buttons)
of the monitored entry points is not
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the
closed. The light will stay on if the
information below explains the
alarm is arming and all entry points
operation of this system.
are closed.
This light comes on when the cruise The DIC displays information about
For information regarding this light control is set. your vehicle. It also displays
and the vehicle's security system,
This light goes out when the cruise warning messages if a system
see Vehicle Alarm System on
control is canceled. See Cruise problem is detected.
page 2-12.
Control on page 9-30. All messages will appear in the DIC
High-Beam On Light display at the top of the instrument
cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition
is on. After a short delay, the DIC
will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The DIC also displays a shift lever
This light comes on when the position indicator on the bottom line
high-beam headlamps are in use. of the display. See Automatic
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Transmission on page 9-22.
Changer on page 6-2 for more
information.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
The outside air temperature and 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button

compass, if equipped, also display to display the odometer, trip
on the DIC when viewing the trip odometers, fuel range, average
and fuel information. The outside air economy, timer, fuel used, and
temperature automatically appears average speed.
in the top right corner of the DIC
display. If there is a problem with The buttons are the set/reset,
Vehicle Information Menu
the system that controls the customization, vehicle information, Items
temperature display, the numbers and trip/fuel buttons. The button T (Vehicle Information): Press
will be replaced with dashes. If this functions are detailed in the this button to scroll through the
occurs, have the vehicle serviced. following pages. following menu items:
The compass will be shown in the
bottom right corner of the DIC V (Set/Reset): Press this button to OIL LIFE
display. See Compass on page 5-6. set or reset certain functions and to
turn off or acknowledge messages Press the vehicle information button
The DIC also allows some features on the DIC. until OIL LIFE REMAINING
to be customized. See Vehicle displays. This display shows an
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) U (Customization): Press this estimate of the oil's remaining useful
on page 5-45. button to customize the feature life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
settings on your vehicle. See REMAINING on the display, that
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
can also use the trip odometer reset means 99% of the current oil life
Buttons) on page 5-45. remains. The engine oil life system
stem to view the odometer and trip
odometers. T (Vehicle Information): Press will alert you to change the oil on a
this button to display the oil life, schedule consistent with your
DIC Buttons park assist on vehicles with this driving conditions.
The DIC has different displays, feature, units, tire pressure readings
which can be accessed by pressing on vehicles with this feature, and
the DIC buttons on the center stack. compass calibration and zone
setting on vehicles with this feature.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
When the remaining oil life is low, SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT PARK ASSIST
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON If the vehicle has the Side Blind If your vehicle has the Rear Parking
message will appear on the display. Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this Assist (RPA) system, press the
See Engine Oil Messages on display allows the system to be vehicle information button until
page 5-37. You should change the turned on or off. Once in this PARK ASSIST displays. This
oil as soon as you can. See Engine display, press the set/reset button to display allows the system to be
Oil on page 10-7. In addition to the select between ON or OFF. If you turned on or off. Once in this
engine oil life system monitoring the choose ON, the system will be display, press the set/reset button to
oil life, additional maintenance is turned on. If you choose OFF, the select between ON or OFF. If you
recommended in the Maintenance system will be turned off. When the choose ON, the system will be
Schedule. See Maintenance SBZA system is turned off, the DIC turned on. If you choose OFF, the
Schedule on page 11-2. will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE system will be turned off. The RPA
Remember, you must reset the OIL ALERT SYSTEM OFF message as system automatically turns back on
LIFE display yourself after each oil a reminder that the system has after each vehicle start. When the
change. It will not reset itself. Also, been turned off. See Object RPA system is turned off and the
be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE Detection System Messages on vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the
display accidentally at any time page 5-39 and Side Blind Zone Alert DIC will display the PARK ASSIST
other than when the oil has just (SBZA) on page 9-36. OFF message as a reminder that
been changed. It cannot be reset the system has been turned off. See
accurately until the next oil change. Object Detection System Messages
To reset the engine oil life system, on page 5-39 and Parking Assist on
see Engine Oil Life System on page 9-34.
page 10-9.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT the vehicle information will then be If the tire pressure display shows
If the vehicle has the Rear Cross displayed in the unit of dashes instead of a value, there
Traffic Alert (RCTA) system, this measurement selected. may be a problem with your vehicle.
display allows the system to be If this consistently occurs, see your
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES dealer for service.
turned on or off. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), the COMPASS ZONE SETTING
select between ON or OFF. If you
choose ON, the system will be pressure for each tire can be viewed This display will be available if the
turned on. If you choose OFF, the in the DIC. The tire pressure will be vehicle has a compass. See
system will be turned off. When the shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or Compass on page 5-6.
RCTA system is turned off, the DIC pounds per square inch (psi). Press
the vehicle information button until COMPASS RECALIBRATION
will display the REAR CROSS
the DIC displays FRONT This display will be available if the
TRAFFIC ALERT SYSTEM OFF
TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ## vehicle has a compass. See
message as a reminder that the
system has been turned off. See RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle Compass on page 5-6.
Object Detection System Messages information button again until the
Blank Display
on page 5-39 and Rear Vision DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa
(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. This display shows no information.
Camera (RVC) on page 9-38.
If a low tire pressure condition is Trip/Fuel Menu Items
UNITS detected by the system while
Press the vehicle information button driving, a message advising you to 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
until UNITS displays. This display add air to a specific tire will appear to scroll through the following menu
allows you to select between metric in the display. See Tire Pressure on items:
or English units of measurement. page 10-43 and Tire Messages on ODOMETER
Once in this display, press the set/ page 5-42.
reset button to select between Press the trip/fuel button until
METRIC or ENGLISH units. All of ODOMETER displays. This display
shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either kilometers (km)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
or miles (mi). Pressing the trip since the ignition was last turned on. RANGE
odometer reset stem will also This can be used if the trip Press the trip/fuel button until
display the odometer. odometer is not reset at the RANGE displays. This display
To switch between English and beginning of the trip. shows the approximate number of
metric measurements, see “UNITS” To use the retroactive reset feature, remaining kilometers (km) or
earlier in this section. press and hold the set/reset button miles (mi) the vehicle can be driven
for at least four seconds. The trip without refueling. The display will
TRIP A and TRIP B odometer will display the number of show LOW if the fuel level is low.
Press the trip/fuel button until kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven The fuel range estimate is based on
TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This since the ignition was last turned on an average of the vehicle's fuel
display shows the current distance and the vehicle was moving. Once economy over recent driving history
traveled in either kilometers (km) or the vehicle begins moving, the trip and the amount of fuel remaining in
miles (mi) since the last reset for odometer will accumulate mileage. the fuel tank. This estimate will
each trip odometer. Both trip For example, if the vehicle was change if driving conditions change.
odometers can be used at the same driven 8 km (5 mi) before it is started For example, if driving in traffic and
time. Pressing the trip odometer again, and then the retroactive reset making frequent stops, this display
reset stem will also display the trip feature is activated, the display will may read one number, but if the
odometers. show 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
Each trip odometer can be reset to begins moving, the display will then number may change even though
zero separately by pressing the set/ increase to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km the same amount of fuel is in the
reset button or the trip odometer (5.2 mi), etc. fuel tank. This is because different
reset stem while the desired trip If the retroactive reset feature is driving conditions produce different
odometer is displayed. activated after the vehicle is started, fuel economies. Generally, freeway
The trip odometer has a feature but before it begins moving, the driving produces better fuel
called retroactive reset. This can be display will show the number of economy than city driving. Fuel
used to set the trip odometer to the kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven range cannot be reset.
number of kilometers (miles) driven during the last ignition cycle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
AVG (Average) ECONOMY cruising on a flat freeway and To reset the timer to zero, press and
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG getting high fuel efficiency, the hold the set/reset button while
ECONOMY displays. This display display will show more bars. Fuel TIMER is displayed.
shows the approximate average economy cannot be reset.
FUEL USED
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) TIMER
or miles per gallon (mpg). This Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL
number reflects only the Press the trip/fuel button until USED displays. This display shows
approximate average fuel economy TIMER displays. This display can be the number of liters (L) or
that the vehicle has right now, and used as a timer. gallons (gal) of fuel used since the
will change as driving conditions To start the timer, press the set/ last reset of this menu item. To reset
change. This number is calculated reset button while TIMER is the fuel used information, press and
based on the number of L/100 km displayed. The display will show the hold the set/reset button while FUEL
(mpg) recorded since the last time amount of time that has passed USED is displayed.
this menu item was reset. To reset since the timer was last reset, not AVG (Average) SPEED
AVG ECONOMY, press and hold the including time the ignition is off.
Time will continue to be counted as Press the trip/fuel button until AVG
set/reset button.
long as the ignition is on, even if SPEED displays. This display
FUEL ECONOMY another display is being shown on shows the average speed of the
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL the DIC. The timer will record up to vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)
ECONOMY displays. The FUEL 99 hours, 59 minutes and or miles per hour (mph). This
ECONOMY display shows an 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which average is calculated based on the
approximate estimate of the vehicle the display will return to zero. various vehicle speeds recorded
fuel economy under a given driving since the last reset of this value. To
To stop the timer, press the set/reset reset the value to zero, press and
condition at a specific moment. For button briefly while TIMER is
example, if the vehicle is hold the set/reset button.
displayed.
accelerating and achieving low fuel Blank Display
efficiency this display will show
This display shows no information.
fewer bars, but if the vehicle is

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Driver Information Center If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you Each trip odometer can be reset to
can use the trip odometer reset zero separately by pressing and
(DIC) (Without DIC stem to view the following displays: holding the trip odometer reset stem
Buttons) odometer and trip odometers. while the desired trip odometer is
If your vehicle does not have DIC displayed.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem
buttons, the information below Menu Items The trip odometer has a feature
explains the operation of this called the retroactive reset. This can
system. ODOMETER be used to set the trip odometer to
The DIC has different displays, Press the trip odometer reset stem the number of kilometers (miles)
which can be accessed by pressing until ODOMETER displays. This driven since the ignition was last
the trip odometer reset stem on the display shows the distance the turned on. This can be used if the
instrument cluster. Pressing the trip vehicle has been driven in either trip odometer is not reset at the
odometer reset stem will also turn kilometers (km) or miles (mi). beginning of the trip.
off, or acknowledge, DIC messages. To switch between English and To use the retroactive reset feature,
The DIC displays trip and vehicle metric measurements, see “UNITS” press and hold the trip odometer
system information, and warning later in this section. reset stem for at least four seconds.
messages if a system problem is The trip odometer will display the
TRIP A or TRIP B number of kilometers (km) or
detected.
Press the trip odometer reset stem miles (mi) driven since the ignition
If your vehicle does not have DIC was last turned on and the vehicle
until TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This
buttons, you can use the trip was moving. Once the vehicle
display shows the current distance
odometer reset stem to view the begins moving, the trip odometer
traveled in either kilometers (km) or
following displays: odometer, trip will accumulate mileage. For
miles (mi) since the last reset for
odometers, oil life, park assist menu example, if the vehicle was driven
each trip odometer. Both trip
for vehicles with the Rear Parking 8 km (5 mi) before it is started again,
odometers can be used at the
Assist (RPA) system, units, and and then the retroactive reset
same time.
display language. feature is activated, the display will
show 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
begins moving, the display will then When the remaining oil life is low, PARK ASSIST
increase to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON To access this display, the vehicle
(5.2 mi), etc. message will appear on the display. must be in P (Park). If your vehicle
If the retroactive reset feature is See Engine Oil Messages on has the Rear Parking Assist (RPA)
activated after the vehicle is started, page 5-37. You should change the system, press the trip odometer
but before it begins moving, the oil as soon as you can. See Engine reset stem until PARK ASSIST
display will show the number of Oil on page 10-7. In addition to the displays. This display allows the
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven engine oil life system monitoring the system to be turned on or off. Once
during the last ignition cycle. oil life, additional maintenance is in this display, press and hold the
recommended in the Maintenance trip odometer reset stem to select
OIL LIFE Schedule. See Maintenance between ON or OFF. If you choose
To access this display, the vehicle Schedule on page 11-2. ON, the system will be turned on.
must be in P (Park). Press the trip Remember, you must reset the OIL If you choose OFF, the system will
odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE LIFE display yourself after each oil be turned off. The RPA system
REMAINING displays. This display change. It will not reset itself. Also, automatically turns back on after
shows an estimate of the oil's be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE each vehicle start. When the RPA
remaining useful life. If you see display accidentally at any time system is turned off and the vehicle
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the other than when the oil has just is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC
display, that means 99% of the been changed. It cannot be reset will display the PARK ASSIST OFF
current oil life remains. The engine accurately until the next oil change. message as a reminder that the
oil life system will alert you to To reset the engine oil life system, system has been turned off. See
change the oil on a schedule see Engine Oil Life System on Object Detection System Messages
consistent with your driving page 10-9. on page 5-39 and Parking Assist on
conditions. page 9-34.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
UNITS 2. Continue to press and hold the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
To access this display, the vehicle trip odometer reset stem to scroll If the vehicle has the Side Blind
must be in P (Park). Press the trip through all of the available Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this
odometer reset stem until UNITS languages. display allows the system to be
displays. This display allows you to The available languages are turned on or off. Once in this
select between metric or English ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS display, press the set/reset button to
units of measurement. Once in this (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), select between ON or OFF. If you
display, press and hold the trip and NO CHANGE. choose ON, the system will be
odometer reset stem to select 3. Once the desired language is turned on. If you choose OFF, the
between METRIC or ENGLISH displayed, release the trip system will be turned off. When the
units. All of the vehicle information odometer reset stem to set your SBZA system is turned off, the DIC
will then be displayed in the unit of choice. will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE
measurement selected. ALERT SYSTEM OFF message as
a reminder that the system has
DISPLAY LANGUAGE been turned off. See Object
To access this display, the vehicle Detection System Messages on
must be in P (Park). This display page 5-39 and Side Blind Zone Alert
allows you to select the language in (SBZA) on page 9-36.
which the DIC messages will
appear. To select a language:
1. Press the trip odometer reset
stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE
displays.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT Vehicle Messages The following are the possible
If the vehicle has the Rear Cross messages that can be displayed
Messages are displayed on the DIC and some information about them.
Traffic Alert (RCTA) system, this
to notify the driver that the status of
display allows the system to be
turned on or off. Once in this
the vehicle has changed and that Battery Voltage and
some action may be needed by the
display, press the set/reset button to
driver to correct the condition.
Charging Messages
select between ON or OFF. If you
Multiple messages may appear one BATTERY LOW START
choose ON, the system will be
after another. VEHICLE
turned on. If you choose OFF, the
system will be turned off. When the Some messages may not require This message displays when the
RCTA system is turned off, the DIC immediate action, but you can press system detects that the battery
will display the REAR CROSS any of the DIC buttons on the voltage has dropped to a critical
TRAFFIC ALERT SYSTEM OFF instrument panel or the trip level and the engine must be started
message as a reminder that the odometer reset stem on the to avoid a dead battery situation.
system has been turned off. See instrument panel cluster to
Object Detection System Messages acknowledge that you received the BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
on page 5-39 and Rear Vision messages and to clear them from
This message displays when the
Camera (RVC) on page 9-38. the display.
system detects that the battery
Some messages cannot be cleared voltage is dropping below expected
from the DIC display because they levels. The battery saver system
are more urgent. These messages starts reducing certain features of
require action before they can be the vehicle that you may be able to
cleared. You should take any notice. At the point that the features
messages that appear on the are disabled, this message is
display seriously and remember that displayed. It means that the vehicle
clearing the messages will only is trying to save the charge in the
make the messages disappear, not battery.
correct the problem.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Turn off all unnecessary Brake System Messages Door Ajar Messages
accessories to allow the battery to
recharge. SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM DRIVER DOOR OPEN
The normal battery voltage range is This message displays along with This message displays and a chime
11.5 to 15.5 volts. the brake system warning light if sounds if the driver door is not fully
there is a problem with the brake closed and the vehicle is shifted out
SERVICE BATTERY system. See Brake System Warning of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
CHARGING SYSTEM Light on page 5-20. If this message vehicle, check the door for
On some vehicles, this message appears, stop as soon as possible obstructions, and close the door
displays if there is a problem with and turn off the vehicle. Restart the again. Check to see if the message
the battery charging system. Under vehicle and check for the message still appears on the DIC.
certain conditions, the charging on the DIC display. If the message
is still displayed or appears again HOOD OPEN
system light may also turn on in the
instrument cluster. See Charging when you begin driving, the brake On some models, this message
System Light on page 5-17. Driving system needs service as soon as displays and a chime sounds if the
with this problem could drain the possible. See your dealer. hood is not fully closed. Stop and
battery. Turn off all unnecessary turn off the vehicle, check the hood
accessories. Have the electrical Cruise Control Messages for obstructions, and close the hood
system checked as soon as again. Check to see if the message
possible. See your dealer. CRUISE SET TO XXX still appears on the DIC.
This message displays whenever
the cruise control is set. See Cruise
Control on page 9-30 for more
information.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN POWER LIFTGATE OFF conditioning compressor

automatically turns off. When the
This message displays and a chime This message displays when the
coolant temperature returns to
sounds if the driver side rear door is power liftgate has been turned off
normal, the air conditioning
not fully closed and the vehicle is by pressing the power liftgate button
compressor turns back on. You can
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn on the center stack.
continue to drive your vehicle.
off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN If this message continues to appear,
again. Check to see if the message This message displays and a chime have the system repaired by your
still appears on the DIC. sounds if the passenger side rear dealer as soon as possible to avoid
door is not fully closed and the damage to the engine.
LIFTGATE OPEN vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
This message displays and a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
sounds if the liftgate is open while the door for obstructions, and close
ENGINE
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off the door again. Check to see if the This message displays when the
the vehicle and check the liftgate. message still appears on the DIC. engine coolant temperature is too
Restart the vehicle and check for hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
the message on the DIC display. Engine Cooling System idle until it cools down. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge on
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN Messages page 5-14.
This message displays and a chime ENGINE HOT A/C (Air See Overheated Engine Protection
sounds if the passenger door is not Conditioning) OFF Operating Mode on page 10-18 for
fully closed and the vehicle is information on driving to a safe
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter than place in an emergency.
off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door the normal operating temperature.
again. Check to see if the message See Engine Coolant Temperature
still appears on the DIC. Gauge on page 5-14. To avoid
added strain on a hot engine, the air

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP Acknowledging the CHANGE OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
ENGINE ENGINE OIL SOON message will ENGINE
not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.
This message displays and a See “Oil Life” under Driver This message displays when the
continuous chime sounds if the Information Center (DIC) (With DIC vehicle's engine oil pressure is low.
engine cooling system reaches Buttons) on page 5-25 or Driver The oil pressure light also appears
unsafe temperatures for operation. Information Center (DIC) (Without on the instrument cluster. See
Stop and turn off the vehicle as DIC Buttons) on page 5-31 and Engine Oil Pressure Light on
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid Engine Oil Life System on page 5-24.
severe damage. This message page 10-9. Stop the vehicle immediately, as
clears when the engine has cooled engine damage can result from
to a safe operating temperature. ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL driving a vehicle with low oil
On some vehicles, this message pressure. Have the vehicle serviced
Engine Oil Messages displays when the engine oil level by your dealer as soon as possible
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON may be too low. Check the oil level when this message is displayed.
before filling to the recommended
This message displays when level. If the oil is not low and this Engine Power Messages
service is required for the vehicle. message remains on, take the
See your dealer. See Engine Oil on vehicle to your dealer for service. ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
page 10-7 and Maintenance See Engine Oil on page 10-7. This message displays and a chime
Schedule on page 11-2. sounds when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot and the
engine further enters the engine
coolant protection mode. See
Engine Overheating on page 10-16
for further information.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
This message also displays when TIGHTEN GAS CAP Lamp Messages
the vehicle's engine power is
This message may display along AUTOMATIC LIGHT
reduced. Reduced engine power
with the check engine light on the
can affect the vehicle's ability to
instrument cluster if the vehicle's
CONTROL OFF
accelerate. If this message is on,
fuel cap is not tightened properly. This message displays when the
but there is no reduction in
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on automatic headlamps are turned off.
performance, proceed to your
page 5-18. Reinstall the fuel cap This message clears itself after
destination. The performance may
fully. See Filling the Tank on 10 seconds.
be reduced the next time the vehicle
page 9-44. The diagnostic system
is driven. The vehicle may be driven AUTOMATIC LIGHT
can determine if the fuel cap has
at a reduced speed while this CONTROL ON
been left off or improperly installed.
message is on, but acceleration and
A loose or missing fuel cap allows This message displays when the
speed may be reduced. Anytime
fuel to evaporate into the automatic headlamps are turned on.
this message stays on, the vehicle
atmosphere. A few driving trips with This message clears itself after
should be taken to your dealer for
the cap properly installed should 10 seconds.
service as soon as possible.
turn this light and message off.
TURN SIGNAL ON
Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages This message displays and a chime
FUEL LEVEL LOW sounds if a turn signal is left on for
REPLACE BATTERY IN 1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turn
This message displays and a chime REMOTE KEY signal lever to the off position.
sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel
as soon as possible. See Fuel This message displays if a Remote
Gauge on page 5-13 and Fuel on Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
page 9-42 for more information. battery is low. The battery needs to
be replaced in the transmitter. See
“Battery Replacement” under
System Operation on page 2-2.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Object Detection System system will not operate. Forward PARK ASSIST OFF
Collision Alert (FCA) may not work
Messages or may not work as well.
After the vehicle has been started,
this message displays to remind the
FORWARD COLLISION ALERT LANE DEPARTURE SYS driver that the RPA system has
UNAVAILABLE UNAVAILABLE been turned off. To turn the RPA
This message displays when system back on, see Parking Assist
This message displays when on page 9-34.
attempting to activate the Forward attempting to activate the Lane
Collision Alert (FCA) system when it Departure Warning (LDW) system REAR CROSS TRAFFIC
is temporarily unavailable. The FCA when it is temporarily unavailable. ALERT SYSTEM OFF
system does not need service. The LDW system does not need
If the vehicle has the Rear Cross
This message could be due to the service.
Traffic Alert (RCTA) system, this
camera being blocked. Cleaning the This message could be due to the message displays when the RCTA
outside of the windshield behind the camera being blocked. Cleaning the system has been turned off. See
rearview mirror may correct the outside of the windshield behind the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
issue. rearview mirror may correct the page 9-38 and Driver Information
FRT CAMERA BLOCKED issue. Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
CLEAN WINDSHIELD page 5-25 or Driver Information
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
This message displays when the OWNERS MANUAL on page 5-31.
camera is blocked. Cleaning the This message displays if there is
outside of the windshield behind the something interfering with the Rear
rearview mirror may correct the Parking Assist (RPA) system. See
issue. The Lane Departure Warning Parking Assist on page 9-34.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
SERVICE FRONT CAMERA there is a problem with the SBZA SIDE DETECTION SYS
system. If these displays remain on TEMPORARILY OFF
If this message remains on after
after continued driving, the system
continued driving, the vehicle needs If your vehicle has the Side Blind
needs service. See your dealer. See
service. Do not use the Lane Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
Departure Warning (LDW) and message displays when the SBZA
page 9-36.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system is disabled because the
features. Take the vehicle to your SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT sensor cannot detect vehicles in
dealer. SYSTEM OFF your blind zone. The sensor may be
blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,
SERVICE PARK ASSIST If your vehicle has the Side Blind or slush. This message may also
This message displays if there is a Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this display during heavy rain or due to
problem with the Rear Parking message displays when the SBZA road spray. It may also come on
Assist (RPA) system. Do not use system has been turned off. See when driving in isolated areas with
this system to help you park. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on no guardrails, trees, or road signs
Parking Assist on page 9-34. See page 9-36 and Driver Information and light traffic. Your vehicle does
your dealer for service. Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on not need service. For cleaning
page 5-25 or Driver Information instructions, see “Washing the
SERVICE SIDE DETECTION Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) Vehicle” in Exterior Care on
SYSTEM on page 5-31. page 10-74. See Side Blind Zone
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Alert (SBZA) on page 9-36.
Zone Alert (SBZA) system and this
message displays, both SBZA
displays will remain on indicating

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Ride Control System TRACTION CONTROL OFF Security Messages

Messages This message displays when the SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT
Traction Control System (TCS) is
SERVICE STABILITRAK turned off. Adjust your driving
SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a accordingly. See Traction Control/ This message displays when there
problem with the StabiliTrak® Electronic Stability Control on is a problem with the theft-deterrent
system. If this message appears, try page 9-28. system. The vehicle may or may not
to reset the system. Stop; turn off restart so you may want to take the
TRACTION CONTROL ON vehicle to your dealer before turning
the engine for at least 15 seconds;
then start the engine again. If this This message displays when the off the engine. See Immobilizer
message still comes on, it means Traction Control System (TCS) is Operation on page 2-13 for more
there is a problem. See your dealer turned on. See Traction Control/ information.
for service. The vehicle is safe to Electronic Stability Control on
page 9-28. This message clears
THEFT ATTEMPTED
drive, however, you do not have the
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce itself after 10 seconds. This message displays if the content
your speed and drive accordingly. theft-deterrent system has detected
Airbag System Messages a break-in attempt while you were
SERVICE TRACTION away from your vehicle. See Vehicle
CONTROL SERVICE AIR BAG Alarm System on page 2-12 for
This message displays when there This message displays if there is a more information.
is a problem with the Traction problem with the airbag system.
Control System (TCS). When this Have your dealer inspect the
message is displayed, the system system for problems. See Airbag
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your Readiness Light on page 5-16 and
driving accordingly. See your dealer Airbag System on page 3-23 for
for service. See Traction Control/ more information.
Electronic Stability Control on

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Service Vehicle Messages SERVICE VEHICLE SOON This message also displays LEFT
FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right
SERVICE A/C (Air This message displays when a
front), LEFT RR (left rear),
non-emissions related malfunction
Conditioning) SYSTEM occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate
the location of the low tire.
This message displays when the by your dealer as soon as possible.
electronic sensors that control the The low tire pressure warning light
air conditioning and heating STARTING DISABLED will also come on. See Tire
systems are no longer working. SERVICE THROTTLE Pressure Light on page 5-23.
Have the climate control system This message displays when your If a tire pressure message appears
serviced by your dealer if you notice vehicle's throttle system is not on the DIC, stop as soon as you
a drop in heating and air functioning properly. Have your can. Inflate the tires by adding air
conditioning efficiency. vehicle serviced by your dealer. until the tire pressure is equal to the
SERVICE POWER STEERING values shown on the Tire and
Tire Messages Loading Information label. See Tires
This message displays when a on page 10-35, Vehicle Load Limits
problem is detected with the power TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE on page 9-9, and Tire Pressure on
steering system. When this On vehicles with the Tire Pressure page 10-43.
message is displayed, you may Monitor System (TPMS), this
notice that the effort required to The DIC also shows the tire
message displays when the pressure values. See Driver
steer the vehicle increases or feels pressure in one or more of the
heavier, but you will still be able to Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
vehicle's tires is low. Buttons) on page 5-25 or Driver
steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer immediately. Information Center (DIC) (Without
DIC Buttons) on page 5-31.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

. Loss of wheel or vehicle speed
SYSTEM This message displays when the
. Certain other vehicle electrical
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Tire Pressure Monitor System conditions
Monitor System (TPMS), this (TPMS) is relearning the tire This message turns off when the
message displays if a part on the positions on your vehicle. The tire compact spare tire is replaced by a
TPMS is not working properly. The positions must be relearned after full-size tire, the differential fluid
tire pressure light also flashes and rotating the tires or after replacing a cools or the above conditions are no
then remains on during the same tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on longer present and the warning
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure page 10-49, Tire Pressure Monitor message is reset. To reset the
Light on page 5-23. Several System on page 10-44, and Tire warning message manually, turn the
conditions may cause this message Pressure on page 10-43 for more ignition off and then back on again
to appear. See Tire Pressure information. after 30 seconds. If the message
Monitor Operation on page 10-45 for stays on, see your dealer. See
more information. If the warning Transmission Messages All-Wheel Drive on page 9-25.
comes on and stays on, there may
be a problem with the TPMS. See ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
your dealer. If your vehicle has the All-Wheel This message displays if a problem
Drive (AWD) system, this message occurs with the All-Wheel Drive
displays when there is a temporary (AWD) system. The vehicle will run
condition making the AWD system in 2WD. This could be caused by:
unavailable. The vehicle will run in . An electronics problem
2WD. This could be caused by:
. Worn out or overheated clutch
. A compact spare tire on the plates
vehicle
. Various electrical issues
. AWD system overheat

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
If this message appears, stop as This message displays and a chime Vehicle Speed Messages
soon as possible and turn off the sounds if the transmission fluid in
ignition for 30 seconds. Restart the the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the SPEED LIMITED TO
vehicle and check for the message transmission fluid temperature high XXX KM/H (MPH)
on the DIC display. If the message can cause damage to the vehicle.
This message displays when your
still displays or appears again when Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
vehicle speed is limited to 128 km/h
you begin driving, the system needs allow the transmission to cool. This
(80 mph) because the vehicle
service. See your dealer right away. message clears when the fluid
detects a problem in the speed
temperature reaches a safe level.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION variable assist steering system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your
This message displays when there Vehicle Reminder dealer.
is a problem with the transmission. Messages
See your dealer for service.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
Washer Fluid Messages
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
WITH CARE WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
ENGINE
This message displays when the FLUID
{ Caution outside air temperature is cold
enough to create icy road
This message displays when the
windshield washer fluid is low. Fill
Do not drive the vehicle while the conditions. Adjust your driving the windshield washer fluid reservoir
transmission fluid is overheating, accordingly. as soon as possible. See Engine
or the transmission can be Compartment Overview on
damaged. This could lead to page 10-5 for the location of the
costly repairs that would not be windshield washer fluid reservoir.
covered by the warranty. Also, see Washer Fluid on

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle To change customization Feature Settings Menu Items

preferences, use the following
Personalization The following are customization
procedure.
features that allow you to program
Entering the Feature settings to the vehicle:
Vehicle Personalization Settings Menu
(With DIC Buttons) DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
1. Turn the ignition on and place This feature will only display if a
Your vehicle may have the vehicle in P (Park). language other than English has
customization capabilities that allow
To avoid excessive drain on the been set. This feature allows you to
you to program certain features to
battery, it is recommended that change the language in which the
one preferred setting. Customization
the headlamps are turned off. DIC messages appear to English.
features can only be programmed to
one setting on the vehicle and 2. Press the customization button Press the customization button until
cannot be programmed to a to enter the feature the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN
preferred setting for two different settings menu. ENGLISH screen appears on the
drivers. DIC display. Press the set/reset
If the menu is not available,
All of the customization options may FEATURE SETTINGS button once to display all DIC
not be available on your vehicle. AVAILABLE IN PARK will messages in English.
Only the options available will be display. Before entering the DISPLAY LANGUAGE
displayed on the DIC. menu, make sure the vehicle is
in P (Park). This feature allows you to select the
The default settings for the language in which the DIC
customization features were set messages will appear.
when your vehicle left the factory,
but may have been changed from
their default state since then.
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen This feature allows you to select This feature allows you to select
appears on the DIC display. Press when the doors will automatically whether or not to turn off the
the set/reset button once to access lock. See Automatic Door Locks on automatic door unlocking feature.
the settings for this feature. Then page 2-7. It also allows you to select which
press the customization button to doors and when the doors will
scroll through the following settings: Press the customization button until
AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the automatically unlock. See Automatic
ENGLISH (default): All messages DIC display. Press the set/reset Door Locks on page 2-7.
will appear in English. button once to access the settings Press the customization button until
FRANCAIS: All messages will for this feature. Then press the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on
appear in French. customization button to scroll the DIC display. Press the set/reset
ESPANOL: All messages will through the following settings: button once to access the settings
appear in Spanish. SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): for this feature. Then press the
The doors will automatically lock customization button to scroll
NO CHANGE: No change will be through the following settings:
made to this feature. The current when the vehicle is shifted out of
setting will remain. P (Park). OFF: None of the doors will
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors automatically unlock.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired will automatically lock when the DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the
setting is displayed on the DIC. vehicle speed is above 13 km/h driver door will unlock when the key
(8 mph) for three seconds. is taken out of the ignition.
You can also change the language
by pressing the trip odometer reset NO CHANGE: No change will be DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver
stem. See “DISPLAY LANGUAGE” made to this feature. The current door will unlock when the vehicle is
under “Driver Information Center setting will remain. shifted into P (Park).
(DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)” earlier To select a setting, press the set/ ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors
in this section. reset button while the desired will unlock when the key is taken
setting is displayed on the DIC. out of the ignition.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the for this feature. Then press the REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
doors will unlock when the vehicle is customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select the
shifted into P (Park). through the following settings: type of feedback you will receive
NO CHANGE: No change will be OFF: There will be no feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the
made to this feature. The current when you press the lock button on Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
setting will remain. the RKE transmitter. transmitter. You will not receive
To select a setting, press the set/ LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps feedback when unlocking the
reset button while the desired will flash when you press the lock vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
setting is displayed on the DIC. button on the RKE transmitter. the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN ONLY: The horn will sound Operation on page 2-2.
on the second press of the lock
This feature allows you to select the button on the RKE transmitter. Press the customization button until
type of feedback you will receive REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears
when locking the vehicle with the HORN & LIGHTS (default): The on the DIC display. Press the set/
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) exterior lamps will flash when you reset button once to access the
transmitter. You will not receive press the lock button on the RKE settings for this feature. Then press
feedback when locking the vehicle transmitter, and the horn will sound the customization button to scroll
with the RKE transmitter if the doors when the lock button is pressed through the following settings:
are open. See Remote Keyless again within five seconds of the
previous command. LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps
Entry (RKE) System Operation on will not flash when you press the
page 2-2. NO CHANGE: No change will be unlock button on the RKE
Press the customization button until made to this feature. The current transmitter.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on setting will remain.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior
the DIC display. Press the set/reset To select a setting, press the set/ lamps will flash when you press the
button once to access the settings reset button while the desired unlock button on the RKE
setting is displayed on the DIC. transmitter.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
NO CHANGE: No change will be Press the customization button until Press the customization button until
made to this feature. The current DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC
setting will remain. the DIC display. Press the set/reset display. Press the set/reset button
To select a setting, press the set/ button once to access the settings once to access the settings for this
reset button while the desired for this feature. Then press the feature. Then press the
setting is displayed on the DIC. customization button to scroll customization button to scroll
through the following settings: through the following settings:
DELAY DOOR LOCK OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not
This feature allows you to select locking of the vehicle's doors. turn on.
whether or not the locking of the ON (default): The doors will not 30 SECONDS (default): The
vehicle's doors and liftgate will be lock until five seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for
delayed. When locking the doors door or the liftgate is closed. 30 seconds.
and liftgate with the power door lock
switch and a door or the liftgate is NO CHANGE: No change will be 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will
open, this feature will delay locking made to this feature. The current stay on for one minute.
the doors and liftgate until setting will remain. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will
five seconds after the last door is To select a setting, press the set/ stay on for two minutes.
closed. You will hear three chimes reset button while the desired
to signal that the delayed locking NO CHANGE: No change will be
setting is displayed on the DIC. made to this feature. The current
feature is in use. The key must be
out of the ignition for this feature to EXIT LIGHTING setting will remain.
work. You can temporarily override This feature allows you to select the To select a setting, press the set/
delayed locking by pressing the amount of time you want the reset button while the desired
power door lock switch twice or the exterior lamps to remain on when it setting is displayed on the DIC.
lock button on the RKE transmitter is dark enough outside. This
twice. See Delayed Locking on happens after the key is turned from
page 2-7. ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
APPROACH LIGHTING The lights will remain on for LOUD: The chime volume will be
This feature allows you to select 20 seconds or until the lock button set to a loud level.
whether or not to have the exterior on the RKE transmitter is pressed, NO CHANGE: No change will be
lights turn on briefly during low light or the vehicle is no longer off. See made to this feature. The current
periods after unlocking the vehicle Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) setting will remain.
using the Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-2.
There is no default for chime
(RKE) transmitter. NO CHANGE: No change will be volume. The volume will stay at the
Press the customization button until made to this feature. The current last known setting.
APPROACH LIGHTING appears on setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
the DIC display. Press the set/reset To select a setting, press the set/ reset button while the desired
button once to access the settings reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
for this feature. Then press the setting is displayed on the DIC.
customization button to scroll PARK TILT MIRRORS
through the following settings: CHIME VOLUME
If your vehicle has this feature, it
OFF: The exterior lights will not This feature allows you to select the allows you to select whether or not
turn on when you unlock the vehicle volume level of the chime. the outside mirror(s) will
with the RKE transmitter. Press the customization button until automatically tilt down when the
ON (default): If it is dark enough CHIME VOLUME appears on the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
outside, the exterior lights will turn DIC display. Press the set/reset See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2-16.
on briefly when you unlock the button once to access the settings Press the customization button until
vehicle with the RKE transmitter. for this feature. Then press the PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on
customization button to scroll the DIC display. Press the set/reset
through the following settings: button once to access the settings
NORMAL: The chime volume will
be set to a normal level.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
for this feature. Then press the EASY EXIT SEAT original exit position, unless a
customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it memory recall took place prior to
through the following settings: allows you to select your preference removing the key again.
OFF (default): Neither outside for the automatic easy exit seat NO CHANGE: No change will be
mirror will be tilted down when the feature. See Memory Seats on made to this feature. The current
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). page 3-6. setting will remain.
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/
outside mirror will be tilted down EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the reset button while the desired
when the vehicle is shifted into DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC.
R (Reverse). button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the MEMORY SEAT RECALL
PASSENGER MIRROR: The
passenger outside mirror will be customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it
tilted down when the vehicle is through the following settings: allows you to select your preference
shifted into R (Reverse). OFF (default): No automatic seat for the remote memory seat recall
exit recall will occur. feature. See Memory Seats on
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver and page 3-6.
passenger outside mirrors will be ON: The driver seat will move back
tilted down when the vehicle is when the key is removed from the Press the customization button until
shifted into R (Reverse). ignition. MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/
NO CHANGE: No change will be The automatic easy exit seat reset button once to access the
made to this feature. The current movement will only occur one time settings for this feature. Then press
setting will remain. after the key is removed from the the customization button to scroll
To select a setting, press the set/ ignition. If the automatic movement through the following settings:
reset button while the desired has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and OFF (default): No remote memory
setting is displayed on the DIC. seat recall will occur.
remove it again, the seat and
steering column will stay in the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
ON: The driver seat and outside for this feature. Then press the for this feature. Then press the
mirrors will automatically move to customization button to scroll customization button to scroll
the stored driving position when the through the following settings: through the following settings:
unlock button on the Remote OFF: The remote start feature will RESTORE ALL (default): The
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is be disabled. customization features will be set to
pressed. their factory default settings.
ON (default): The remote start
NO CHANGE: No change will be feature will be enabled. DO NOT RESTORE: The
made to this feature. The current customization features will not be
setting will remain. NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/ setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC. To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE START setting is displayed on the DIC. EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
If your vehicle has this feature, it FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the
allows you to turn the remote start feature settings menu.
off or on. The remote start feature This feature allows you to set all of
allows you to start the engine from the customization features back to Press the customization button until
outside of the vehicle using the their factory default settings. FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Press the customization button until TO EXIT appears in the DIC display.
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle FACTORY SETTINGS appears on Press the set/reset button once to
Start on page 2-4. the DIC display. Press the set/reset exit the menu.
Press the customization button until button once to access the settings If you do not exit, pressing the
REMOTE START appears on the customization button again will
DIC display. Press the set/reset return you to the beginning of the
button once to access the settings feature settings menu.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Exiting the Feature Universal Remote Do not use the Universal Remote
Settings Menu system with any garage door opener
System that does not have the stop and
The feature settings menu will be reverse feature. This includes any
exited when any of the following See Radio Frequency Statement on
garage door opener model
occurs: page 13-12.
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
. The vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park). Universal Remote System Read these instructions completely
before programming the Universal
. The vehicle is no longer in
Programming Remote system. It may help to have
ON/RUN. another person assist with the
programming process.
. The trip/fuel or vehicle
information DIC buttons are Keep the original hand-held
pressed. transmitter for use in other vehicles
. as well as for future programming.
The end of the feature settings
Erase the programming when
menu is reached and exited.
vehicle ownership is terminated.
. A 40-second time period has If equipped, these buttons are in the See “Erasing Universal Remote
elapsed with no selection made. overhead console. System Buttons” later in this
This system can replace up to three section.
remote control transmitters used to To program a garage door opener,
activate devices such as garage park outside directly in line with and
door openers, security systems, and facing the garage door opener
home automation devices. These receiver. Clear all people and
instructions refer to a garage door objects near the garage door.
opener, but can be used for other
devices.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Make sure the hand-held transmitter 2. At the same time, press and programming is complete.
has a new battery for quicker and hold both the hand-held There is no need to
more accurate transmission of the transmitter button and one of the complete Steps 4–6.
radio-frequency signal. three Universal Remote system . If the indicator light does
buttons to be used to operate not come on or the garage
Programming the Universal the garage door. Do not release
Remote System door does not move, a
either button until the indicator second button press may
For questions or help programming light changes from a slow to a be required. For a second
the Universal Remote system, call rapid flash. Then release both time, press and hold the
1-800-355-3515 or see buttons. newly programmed button
www.homelink.com. Some garage door openers may for five seconds. If the light
Programming involves require substitution of Step 2 stays on or the garage door
time-sensitive actions, and may time with the procedure under “Radio moves, programming is
out causing the procedure to be Signals for Canada and Some complete.
repeated. Gate Operators” later in this . If the indicator light blinks
section. rapidly for two seconds,
To program up to three devices:
3. Press and hold the newly then changes to a solid light
1. Hold the end of the hand-held programmed Universal Remote and the garage door does
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to system button for five seconds not move, continue with
3 in) away from the Universal while watching the indicator light programming Steps 4–6.
Remote system buttons with the and garage door activation.
indicator light in view. The
hand-held transmitter was . If the indicator light stays on
supplied by the manufacturer of continuously or the garage
the garage door opener receiver. door moves when the
button is pressed, then

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
flash, press and hold the same enough for the Universal Remote
button a second time for system to pick up the signal during
two seconds, then release it. programming.
Again, if the door does not move If the programming did not work,
or the garage door lamp does replace Step 2 under “Programming
not flash, press and hold the the Universal Remote System” with
same button a third time for the following:
two seconds, then release it.
Press and hold the Universal
The Universal Remote system Remote system button while
Learn or Smart Button
should now activate the pressing and releasing the
4. After completing Steps 1–3, garage door. hand-held transmitter button every
locate the Learn or Smart button
Repeat the process for two seconds until the signal has
inside the garage on the garage
programming the two remaining been successfully accepted by the
door opener receiver. The name
buttons. Universal Remote system. The
and color of the button may vary
Universal Remote system indicator
by manufacturer. Radio Signals for Canada and light will flash slowly at first and then
5. Press and release the Learn or Some Gate Operators rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
Smart button. Step 6 must be For questions or programming help, “Programming the Universal Remote
completed within 30 seconds of call 1-800-355-3515 or see System” to complete.
pressing this button. www.homelink.com.
6. Inside the vehicle, press and Canadian radio-frequency laws and
hold the newly programmed some U.S. gate operators require
Universal Remote system button transmitter signals to time out or quit
for two seconds, then release it. after several seconds of
If the garage door does not transmission. This may not be long
move or the lamp on the garage
door opener receiver does not

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Universal Remote System Reprogramming a Single

Operation Universal Remote System
Button
Using the Universal Remote To reprogram any of the system
System buttons:
Press and hold the appropriate 1. Press and hold any one of the
Universal Remote system button for buttons. Do not release the
at least one-half second. The button.
indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted. 2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
Erasing Universal Remote releasing the button, proceed
System Buttons with Step 1 under “Programming
Erase all programmed buttons when the Universal Remote System.”
vehicle ownership is terminated.
To erase:
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons until the indicator light
begins to flash. This should take
about 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
2 NOTES

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Lighting Features

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exterior Lighting
Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-7
Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3
Turn and Lane-Change
The exterior lamp control is on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
instrument panel to the left of the
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
steering wheel.
Interior Lighting There are four positions:
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 O (Off): Briefly turn to this position
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 to turn the automatic light control off
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 or on again.
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with the
other exterior lamps and instrument
panel lights.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
6-2 Lighting
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the Daytime Running Lamps

parking lamps including all lamps, (DRL)/Automatic
except the headlamps.
Headlamp System
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps together with the parking DRL can make it easier for others to
lamps and instrument panel lights. see the front of your vehicle during
A warning chime sounds if the driver This indicator light turns on in the the day. Fully functional DRL are
door is opened when the ignition instrument cluster when the required on all vehicles first sold in
switch is off and the headlamps high-beam headlamps are on. Canada.
are on. The DRL system makes the
Flash-to-Pass low-beam headlamps come on at a
# (Fog Lamps): If equipped, it
turns the fog lamps on or off. This feature is used to signal to the reduced brightness when the
vehicle ahead that you want following conditions are met:
See Fog Lamps on page 6-4.
to pass. . The ignition is in the ON/RUN
Headlamp High/ If the headlamps are off or in the position.
low-beam position, pull the turn . The exterior lamp control is
Low-Beam Changer signal lever toward you to in AUTO.
2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam momentarily switch to high beams.
Changer): Push the turn signal
. The engine is running.
Release the lever to turn the
lever away from you to turn the high high-beam headlamps off. When the DRL are on, the regular
beams on. headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,
Pull the lever toward you to return to and other lamps will not be on. The
low beams. instrument cluster will also not be lit.
The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular
headlamps depending on the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Lighting 6-3
darkness of the surroundings. The not operating, these lamps turn off. Hazard Warning Flashers
other lamps that come on with the Move the exterior lamp control to P
headlamps will also come on.
or ; to disable this feature.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will go off and the Delayed Headlamps
DRL will come on.
Delayed headlamps provide a
When the DRLs are active and a period of exterior lighting as you
turn signal is operated, the DRL on leave the area around the vehicle.
the side the turn signal is activated, This feature is activated when the
will turn off until the turn signal is headlamps are on due to the
turned off. automatic headlamps control feature
The regular headlamp system and when the ignition is turned off.
should be turned on when needed. The headlamps remain on until the
exterior lamp control is moved to the
Do not cover the light sensor on top
parking lamps position or until the | (Hazard Warning Flasher):
of the instrument panel because it
pre-selected delayed headlamp Press this button to make the front
works with the DRL.
lighting period has ended. and rear turn signal lamps flash on
Lights On with Wipers If the ignition is turned off with the and off. This warns others that you
If the windshield wipers are exterior lamp control in the ; are having trouble. Press again to
activated in daylight with the engine turn the flashers off.
or 5 position, the delayed
on, and the exterior lamp control is The turn signals do not work while
headlamps cycle will not occur.
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking the hazard warning flashers are on.
lamps, and other exterior lamps To disable the delayed headlamps
come on. The transition time for the feature or change the time of delay,
lamps coming on varies based on see Vehicle Personalization (With
wiper speed. When the wipers are DIC Buttons) on page 5-45.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
6-4 Lighting
Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting Fog Lamps
position whenever it is released.
Signals
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out.
Have any burned out bulbs
replaced. If a bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 10-29.
Turn Signal On Chime For vehicles with front fog lamps,
Move the turn signal lever all the If either one of the turn signals is left the fog lamp button is on the
way up or down to signal a turn. on and the vehicle has been driven exterior lamp control to the left of
more than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime the steering column.
An arrow on the instrument cluster
flashes in the direction of the turn or will sound. Use the fog lamps for better vision
lane change. in foggy or misty conditions.
Raise or lower the lever until the # (Fog Lamps): Press the fog
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane lamp button to turn the fog lamps on
change. Hold it there until the lane or off. A light comes on in the
change is completed. If the lever is instrument cluster when the fog
briefly pressed and released, the lamps are in use. The ignition must
turn signal flashes three times. be on for the fog lamps to work.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Lighting 6-5
When the headlamps are changed Interior Lighting counterclockwise to brighten or dim
to high beam, the fog lamps turn off. the lights. Push the knob back in
The fog lamps come back on again when finished.
when the high-beam headlamps are Instrument Panel
turned off. Illumination Control Courtesy Lamps
Some localities have laws that The courtesy lamps automatically
require the headlamps to be on come on when a door is opened.
along with the fog lamps. The lamps can also be turned on
manually by fully turning the
instrument panel brightness control
clockwise.
The reading lamps, located on the
headliner above the rearview mirror,
can be turned on or off
independently of the automatic
courtesy lamps, when the doors are
closed.
The instrument panel brightness
knob is located on the instrument
Dome Lamps
panel to the left of the steering The dome lamps are in the
column. overhead console and above the
D (Instrument Panel rear seat passengers.
Brightness): Push the knob in all The dome lamps come on when a
the way until it extends out and then door is opened, unless the dome
turn the knob clockwise or lamp override button is pressed in.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
6-6 Lighting
The lamps can also be turned on the dome lamps are off. Press the Lighting Features
and off by turning the instrument button again so the dome lamps
panel brightness control clockwise come on when a door is opened.
to the farthest position. Entry Lighting
Dome Lamp Override For vehicles with courtesy lamps,
they come on and stay on for a set
time whenever K is pressed on the
transmitter.
If a door is opened, the lamps stay
on while it is open and then turn off
automatically about 20 seconds
after the door is closed. If K is
pressed and no door is opened, the
lamps turn off after about
20 seconds.
AMBIENT OFF (If Equipped): Entry lighting includes a feature
Press the button to turn the ambient called theater dimming. With theater
The dome lamp override button is lights off. Press the button again to dimming, the lamps do not turn off
next to the exterior lamps control. turn ambient lights on. at the end of the delay time.
E DOME OFF (Dome Lamp Instead, they slowly dim and then
Override): Press the button and Reading Lamps go out. The delay time is canceled if
the dome lamps remain off when a Press the button near each lamp to the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN
door is opened. An indicator light on turn them on or off. or the power door lock switch is
the button comes on to show that pressed. The lamps will dim
right away.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Lighting 6-7
When the ignition is on, illuminated Delayed Exit Lighting Parade Dimming
entry is inactive, which means the
courtesy lamps will not come on Delayed exit lighting illuminates the This feature automatically prohibits
unless a door is opened. interior for a period of time after the the dimming of the instrument panel
key is removed from the ignition. displays in daylight while the
Delayed Entry Lighting The ignition must be off for delayed headlamps are on so that the
exit lighting to work. When the key displays are still able to be seen.
Delayed entry lighting illuminates
is removed, interior illumination
the interior for a period of time after
activates and remains on until one Battery Load
all the doors have been closed.
of the following occurs: Management
The ignition must be off for delayed . The ignition is in ON/RUN. The vehicle has Electric Power
entry lighting to work. Immediately
after all the doors have been closed, . The power door locks are Management (EPM) that estimates
the delayed entry lighting feature activated. the battery's temperature and state
continues to work until one of the of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
. An illumination period of for best performance and extended
following occurs: 20 seconds has elapsed. life of the battery.
. The ignition is in ON/RUN. If during the illumination period a When the battery's state of charge
. The doors are locked. door is opened, the timed is low, the voltage is raised slightly
illumination period will be canceled to quickly bring the charge back up.
. An illumination period of about
and the interior lamps will remain on When the state of charge is high,
25 seconds has elapsed.
because a door is open. the voltage is lowered slightly to
If during the illumination period a prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
door is opened, the timed has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
illumination period is canceled and display on the Driver Information
the interior lamps remain on. Center (DIC), you may see the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
6-8 Lighting
voltage move up or down. This is needed. It can temporarily reduce Battery Power Protection
normal. If there is a problem, an the power demands of some
alert will be displayed. accessories. This feature helps prevent the
battery from being drained, if the
The battery can be discharged at Normally, these actions occur in interior courtesy lamps or reading
idle if the electrical loads are very steps or levels, without being lamps are accidentally left on. If any
high. This is true for all vehicles. noticeable. In rare cases at the of these lamps are left on, they
This is because the generator highest levels of corrective action, automatically turn off after
(alternator) may not be spinning fast this action may be noticeable to the 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The
enough at idle to produce all of the driver. If so, a DIC message might lamps will not come back on again
power needed for very high be displayed, such as BATTERY until one of the following occurs:
electrical loads. SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
. The ignition is turned on.
A high electrical load occurs when VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
several of the following are on, such If one of these messages displays, it . The exterior lamps control is
as: headlamps, high beams, rear is recommended that the driver turned off, then on again.
window defogger, climate control fan reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information The headlamps will time out after
at high speed, heated seats, engine 10 minutes, if they are manually
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
page 5-25 or Driver Information turned on while the ignition is on
plugged into accessory power or off.
outlets. Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
on page 5-31.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power whenever

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player (Radio without
Introduction
System Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD Player (Radio with
7-20
Infotainment
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Base radio information is included in
Introduction MP3 (Radio without this manual. See the infotainment
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 manual for information on other
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 MP3 (Radio with available infotainment systems.
Overview (Radio without Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Read the following pages to
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 become familiar with these features.
Overview (Radio with Rear Seat Infotainment
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Operation (Radio without
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
{ Warning
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Taking your eyes off the road for
Operation (Radio with Phone too long or too often while using
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
any infotainment feature can
Radio Settings cause a crash. You or others
AM-FM Radio (Radio without Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41 could be injured or killed. Do not
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 give extended attention to
AM-FM Radio (Radio with Trademarks and License infotainment tasks while driving.
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Agreements Limit your glances at the vehicle
Satellite Radio (Radio without Trademarks and License displays and focus your attention
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 on driving. Use voice commands
Satellite Radio (Radio with whenever possible.
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up phone numbers in
The infotainment system has built-in
advance so they can be called
Theft-Deterrent Feature
features intended to help avoid
distraction by disabling some easily by pressing a single TheftLock® is designed to
functions when driving. These button or by using a single voice discourage theft of the vehicle's
functions may gray out when they command if equipped with radio by learning a portion of the
are unavailable. Many infotainment Bluetooth phone capability. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
features are also available through The radio does not operate if it is
See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
the instrument cluster and steering stolen or moved to a different
wheel controls. To play the infotainment system with vehicle.
the ignition off, see Retained
Before driving: Accessory Power (RAP) on
. Become familiar with the page 9-18.
operation, faceplate buttons, and
screen buttons.
. Set up the audio by presetting
favorite stations, setting the
tone, and adjusting the
speakers.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Overview (Radio without Touchscreen) 3. MENU
For information on using the radio, see Operation (Radio without

. Press to open the tone
Touchscreen) on page 7-5 or Operation (Radio with Touchscreen) on menu to adjust the bass,
page 7-8. midrange, treble, fade, and
balance.
4. Buttons 1 - 6
. Saves and selects favorite
stations.
. Select options.
5. EQ (Equalizer)
. Press to adjust the
equalizer.
6. f (Tone/Tune)
. Press to set Tone options.
. Turn to manually select
radio stations.
7. CAT (Category)
. Press to display a list of
SiriusXM® categories.
1. 4 (Information) 2. FAV (Favorites Pages)
. Press to show information
. Press to scroll through the
on the current station or favorite pages.
track.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
8. H (Clock) 12. P (Power/Volume) 15. CD/AUX

. Press to set the clock. . Press to turn the
. Press to scroll through
infotainment system on selecting the CD or an
9. BAND auxiliary device.
or off.
. Press to scroll through the . Turn to adjust the volume. 16. Auxiliary Input Jack
available bands AM, FM,
or SiriusXM if equipped.
. Use to connect external
13. s REV (Reverse) audio devices.
10. © SEEK . Press and hold to go
backward fast through a 17. Z EJECT
. Seeks the previous station
or track. track. . Press to eject the
loaded CD.
11. ¨ SEEK 14. \ FWD (Forward)
. Seeks the next station or
. Press and hold to fast
track. forward through a track.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Overview (Radio with Touchscreen) 6. D (Home Page)

The infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons, touch screen, 7. SRCE (Source)
steering wheel controls, and voice recognition. See Operation (Radio 8. FAV (Favorites Menu)
without Touchscreen) on page 7-5 or Operation (Radio with Touchscreen) on
page 7-8. 9. © SEEK (Previous/Reverse)
10. SEEK ¨ (Next/Forward)
11. / BACK
Operation (Radio without

Touchscreen)
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
A lock symbol displays next to the
clock display while the parental
control feature is being used. The
feature remains on until O is
pressed and held for more than
two seconds, or the driver turns the
3. CD Slot ignition off and exits the vehicle.
1. PUSH/O (Volume/Power)
4. AUX Port
2. Z (Eject)
5. PUSH/SEL (Select)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
4 (Information): Press to switch To activate Auto Text: 3. Press the softkey under the
the display between the radio 1. Press MENU to display the radio AUTO VOLUM (automatic
station frequency and the time. setup menu. volume) tab on the radio display.
When the ignition is in the OFF 4. Press the softkey under the
2. Press the softkey under the
position, press 4 to display the time. AUTO TXT tab on the radio Speed Compensated Volume
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, display. setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High)
or RDS features, press 4 to display to select the level of radio
3. Press the softkey under the ON volume compensation. Press the
additional text information related to
tab on the radio display. softkey located below the BACK
the current FM-RDS or XM station;
tab on the MENU SETUP
or CD, MP3, or WMA song. If 4 is pressed and the song title or
If information is available during XM, display or let the display time out
artist information is longer than what after approximately 10 seconds.
CD, MP3, or WMA playback, the can be displayed, the extra
song title information displays on Each higher setting allows for
information will page every more radio volume
the top line of the display and artist five seconds when Auto Text is
information displays on the bottom compensation at faster vehicle
activated. speeds.
line. When information is not
available, “NO INFO” displays. Speed Compensated Volume
(SCV): The SCV feature Setting the Tone (Bass/
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, automatically adjusts the radio Midrange/Treble)
CD, MP3, and WMA features): If volume to compensate for road and BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
additional information is available wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or Treble): To adjust bass,
for the current song being played, or slows down, so that the volume midrange, or treble:
Auto Text will automatically page/ level is consistent.
scroll the information every 1. Press f until the tone control
five seconds above the FAV presets To activate SCV:
tabs display.
on the radio display. 1. Set the radio volume.
2. Press the MENU button to
display the radio setup menu.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
2. Continue pressing f to highlight EQ (Equalization): Press to 3. To adjust the highlighted setting,

the tab, or press the softkey choose bass and treble equalization do one of the following until the
under the tab. settings designed for different types levels are obtained:
of music. The choices are pop, rock,
3. To adjust the highlighted setting, country, talk, jazz, and classical.
. Turn f clockwise or
do one of the following until the Selecting MANUAL or changing counterclockwise.
levels are obtained: bass or treble, returns the EQ to the . Press \ FWD, or s REV.
. Turn f clockwise or manual bass and treble settings.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to
counterclockwise. Unique EQ settings can be saved
the middle position, press the
for each source.
. Press \ FWD, or s REV. softkey under the BAL or FADE tab
If the radio has a Bose® audio for more than two seconds. A beep
If a station's frequency is weak or if system, the EQ settings are either sounds and the level adjusts to the
there is static, decrease the treble. MANUAL or TALK. middle position.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, To quickly adjust all speaker and
Adjusting the Speakers
or treble to the middle position, tone controls to the middle position,
press the softkey under the BASS, (Balance/Fade)
press f for more than two seconds
MID, or TREB tab for more than BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
two seconds. A beep sounds and adjust the balance or fade: until a beep sounds.
the level adjusts to the middle Radio Messages
position. 1. Press f until the speaker control
tabs display. Calibration Error: The audio
To quickly adjust all tone and system has been calibrated for the
speaker controls to the middle 2. Continue pressing f to highlight vehicle from the factory. If the
position when in the Tone menu, the tab, or press the softkey message displays, it means that the
press f for more than two seconds under the tab. radio has not been configured
until a beep sounds. properly for the vehicle and it must
be returned to your dealer for
service.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Locked: This message displays PUSH/SEL(Select): Page, then pressing Favorites

when the TheftLock® system has . Turn to manually find a station or Pages, and then selecting the
locked up the radio. Take the highlight a menu selection. number of Favorite Pages.
vehicle to your dealer for service. © SEEK (Previous/Reverse):
. Press to select a highlighted
If any error occurs repeatedly or if selection. . AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped):
an error cannot be corrected, Press to seek to the previous
contact your dealer. D (Home Page): Press to go to
strong station. Press and hold
the Home Page. See “Home Page”
in this section. for Scan. Press © again to stop
Operation (Radio with the scan.
Touchscreen) SRCE (Source): Press to switch
between AM, FM, CD, and if . CD, USB: Press to seek to the
Infotainment Controls equipped, SiriusXM®, front auxiliary, beginning of the current or
rear auxiliary, and iPod/USB. previous track.
PUSH/ O (Volume/Power):
Press and hold to mute/pause the . CD, USB: Press and hold to
. Press to turn the system on system. Press and hold again to quickly reverse through a track.
and off. unmute/resume the system. Release the button to return to
. Turn to adjust the volume. playing speed. See CD Player
FAV (Favorites Menu): In AM, FM, (Radio with Touchscreen) on
Z (Eject): Press to eject a disc or SiriusXM, press to change the page 7-22 or CD Player (Radio
from the CD player. See CD Player current favorite page number above without Touchscreen) on
(Radio with Touchscreen) on the preset buttons. Keep pressing to page 7-20 and Auxiliary Devices
page 7-22 or CD Player (Radio scroll through the favorites pages. on page 7-31.
without Touchscreen) on page 7-20. The stored stations for each list
display on the bottom of the screen.
AUX Port: 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
The number of preset Favorite
connection for external audio
Pages can be changed by pressing
devices.
the Settings button on a Home

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
SEEK ¨ (Next/Forward): Home Page FAV (Favorites): Press to scroll

through the favorites banner on the
. AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped): bottom of the screen. The favorites
Press to seek to the next strong banner stores your favorite radio
station. Press and hold for Scan. and SiriusXM stations. To store a
Press ¨ again to stop the scan. favorite station, press and hold on
the desired position on the banner
. CD, USB: Press to seek or skip
the next track or program. until a beep is heard.
. CD, USB: Press and hold to fast
g (Voice Recognition): Press to
begin voice recognition. See
forward through a track. Release
Bluetooth on page 7-34.
the button to return to playing The infotainment system displays a
speed. See CD Player (Radio Home Page to access all of the Menu: Press to enter the Home
with Touchscreen) on page 7-22 Page menu.
applications.
or CD Player (Radio without q Previous : Press to go to the
Touchscreen) on page 7-20 and Back: Press to go back to the
previous page or menu. previous Home Page.
Auxiliary Devices on page 7-31.
/ BACK: Press to return to the Home: From any page, press to Next r : Press to go to the next
previous screen in a menu. cycle through the Home Pages to Home Page.
start a different application. The
Touchscreen Buttons Home Page Features
Home Page can have up to three
Touchscreen buttons show visibly pages with eight icons per page. Some features are disabled when
on the screen when available. When Each of these three pages can be the vehicle is moving and some
a function is unavailable, the button customized to contain your choice icons may not be active.
may gray-out. When a function is of up to eight per screen. They may
selected, the button may highlight, also be re-ordered on each screen
or animate. to taste.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Now Playing: Press to display the speakers. The middle position Radio
active source page. The sources balances the sound between the
available are AM, FM, XM (if left and right speakers.
equipped), CD, USB, Bluetooth, AM-FM Radio (Radio
. Fade: Press F for more sound
or AUX Input. from the front speakers or R for
without Touchscreen)
Settings: Press to display the more sound from the rear Radio Data System (RDS)
Settings menu. See Settings on speakers. The middle position
page 7-41. balances the sound between the The RDS feature is available for use
front and rear speakers. only on FM stations that broadcast
Tone: Press to display the Tone RDS information. This system relies
Settings menu. The following may DSP Mode: Press o or p to adjust upon receiving specific information
display: the DSP mode (if equipped). from these stations and only works
Tone Settings: Press to adjust the when the information is available.
tone settings. The following may
Language While the radio is tuned to an
display: To change the language of the FM-RDS station, the station name
screens. See Vehicle or call letters display. In rare cases,
. EQ: Press o or p to adjust the Personalization (With DIC Buttons) a radio station could broadcast
equalizer. on page 5-45. incorrect information that causes the
. Bass: Press + or − to adjust radio features to work improperly.
English or Metric Units If this happens, contact the radio
the bass.
To change the screens from English station.
. Middle: Press + or − to adjust
or metric. See Driver Information Finding a Station
the middle.
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
. Treble: Press + or − to adjust the page 5-25 or Driver Information BAND: Press to switch between
treble. Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) AM, FM, or SiriusXM®. The
on page 5-31. selection displays.
. Balance: Press L to hear more
sound from the left speakers or f (Tune): Turn to select radio
R for more sound from the right stations.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
© SEEK and ¨ SEEK: Press to go FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 4. Repeat the steps for each radio
to the previous or next station and 36 stations can be programmed as station to be stored as a favorite.
stay there. favorites using the six softkeys To set up the number of favorites
below the radio station frequency pages:
To scan stations, press and tabs and by using the radio favorites
hold © SEEK or ¨ SEEK until a page button (FAV button). Press to 1. Press MENU to display the radio
beep sounds. The radio goes to a go through up to six pages of setup menu.
station, plays for a few seconds, favorites, each having six favorite 2. Press the softkey below the
then goes to the next station. Press stations available per page. Each FAV 1-6 tab.
either arrow again to stop scanning. page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM 3. Select the desired number of
The radio only seeks and scans favorites pages by pressing the
stations with a strong signal that are stations.
softkey below the displayed
in the selected band. The balance/fade and tone settings page numbers.
that were previously adjusted are
Storing a Radio Station as a stored with the favorite stations. 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time
Favorite out, to return to the original main
To store a station as a favorite: radio screen showing the radio
Drivers are encouraged to set up
their radio station favorites while the 1. Tune to the desired radio station. station frequency tabs and to
vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to begin the process of
2. Press FAV to display the page to programming favorites for the
favorite stations using the presets, store the station.
favorites button, and steering wheel chosen number of favorites
controls. See Steering Wheel 3. Press and hold one of the pages.
Controls (Radio with Touchscreen) six softkeys until a beep sounds.
on page 5-3 or Steering Wheel When that softkey is pressed
Controls (Radio without and released, the station that
Touchscreen) on page 5-2. was set returns.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
AM-FM Radio (Radio with the bottom of the screen position balances the sound
allowing you to select the one between the front and rear
Touchscreen) you want. speakers.
Playing the Radio Infotainment System Settings . Balance: Press the L or R button
for more sound from the left or
PUSH/O (Power/Volume): Tone Settings right speakers. The middle
. Press to turn the radio on or off. To access the tone settings, press position balances the sound
. Turn to increase or decrease the the Tone Settings button on the between the left and right
Home Page. speakers.
volume of the active source.
The steering wheel controls can To adjust the settings: Finding a Station
also be used to adjust the volume. . Bass: Press + or − to change Press SRCE to select AM, FM,
See Steering Wheel Controls (Radio the level. or SiriusXM (if equipped).
with Touchscreen) on page 5-3 or
Steering Wheel Controls (Radio
. Middle: Press + or − to change Turn the PUSH/SEL knob to find a
without Touchscreen) on page 5-2. the level. radio station. To select a preset
. Treble: Press + or − to change station, press FAV to scroll through
Audio Source the favorite pages and then press a
the level.
To access AM, FM, or SiriusXM® if preset button on the radio or the
equipped, do one of the following:
. EQ: Press o or p to scroll screen button.
through the preset EQ options. Seeking a Station
. Press the AM, FM, or XM (if
equipped) screen button on the . DSP Mode: Press o or p to Press © SEEK or SEEK ¨ to search
Home Page. scroll through the preset DSP for a station. You may also use the
. Press the SRCE radio button to modes. ¨ on the steering wheel controls.
scroll through the options. . Fade: Press the F or R button
A source ribbon will appear at for more sound from the front or
rear speakers. The middle

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
AM Favorites List: Press to display the To access the FM Menu press the
favorites list. Menu screen button and the
AM Station List: Press to display a following may display:
list of AM stations.
Update Station List: Press to
update the AM stations list.
FM
To access the AM menu press the

Menu screen button and the
following may display:
Favorites List: Press to display the
favorites list.
FM Station List: Press to display a
list of FM stations.
FM Category List: Press to display
a list of FM categories.
Update Station List: Press to
update the FM stations list.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
SiriusXM (If Equipped) XM Channel List: Press to display Storing Radio Station Presets
a list of SiriusXM channels.
Up to 30 preset stations can be
XM Category List: Press to display stored. AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if
a list of SiriusXM categories. equipped) can be mixed.
Tune Select: If equipped with 1. From the AM, FM, or SiriusXM
SiriusXM, press and the following main page, press and hold any
may display: 1−5 buttons or one of the preset
. Artist: Press to set an audio alert screen buttons on the banner
when the current artist is playing until a beep is heard. The new
on a SiriusXM channel. preset information displays on
To access the XM Menu press the that screen button.
. Song: Press to set an audio alert
Menu screen button and the 2. Repeat for each preset.
when the current song is playing
following may display:
on a SiriusXM channel. Mixed-Band Presets
. Tune Select Manager: Press Each favorite page can store
Disable/Enable All Alerts to five preset stations. The presets
enable or disable all alerts. within a page can be from different
A checkmark next to the alert radio bands.
means it is turned on. Press an
alert to turn it off. Press Delete To scroll through the pages, press
to delete an alert. FAV or the FAV screen button on the
top bar. The current page number
. Audible Alert: This feature will displays above the preset buttons.
give an audio alert when certain The stored stations for each favorite
artists or songs are available on page display on the preset buttons.
Favorites List: Press to display the a specific station. Press to turn
favorites list. on or off.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
To change the number of favorite Satellite Radio (Radio f (Tune): Turn to select radio
pages displayed: stations.
without Touchscreen)
1. Press Settings on the © SEEK and ¨ SEEK: Press to go
Home Page. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio to the previous or next station and
2. Press Favorite Pages.
Service stay there.
If equipped, SiriusXM is a satellite
3. Select the number of pages to To scan stations, press and hold ©
radio service based in the
display. or ¨ until a beep sounds. The radio
48 contiguous United States and 10
Recalling a Preset Station Canadian provinces. SiriusXM goes to a station, plays for a few
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of seconds, then goes to the next
To recall a preset station from a station. Press either arrow again to
favorites page, do one the following: programming and commercial-free
music, coast to coast, and in stop scanning.
. Press the FAV screen button at digital-quality sound. A service fee The radio only seeks and scans
the top bar to display the preset is required to receive the SiriusXM stations with a strong signal that are
pop-up. Press one of the preset service. If SiriusXM Service needs in the selected band.
screen buttons to go to the to be reactivated, the radio will
selected preset station. display “No Subscription Please Finding a Category (CAT)
. In the AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if Renew” on channel XM1. For more Station
equipped) main page, press one information, contact SiriusXM at
CAT (Category): Press to find
of the preset screen buttons to www.siriusxm.com or
SiriusXM stations when the radio is
go to the selected preset station. 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
in the XM mode. To find SiriusXM
www.xmradio.ca or call
channels within a desired category:
1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
1. Press BAND until the SiriusXM
Finding a Station frequency displays.
BAND: Press to switch between 2. Press CAT to display the
AM, FM, or SiriusXM. The selection category tabs.
displays.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
3. Continue pressing CAT until the Undesired SiriusXM categories can Storing a Radio Station as a
desired category name displays. be removed through the setup Favorite
. Radios with CD can also menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following: Drivers are encouraged to set up
navigate the category list by their radio station favorites while the
pressing s REV or 1. Press MENU to display the radio vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
\ FWD. setup menu. favorite stations using the presets,
2. Press the softkey below the XM favorites button, and steering wheel
4. Press either of the two buttons
CAT tab. controls. See Steering Wheel
below the desired category tab
Controls (Radio with Touchscreen)
to immediately tune to the first 3. Turn f to display the category to on page 5-3 or Steering Wheel
SiriusXM station associated with be removed. Controls (Radio without
that category.
4. Press the softkey under the Touchscreen) on page 5-2.
5. To go to the next or previous Remove tab until the category FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
SiriusXM station within the name along with the word 36 stations can be programmed as
selected category, do one of the Removed displays. favorites using the six softkeys
following:
5. Repeat the steps to remove below the radio station frequency
. Turn f. more categories. tabs and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press to
. Press the buttons below the Removed categories can be go through up to six pages of
right or left arrows on the restored by pressing the softkey favorites, each having six favorite
display. under the Add tab when a removed stations available per page. Each
. Press either SEEK arrow. category is displayed or by pressing page of favorites can contain any
the softkey under the Restore combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM
6. To exit the category search All tab. stations.
mode, press the FAV button or
BAND button to display the Categories cannot be removed or The balance/fade and tone settings
favorites again. added while the vehicle is moving that were previously adjusted are
faster than 8 km/h (5 mph). stored with the favorite stations.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
To store a station as a favorite: begin the process of Channel Off Air: This channel is
1. Tune to the desired radio station. programming favorites for the not currently in service. Tune in to
chosen number of favorites another channel.
2. Press FAV to display the page to pages.
store the station. Channel Unauth: This channel is
SiriusXM Radio Messages blocked or cannot be received with
3. Press and hold one of the your SiriusXM subscription package.
six softkeys until a beep sounds. XL (Explicit Language
When that softkey is pressed Channels): These channels, or any Channel Unavail: This previously
and released, the station that others, can be blocked at a assigned channel is no longer
was set returns. customer's request, by calling assigned. Tune to another station.
1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and If this station was one of the
4. Repeat the steps for each radio 1-877-209-0079 (Canada). presets, choose another station for
station to be stored as a favorite. that preset button.
XM Updating: The encryption code
To set up the number of favorites in the receiver is being updated, and No Artist Info: No artist
pages: no action is required. This process information is available at this time
1. Press MENU to display the radio should take no longer than on this channel. The system is
setup menu. 30 seconds. working properly.
2. Press the softkey below the No XM Signal: The system is No Title Info: No song title
FAV 1-6 tab. functioning correctly, but the vehicle information is available at this time
is in a location that is blocking the on this channel. The system is
3. Select the desired number of working properly.
SiriusXM signal. When the vehicle is
favorites pages by pressing the
moved into an open area, the signal No CAT Info: No category
softkey below the displayed
should return. information is available at this time
page numbers.
Loading XM: The audio system is on this channel. The system is
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time working properly.
acquiring and processing audio and
out, to return to the original main
text data. No action is needed. This
radio screen showing the radio
message should disappear shortly.
station frequency tabs and to

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
No Information: No text or XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
informational messages are this message alternates with the XM variety of programming and
available at this time on this Radio eight-digit radio ID label. This commercial-free music, coast to
channel. The system is working label is needed to activate the coast, and in digital-quality sound.
properly. service. For more information, see
No Subscription Please Renew: Unknown: If this message is www.siriusxm.com or call
SiriusXM subscription needs to be received when tuned to channel 0, 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) and
reactivated. Contact SiriusXM at there could be a receiver fault. www.xmradio.ca or call
www.siriusxm.com or Consult with your dealer. 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and Check XM Receivr: If this When SiriusXM is active, the station
www.xmradio.ca or call message does not clear within a name, number, category name,
1-877-209-0079 (Canada). short period of time, the receiver song title, and artist display on the
CAT Not Found: There are no could have a fault. Consult with your screen. SiriusXM may update the
channels available for the selected dealer. background picture at any time.
category. The system is working XM Not Available: If this message SiriusXM Categories
properly. does not clear within a short period SiriusXM stations are organized in
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver of time, the receiver could have a categories.
in the vehicle could have previously fault. Consult with your dealer.
been in another vehicle. For security Adding or Removing SiriusXM
purposes, XM receivers cannot be Satellite Radio (Radio Categories
swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having
with Touchscreen) Using the home page:
the vehicle serviced, check with If equipped, vehicles with a valid 1. Press the Settings screen button
your dealer. SiriusXM® satellite radio on the Home Page.
subscription can receive SiriusXM 2. Select XM Categories.
programming.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
3. Select or deselect a category. AM cause static interference in the

A checkmark will indicate that radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off
The range for most AM stations is
the category is selected. if this happens.
greater than for FM, especially at
Press “Show All XM Categories” to night. The longer range can cause
restore all SiriusXM categories. station frequencies to interfere with Multi-Band Antenna
each other. Static can also occur The multi-band antenna is located
Radio Reception when things like storms and power on the roof of the vehicle. This type
lines interfere with radio reception. of antenna is used with the AM/FM
Frequency interference and static
When this happens, try reducing the radio, as well as OnStar and the
can occur during normal radio
treble on the radio. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
reception if items such as phone
chargers, vehicle convenience System, if the vehicle has these
SiriusXM Satellite Radio features. Keep this antenna clear of
accessories, and external electronic Service
devices are plugged into the snow and ice build up for clear radio
accessory power outlet. If there is If equipped, SiriusXM Satellite reception. If the vehicle has a
interference or static, unplug the Radio Service provides digital radio sunroof, the performance of the
item from the accessory power reception. Tall buildings or hills can radio system may be affected if the
outlet. interfere with satellite radio signals, sunroof is open. Loading items onto
causing the sound to fade in and the roof of the vehicle can interfere
FM out. In addition, traveling or standing with the performance of the radio
under heavy foliage, bridges, system and, if the vehicle has this
FM signals only reach about 16 to
garages, or tunnels may cause loss feature, OnStar. Make sure the
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
of the SiriusXM signal for a period multi-band antenna is not
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
of time. obstructed.
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur, Cell Phone Usage
especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in Cell phone usage, such as making
and out. or receiving phone calls, charging,
or just having the phone on may

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Audio Players played, otherwise goes to the BAND: Press to listen to the radio
previous track. Press ¨ SEEK to go when a CD is playing. The CD
to the next track. remains inside the radio for future
CD Player (Radio without listening.
Touchscreen) If either arrow is held, or pressed
multiple times, the player continues CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
Playing a CD moving backward or forward select between CD, Auxiliary,
through the tracks on the CD. or USB.
Insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls it in s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
. When a CD is in the player, the
and the CD should begin playing. and hold to reverse playback quickly CD icon and a message
within a track. Sound will be heard showing the disc and/or track
Z EJECT: Press and release to
at a reduced volume. Release to number display.
eject the disc that is currently
playing. A beep sounds and resume playing the track. The . If an auxiliary input device is not
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the elapsed time of the track displays. connected or a CD is not
disc is ejected, Remove Disc \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press installed an error message will
displays. The disc can be removed. and hold to advance playback display.
If the disc is not removed, after quickly within a track. Sound will be Care of CDs
several seconds, the disc heard at a reduced volume. Release
automatically pulls back into the to resume playing the track. The If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
player. elapsed time of the track displays. can be reduced due to CD-R or
CD-RW quality, the method of
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on RDM (Random): CD tracks can be recording, the quality of the music
the CD that is currently playing. listened to in random, rather than that has been recorded, and the
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press sequential order with the random way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
© SEEK to go to the start of the setting. To use random, press the handled. Handle them carefully.
current track, if more than softkey under the RDM label until Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
10 seconds on the track have Random Current Disc displays. original cases or other protective
Press the softkey again to turn off cases and away from direct sunlight
random play.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
and dust. The CD player scans the The use of CD lens cleaners for Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
bottom surface of the disc. If the CDs is not advised. CD-RW Disc
surface of a CD is damaged, such
The radio has the capability of
as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD does not play properly or not
{ Caution playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
at all. Do not touch the bottom side CD-RW disc. For more information
If a label is added to a CD, more
of a CD while handling it; this could on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R
than one CD is inserted into the
damage the surface. Pick up CDs or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio
slot at a time, or an attempt is with Touchscreen) on page 7-29 or
by grasping the outer edges or the made to play scratched or
edge of the hole and the outer edge. MP3 (Radio without Touchscreen)
damaged CDs, the CD player on page 7-24.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take could be damaged. While using
a soft, lint-free cloth or dampen a the CD player, use only CDs in CD Messages
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral good condition without any label, Check Disc: Radios with a single
detergent solution mixed with water, load one CD at a time, and keep CD player display Check Disc and/
and clean it. Make sure the wiping the CD player and the loading slot or eject the CD if an error occurs.
process starts from the center to free of foreign materials, liquids,
the edge. Optical Error: The disc was
and debris.
inserted upside down.
Care of the CD Player
Disk Read Error: A disc was
Do not add any label to a CD; it If an error displays, see “CD inserted with an invalid or unknown
could get caught in the CD player. Messages” later in this section. format.
If a CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is Player Error: There are disc LOAD
needed, try labeling the top of the or disc EJECT problems.
recorded CD with a marking pen. . It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal,
the CD should play.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. The road is very rough. When With the vehicle on, insert a disc To avoid damage to the CD player:
the road becomes smoother, the into the slot, label side up. The
CD should play.
. Do not use scratched or
player pulls it in and begins playing. damaged discs.
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, The system is capable of playing:
or upside down.
. Do not apply labels to discs. The
. Most audio CDs labels could get caught in the
. The air is very humid. If so, wait player.
about an hour and try again.
. CD-R
. CD-RW
. Insert only one disc at a time.
. There was a problem while
burning the CD. . MP3 or unprotected WMA
. Keep the loading slot free of
formats foreign materials, liquids, and
. The label is caught in the CD debris.
player. When playing any compatible
recordable disc, the sound quality
. Use a marking pen to label the
If the CD is not playing correctly for top of the disc.
any other reason, try a known can be reduced due to disc quality,
good CD. the method of recording, the quality Loading and Ejecting Discs
of the music that has been
If any error occurs repeatedly or if recorded, or the way the disc has To load a disc:
an error cannot be corrected, been handled. 1. Turn the radio on.
contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it There can be increased skipping, 2. Insert a disc into the slot, label
down and provide it to your dealer difficulty in recording tracks, side up. The player pulls it in the
when reporting the problem. difficulty in finding tracks, and/or rest of the way. If the disc is
difficulty in loading and ejecting. damaged or improperly loaded,
If these problems occur, check the there is an error and the disc
CD Player (Radio with disc for damage or try a known ejects.
Touchscreen) good disc.
The disc automatically plays once
The player can be used for CD and loaded.
MP3 audio.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Press Z to eject a disc from the Use the following controls to play Error Messages
CD player. If the disc is not removed the disc:
If Disc Error displays and/or the disc
within a short period of time, it is © SEEK: comes out, it could be for one of the
automatically pulled back into the following reasons:
player.
. Press to seek to the beginning of
the current or previous track. . The disc has an invalid or
Playing an Audio CD If the track has been playing for unknown format.
less than eight seconds, it seeks .
Make sure a disc is inserted in the The disc is very hot. Try the disc
to the previous track. If longer
player. again when the temperature
than eight seconds, the current
1. Press the Disc screen button on returns to normal.
track starts from the beginning.
the Home Page or from the . The road is very rough. Try the
. Press and hold to fast reverse
SRCE/Source banner. disc again when the road is
through a track. Release the
2. Press the Menu screen button smoother.
button to return to playing
on the CD Audio screen to speed. Elapsed time displays. . The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
display a list of Tracks/Songs. or upside down.
SEEK ¨:
3. Press the desired track/song. . The air is very humid. Try the
. Press to seek to the next track. disc again later.
On the Disc main page a track
number displays at the beginning of
. Press and hold to fast forward . There was a problem while
each track. Song, Artist, Elapsed through a track. Release the burning the disc.
Time, and Album information button to return to playing
speed. Elapsed time displays.
. The label is caught in the player.
displays when available.
PUSH/SEL (Select): Turn to the If the CD is not playing correctly, for
right or left to select the next or any other reason, try a known
previous track. good CD.
If any error continues, contact your
dealer.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file
MP3 (Radio without plays both file formats in the order in
extension.
which they were recorded to
Touchscreen) the disc. . AAC files stored on an iPod.
Format CD-R or CD-RW Supported File . FAT16
Radios that have the capability of and Folder Structure . FAT32
playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma The radio supports:
files that were recorded onto a Root Directory
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can
. Up to 50 folders.
The root directory of the disc is
be recorded with the following fixed . Up to eight folders in depth. treated as a folder. If the root
bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, directory has compressed audio
. Up to 15 playlists.
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, files, the directory displays on the
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, . Up to 512 files and folders. radio as the CD label.
192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
320 kbps or a variable bit rate. If a disc contains both
extension. uncompressed CD audio and MP3/
Radios that have a USB port can . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda WMA files, a folder under the root
play .mp3 and .wma files stored on a file extension. directory called CD accesses all of
USB storage device as well as AAC the CD audio tracks on the disc.
files that are stored on an iPod. USB Supported File and Folder
Structure Empty Folder
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
Discs The radio supports: Folders that do not contain files are
skipped, and the player advances to
The radio can play discs that . Up to 700 folders.
the next folder that contains files.
contain both uncompressed CD . Up to eight folders in depth.
audio and MP3/WMA files. If both Order of Play
formats are on the disc, the radio
. Up to 65,535 files.
Compressed audio files are
. Folder and file names up to accessed in the following order:
64 bytes. . Playlists (Px).

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Files stored in the root directory. File System and Naming Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
. Files stored in folders in the root The song name that displays is the f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA
directory. song name contained in the ID3 tag. files.
Tracks are played in the following If the song name is not present in
the ID3 tag, the radio displays the
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
order: the current track, if more than
file name without the extension
. Play begins from the first track in 10 seconds on the track have
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
the first playlist and continues played, otherwise goes to the
sequentially through all tracks in Track names longer than 32 previous track. Press and hold or
each playlist. When the last characters or four pages are press multiple times to continue
track of the last playlist has shortened. Parts of words on the moving backward through tracks.
played, play continues from the last page of text and the extension
of the filename do not display.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
first track of the first playlist. track. Press and hold or press
. Play begins from the first track in Preprogrammed Playlists multiple times to continue moving
the first folder and continues forward through tracks.
Preprogrammed playlists that were
sequentially through all tracks in created using WinAmp®, s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
each folder. When the last track MusicMatch®, or RealPlayer® to reverse playback quickly. Sound
of the last folder has played, software can be accessed; however, is heard at a reduced volume and
play continues from the first they cannot be edited using the the elapsed time of the file displays.
track of the first folder. radio. These playlists are treated as Release s REV to resume playing.
When play enters a new folder, the special folders containing
display does not automatically show compressed audio song files. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
the new folder name unless the and hold to advance playback
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
folder mode has been chosen as file extension and are stored on a
the default display. The new track volume and the elapsed time of the
USB device may be supported by
name displays. file displays. Release \ FWD to
the radio with a USB port.
resume playing. The elapsed time of
the file displays.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
S c (Previous Folder): Press When the scan is finished, the disc The album name displays on the
begins playing files in order by second line between the arrows and
the softkey below S c to go to the
artist. The current artist playing is songs from the current album
first track in the previous folder.
shown on the second line of the begins to play. Once all songs from
c T (Next Folder): Press the display. Once all songs by that artist that album have played, the player
softkey below c T to go to the first are played, the player moves to the moves to the next album in
track in the next folder. next artist in alphabetical order and alphabetical order on the CD and
begins playing files by that artist. begins playing MP3 files from that
RDM (Random): Files on the disc album.
can be listened to in random, rather To listen to files by another artist,
than sequential order. To use press the softkey below either arrow To exit music navigator mode, press
random, press the softkey under the tab. The disc goes to the next or the softkey below the Back tab to
RDM tab until Random Current Disc previous artist in alphabetical order. return to normal MP3 playback.
displays to play songs in random Continue pressing either softkey
below the arrow tab until the artist Connecting a USB Storage
order. Press the same softkey again
displays. Device or iPod®
to turn off random play.
To change from playback by artist to To connect a USB storage device,
h (Music Navigator): Press the connect the device to the USB port
playback by album:
softkey below h to play files in on the center stack.
order by artist or album. 1. Press the softkey below the
Sort tab. The USB port can be used to
The player scans the disc to sort the control an iPod or a USB storage
files by artist and album ID3 tag 2. Press the softkeys below the By device.
information. It can take several Album tab.
minutes to scan the disc depending To connect an iPod, connect one
3. Press the softkey below the end of the USB cable that came
on the number of files on the disc. Back tab to return to the main
The radio may begin playing while it with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
music navigator screen. connector and connect the other
is scanning in the background.
end to the USB port located in the
instrument panel storage area. If the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
vehicle is on and the USB Using the Radio to Control a \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
connection works, “OK to USB Storage Device or iPod and hold to advance playback
disconnect” and a GM logo may quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
appear on the iPod, and iPod The radio can control a USB
storage device or an iPod using the volume. Release \ FWD to
appears on the radio's display. The
radio buttons and knobs and display resume playing. The elapsed time of
iPod music appears on the radio’s
song information on the radio’s the file displays.
display and begins playing.
display. 4 (Information): Press to display
The iPod charges while it is
connected to the vehicle if the f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the
selected track.
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY © SEEK: Press to go to the start of
or ON/RUN position. When the the current track, if more than Using Softkeys to Control a
vehicle is turned off, the iPod 10 seconds on the track have USB Storage Device or iPod
automatically powers off and will not played, otherwise goes to the
charge or draw power from the previous track. Press and hold or The five softkeys below the radio
vehicle's battery. press multiple times to continue display are used to control the
moving backward through tracks. functions listed below.
If you have an older iPod model that
is not supported, it can still be used ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next To use the softkeys:
by connecting it to the auxiliary track. Press and hold or press 1. Press the first or fifth softkey
input jack using a standard 3.5 mm multiple times to continue moving below the radio display to
(1/8 in) stereo cable. See Clock forward through tracks. display the functions listed
(Radio without Touchscreen) on below, or press the softkey
page 5-7 or Clock (Radio with
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly. Sound below the function if it is
Touchscreen) on page 5-8. currently displayed.
is heard at a reduced volume.
Release s REV to resume playing. 2. Press the softkey below the tab
The elapsed time of the file with the function on it to use that
displays. function.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Genres
j (Pause): Press the softkey 5. Press f to select the file to be
below j to pause the track. The tab played. . Songs
appears raised when pause is being To skip through large lists, the five . Composers
used. Press the softkey below j softkeys can be used to navigate in To select files:
again to resume playback. the following order:
Back: Press the softkey below the . First softkey, first item in the list.
1. Press the softkey below h.
Back tab to go back to the main . Second softkey, 1% through the 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
display screen on an iPod, or the list each time the softkey is of menus.
root directory on a USB storage pressed.
device. 3. Press f to select the menu.
. Third softkey, 5% through the list
c (Folder View): Press the each time the softkey is pressed. 4. Turn f to scroll through the
softkey below c to view the folders or files in the
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
contents of the current folder on the selected menu.
list each time the softkey is
USB drive. To browse and select
files:
pressed. 5. Press f to select the file to be
. Fifth softkey, end of the list. played.
1. Press the softkey below c.
h (Music Navigator): Press the To skip through large lists, the five
2. Turn f to scroll through the list softkey below h to view and softkeys can be used to navigate in
of folders. the following order:
select a file on an iPod, using the
iPod's menu system. Files are . First softkey, first item in the list.
3. Press f to select the folder.
sorted by: . Second softkey, 1% through the
If there is more than one folder,
repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the . Playlists list each time the softkey is
folder is reached. pressed.
. Artists
4. Turn f to scroll through the files
. Third softkey, 5% through the list
. Albums
each time the softkey is pressed.
in the selected folder.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
list each time the softkey is
Shuffle Functionality MP3 (Radio with
pressed. To use Shuffle: Touchscreen)
. Fifth softkey, end of the list. Press the softkey below >, 2, Playing an MP3 CD
C , or = to select between To play an MP3 CD, follow the same
Repeat Functionality Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, instructions as “Playing an
To use Repeat:
or Shuffle Folder. Audio CD.”
Press the softkey below " or ' The following guidelines must be
to select between Repeat All and > (Shuffle Off): This is the
met when creating an MP3 disc,
Repeat Track. default mode when a USB storage
device or iPod is first connected. otherwise the CD might not play:
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey . Sampling rate: 16 kHz,
below " to repeat all tracks. The
2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
Songs): Shuffles all songs on the
tab appears lowered when Repeat USB storage device or iPod. 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
All is being used. This is the default . Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,
mode when a USB storage device C (Shuffle Album): Shuffles all
32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,
or iPod is first connected. songs in the current album on
an iPod. 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
' (Repeat Track): Press the and 320 kbps.
softkey below ' to repeat one = (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all . Maximum number of folders:
songs in the current folder on a USB
track. The tab appears raised when eight folders with 255 files per
storage device.
Repeat Track is being used. folder.
. Maximum of 1,000 files on
a disc.
. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW
with a maximum capacity of
700 MB.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/ by the artist. There might be a delay
Genre information requires a CD before the list displays. Select a
to be fully scanned before the song from the list to begin playback.
music navigator works with
these menus. Genres: Press to view the genres.
Select a genre to view a list of all
MP3 Audio songs of that genre. Select a song
from the list to begin playback.
Albums: Press to view the albums
Press any of the following buttons on the disc. Select the album to
on the MP3 Audio Menu: view a list of all songs on the album.
There might be a delay before the
Folders: Press to view the folders list displays. Select a song from the
stored on the disc. Select a folder to list to begin playback.
view the list of all songs in that
folder. There might be a delay Composers: Press to view the
before the list displays. Select a Composers stored on the disc.
Press the Menu screen button while song from the list to begin playback. There might be a delay before the
that source is active to access the list displays. The Composers menu
MP3 Audio Menu. Playlists: Press to view the displays. Select a composer to
playlists stored on the disc. Select a display a list of albums from the
playlist to view the list of all songs in composer.
that playlist. There might be a delay
before the list displays. Select a Tracks (Song Titles): Press to
song from the list to begin playback. display a list of all songs on the
disc. Songs are displayed as stored
Artists: Press to view the list of on the disc. There might be a delay
artists stored on the disc. Select an before the list displays. To begin
artist name to view a list of all songs playback, select a song from the list.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Root Directory present in the ID3 tag, the radio Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
The root directory is treated as a displays the file name as the Auxiliary Input Jack
folder. All files contained directly track name.
This is not an audio output; do not
under the root directory are Preprogrammed Playlists plug a headphone set into the front
accessed prior to any root directory auxiliary input jack. Connect an
folders. The radio recognizes
preprogrammed playlists; however, auxiliary input device such as an
Empty Folders there is no editing capability. These iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,
playlists are treated as special CD player, or cassette tape player
If a root directory or folder is empty to the auxiliary input jack for use as
or contains only folders, the player folders containing compressed
audio song files. another source for audio listening.
advances to the next folder in the
file structure that contains a Drivers are encouraged to set up
compressed audio file. The empty Auxiliary Devices any auxiliary device while the
folder(s) are not displayed or vehicle is in P (Park). See
The vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Defensive Driving on page 9-3 for
numbered. auxiliary input jack on the faceplate more information on driver
No Folder and a USB port in the center stack. distraction.
When the CD only contains If equipped, there are two USB To use an auxiliary input device,
compressed audio files without any ports on the rear of the center connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
folders or playlists, all files are console that can be used for the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
under the root folder. charging only. They can charge
devices that draw 2.1 amps or less. Press SRCE to select the device.
File System and Naming See the device’s owner manual for
Using the USB Port
The song titles, artists, albums, and the specification.
genres are taken from the file's ID3 The USB port can control a USB
tag and are only displayed if present storage device or an iPod using the
in the tag. If a song title is not radio buttons and knobs.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
USB Supported Devices Rear Seat The RSA functions operate even
. USB Flash Drives when the main radio is off. The front
Infotainment audio system displays X when the
. Portable USB Hard Drives RSA is on, and disappears from the
. Fifth generation or later iPod Rear Seat Audio (RSA) display when it is off.
. ®
iPod classic (6th generation) System Audio can be heard through wired
. ®
iPod nano (3G, 4G, 5G, If equipped with RSA, rear seat headphones (not included) plugged
and 6G) passengers can listen to and control into the jacks on the RSA. If the
any of the music sources: radio, vehicle has this feature, audio can
. iPod touch® (1G, 2G, 3G, also be heard on Channel 2 of the
CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary
and 4G) wireless headphones.
sources. The rear seat passengers
. iPhone® (2G, 3G, 3GS, 4, and 5) can only control the music sources The audio system mutes the rear
. iPad® (1G, 2G) the front seat passengers are not speakers when the RSA audio is
listening to (except on some radios active through the headphones.
Not all iPods and USB drives are where dual control is allowed). For
compatible with the USB port. example, rear seat passengers can To listen to an iPod or portable
control a CD and listen to it through audio device through the RSA,
Make sure the iPod has the latest attach the iPod or portable audio
firmware from Apple® for proper the headphones, while the driver
listens to the radio through the front device to the front auxiliary input (if
operation. iPod firmware can be available), located on the front audio
updated using the latest iTunes® speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each system. Turn the iPod on, then
application. See www.apple.com/ choose the front auxiliary input with
itunes. set of headphones.
the RSA SRCE button.
For help identifying your iPod, go to To turn the RSA off from the front,
www.apple.com/support. press and hold the radio power
button for more than two seconds.
Press the power button on the RSA
to turn it back on.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Press and hold © or ¨ until the PROG (Program): Press to go to

display flashes to tune to an the next preset radio station or
individual station. The display stops channel set on the main radio. This
flashing after the buttons have not function is inactive, with some
been pressed for more than radios, if the front seat passengers
two seconds. This function is are listening to the radio.
inactive, with some radios, if the When a CD or DVD audio disc is
front seat passengers are listening playing, press PROG to go to the
to the radio. beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some
P (Power): Press to turn the RSA While listening to a disc, press ¨ to
radios, if the front seat passengers
on or off. go to the next track or chapter on are listening to the disc.
Volume: Turn to increase or to the disc. Press © to go back to the
When a disc is playing in the CD or
decrease the volume of the wired start of the current track or chapter
DVD changer, press PROG to
headphones. The left knob controls (if more than 10 seconds have
select the next disc if multiple discs
the left headphones and the right played). This function is inactive,
are loaded. This function is inactive,
knob controls the right headphones. with some radios, if the front seat
with some radios, if the front seat
SRCE (Source): Press to select passengers are listening to the disc.
passengers are listening to the disc.
between the radio, CD, and if the When a DVD video menu is being
When a DVD video menu is being
vehicle has these features, DVD, displayed, press © or ¨ to perform a displayed, press PROG to perform
front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. cursor up or down on the menu. the ENTER menu function.
© or ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the Hold © or ¨ to perform a cursor left
previous or to the next station and or right on the menu.
stay there. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the
radio.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Phone The system may not work with
receive phone calls. The system
can be used while the key is in the
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
Bluetooth this section. position. The range of the Bluetooth
For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use Not all phones support all functions,
interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the and not all phones work with the
allowing: address book or contact list. See in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
. Placement and receipt of calls in information on compatible phones.
a hands-free mode. section.
. Sharing of the cell phone’s
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone Voice Recognition
address book or contact list with Numbers” in this section.
The Bluetooth system uses voice
the vehicle. recognition to interpret voice
To minimize driver distraction,
{ Warning commands to dial phone numbers
before driving, and with the vehicle and name tags.
When using a cell phone, it can
parked: be distracting to look too long or For additional information, say
. Become familiar with the too often at the screen of the “Help” while you are in a voice
features of the cell phone. phone or the infotainment system. recognition menu.
Organize the phone book and Taking your eyes off the road too Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
contact lists clearly and delete long or too often could cause a a minimum. The system may not
duplicate or rarely used entries. crash resulting in injury or death. recognize voice commands if there
If possible, program speed dial Focus your attention on driving. is too much background noise.
or other shortcuts.
. Review the controls and A Bluetooth system can use a
operation of the infotainment Bluetooth-capable cell phone with a
system. Hands-Free Profile to make and

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
When to Speak: A short tone Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information

sounds after the system responds . A Bluetooth phone with MP3
Use the buttons located on the
indicating when it is waiting for a capability cannot be paired to
steering wheel to operate the
voice command. Wait until the tone the vehicle as a phone and an
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
and then speak. MP3 player at the same time.
Steering Wheel Controls (Radio with
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a Touchscreen) on page 5-3 or . Up to five cell phones can be
calm and natural voice. Steering Wheel Controls (Radio paired to the Bluetooth system.
without Touchscreen) on page 5-2.
Audio System . The pairing process is disabled
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth
b / g (Press To Talk): Press to when the vehicle is moving.
answer incoming calls, confirm
system, sound comes through the system information, and start
. Pairing only needs to be
vehicle's front audio system speech recognition. completed once, unless the
speakers and overrides the audio pairing information on the cell
system. Use the audio system c / x (End): Press to end a call, phone changes or the cell phone
volume knob, during a call, to reject a call, or cancel an operation. is deleted from the system.
change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
Pairing . Only one paired cell phone can
memory for later calls. To prevent A Bluetooth enabled cell phone be connected to the Bluetooth
missed calls, a minimum volume must be paired to the Bluetooth system at a time.
level is used if the volume is turned system and then connected to the . If multiple paired cell phones are
down too low. vehicle before it can be used. See within range of the system, the
the cell phone manufacturer's user system connects to the first
guide for Bluetooth functions before available paired cell phone in the
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth order that they were first paired
phone is not connected, calls will be to the system. To connect to a
made using OnStar Hands-Free different paired phone, see
Calling, if equipped. See “OnStar” if “Connecting to a Different
equipped. Phone” later in this section.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Pairing a Phone with “<phone name> has been 4. Say the name of the phone you
successfully paired” after the want to delete.
1. Press b / g. pairing process is complete.
Connecting to a Different Phone
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command 6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pair
can be skipped. additional phones. To connect to a different cell phone,
the Bluetooth system looks for the
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds Listing All Paired and Connected next available cell phone in the
with instructions and a four-digit Phones order in which all the available cell
Personal Identification Number phones were paired. Depending on
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. The system can list all cell phones
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is which cell phone you want to
4. Start the pairing process on the also connected to the vehicle, the connect to, you may have to use
cell phone that you want to pair. system responds with “is connected” this command several times.
For help with this process, see after that phone name.
the cell phone manufacturer's 1. Press b / g.
user guide. 1. Press b / g. 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
5. Locate the device named “Your 2. Say “Bluetooth.” 3. Say “Change phone.”
Vehicle” in the list on the cell
phone. Follow the instructions 3. Say “List.” . If another cell phone is
on the cell phone to enter the found, the response will be
Deleting a Paired Phone “<Phone name> is now
PIN provided in Step 3. After the
If the phone name you want to connected.”
PIN is successfully entered, the
delete is unknown, see “Listing All
system prompts you to provide a . If another cell phone is not
Paired and Connected Phones.”
name for the paired cell phone. found, the original phone
This name will be used to 1. Press b / g. remains connected.
indicate which phones are
paired and connected to the 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
vehicle. The system responds 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
which phone to delete.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command followed by a tone. After the last
Numbers digit has been entered, say
1. Press b / g. “Store,” and then follow the
The system can store up to directions given by the system to
2. Say “Store.”
30 phone numbers as name tags in save a name tag for this number.
the Hands-Free Directory that is 3. Say the phone number or group
shared between the Bluetooth and of numbers you want to store all Using the “Delete” Command
OnStar systems, if equipped. at once with no pauses, then
follow the directions given by the 1. Press b / g.
The following commands are used
system to save a name tag for 2. Say “Delete.”
to delete and store phone numbers.
this number.
Store: This command will store a 3. Say the name tag you want to
phone number, or a group of Using the “Digit Store” Command delete.
numbers as a name tag. If an unwanted number is Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Digit Store: This command allows recognized by the system, say Command
a phone number to be stored as a “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number. This command deletes all stored
name tag by entering the digits one name tags in the Hands-Free
at a time. To hear all of the numbers Calling Directory and the OnStar
Delete: This command is used to recognized by the system, say Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,
delete individual name tags. “Verify” at any time. if equipped.
Delete All Name Tags: This 1. Press b / g. To delete all name tags:
command deletes all stored name 2. Say “Digit Store.” 1. Press b / g.
tags in the Hands-Free Calling
Directory and the OnStar 3. Say each digit, one at a time, 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory, that you want to store. After
if equipped. each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Listing Stored Numbers Using the “Dial” or “Call” If an unwanted number is

Command recognized by the system, say
The list command will list all stored
“Clear” at any time to clear the last
numbers and name tags. 1. Press b / g. number.
Using the “List” Command 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” To hear all of the numbers
1. Press b / g. 3. Say the entire number without recognized by the system, say
pausing, or say the name tag. “Verify” at any time.
2. Say “Directory.”
3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”
Once connected, the person called 1. Press b / g.
will be heard through the audio
speakers. 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
4. Say “List.”
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
Making a Call Calling 911 Emergency
that you want to dial. After each
Calls can be made using the 1. Press b / g. digit is entered, the system
following commands. repeats back the digit it heard
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” followed by a tone. After the last
Dial or Call: The dial or call digit has been entered,
3. Say “911.”
command can be used say “Dial.”
interchangeably to dial a phone 4. Say "Dial" or "Call.”
number or a stored name tag. Once connected, the person called
Using the “Digit Dial” Command will be heard through the audio
Digit Dial: This command allows a speakers.
The digit dial command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
phone number to be dialed by Using the “Re-dial” Command
entering the digits one at a time.
entering the digits one at a time.
Re-dial: This command is used to After each digit is entered, the 1. Press b / g.
dial the last number used on the cell system repeats back the digit it
phone. heard followed by a tone. 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Once connected, the person called . Press c / x to disconnect the Muting a Call
will be heard through the audio current call and switch to the call
During a call, all sounds from inside
speakers. on hold.
the vehicle can be muted so that the
Receiving a Call Three-Way Calling person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
When an incoming call is received, Three-way calling must be
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the cell phone and . To mute a call, press b / g , and
tone is heard in the vehicle. enabled by the wireless service then say “Mute call.”
carrier.
. Press b / g to answer the call. . To cancel mute, press b / g ,
1. While on a call, press b / g. and then say “Un-mute call.”
. Press c / x to ignore a call.
2. Say “Three-way call.” Transferring a Call
Call Waiting
3. Use the dial or call command to Audio can be transferred between
Call waiting must be supported on dial the number of the third party the Bluetooth system and the cell
the cell phone and enabled by the to be called. phone.
wireless service carrier.
4. Once the call is connected, The cell phone must be paired and
. Press b / g to answer an press b / g to link all callers connected with the Bluetooth
incoming call when another call together. system before a call can be
is active. The original call is transferred. The connection process
placed on hold. Ending a Call can take up to two minutes after the
Press c / x to end a call. ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
. Press b / g again to return to
the original call.
. To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Transferring Audio from the Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone (DTMF) Tones
Voice pass-thru allows access to the
During a call with the audio in the voice recognition commands on the The Bluetooth system can send
vehicle: cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored as
manufacturer's user guide to see if name tags during a call. You can
1. Press b / g. the cell phone supports this feature. use this feature when calling a
2. Say “Transfer Call.” To access contacts stored in the cell menu-driven phone system.
phone: Account numbers can also be
Transferring Audio to the
stored for use.
Bluetooth System from a Cell
Phone
1. Press b / g. Sending a Number or Name Tag
During a call with the audio on the 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command During a Call
can be skipped.
cell phone, press b / g. The audio 1. Press b / g. The system
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio 3. Say “Voice.” The system responds “Ready,” followed by
does not transfer to the vehicle, use responds “OK, accessing a tone.
the audio transfer feature on the cell <phone name>.”
2. Say “Dial.”
phone. See your cell phone The cell phone's normal prompt
manufacturer's user guide for more messages will go through their cycle 3. Say the number or name tag
information. according to the phone's operating to send.
instructions.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Clearing the System

. Rear Camera: Select Symbols
Settings and/or Guidelines to have them
Unless information is deleted out of Press Settings on the Home Page display on the rear camera
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it to adjust features and preferences, screen.
will be retained indefinitely. This such as Favorite Pages, Display,
includes all saved name tags in the
. Brightness: Select to adjust the
Time, and Date, etc. screen brightness.
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how 1. Press the Settings screen button Speed Compensated Volume:
to delete this information, see the on the Home Page. Select OFF, Low, Medium, or High
previous section “Deleting a Paired 2. Touch-tap the scroll bar until the sensitivity to automatically adjust
Phone” and the previous sections desired option displays. Select the volume to minimize the effects
on deleting name tags. the desired settings to change. of unwanted background noise that
can result from changing road
Other Information A few of the setting options change surfaces, driving speeds, or open
®
The Bluetooth word mark and the way the navigation system windows. This feature works best at
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® displays or reacts while in use. lower volume settings where
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks Favorite Pages: Press to select background noise is typically louder
by General Motors is under license. the number of favorite pages than the sound system volume.
Other trademarks and trade names displayed on the screen. The choice Audible Touch Feedback: Select
are those of their respective owners. is 1–6 pages. to adjust the volume of the beep
See Radio Frequency Statement on Display: Press to adjust the screen that is played after touching a
page 13-12. settings. screen button.
. Display Off: Select to turn the Notification Prompt Volume:
screen off. Touch the screen to Select to adjust the volume of the
turn the screen back on. notification prompts.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Set Time:
. Press OK to save the To access the rear camera display
adjustments. settings, press Display from the
change the Hours, Minutes, AM,
. Press the Back or Cancel screen Home screen, then press the Rear
PM, or 24 hour setting on the button to cancel the Camera screen button. The
clock. adjustments. following options are available:
. Press and hold to quickly XM Categories: Press to Symbols: Press to enable or
increase or decrease the time customize which available XM disable the Rear Park Assist (RPA)
settings. Categories are displayed and used symbols presented over the rear
in the system. camera video.
adjustments. Create “AS IS” Infotainment Guidelines: Press to enable or
File: This is used for dealer disable the RPA dynamic guidelines
. Press the Back or Cancel screen troubleshooting. presented over the rear camera
button to cancel the video.
adjustments. Open Source Software: Select to
view software website information. See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
Set Date: page 9-38.
. Press the up or down arrows to Rear Vision Camera (If
Equipped) Screen Brightness
increase or decrease the Month,
Day, and Year settings. The rear vision camera can assist To adjust the screen brightness,
the driver when backing up by touch the screen, then press + or −
. Press and hold to quickly on the brightness control.
increase or decrease the date displaying a view of the area behind
settings. the vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Trademarks and
License Agreements
Manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Copyright
Manufactured under license under 1992-2010 Dolby Laboratories. All
U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; rights reserved.
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
and the DTS logos and Symbol are
trademarks of DTS, Inc.©
1996-2010 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
2 NOTES

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Rear Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Rear Climate Control System
(with Rear Seat Audio) . . . . . 8-10
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
1. Fan Control 9 (Off): Turn the fan control all the

2. REAR (Rear Climate Control) way counterclockwise to turn the
front climate control system off.
3. Temperature Control
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
4. Recirculation or counterclockwise to increase or
5. Air Delivery Mode Control decrease the fan speed.
6. Air Conditioning
7. Rear Window Defogger

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
8-2 Climate Controls
Temperature Control: Turn automatically selects outside air. # (Air Conditioning): Press to
clockwise or counterclockwise to Recirculation cannot be selected turn the air conditioning system on
increase or decrease the while in floor mode. or off. An indicator light comes on
temperature of the air flowing from - (Defog): This clears the when A/C is on. The air conditioning
the system. windows of fog or moisture. Air is system does not operate when the
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn directed to the windshield, floor outside temperature is below 4°C
clockwise or counterclockwise to outlets, and side window vents. (40°F). The indicator light flashes
change the current airflow mode. When this mode is selected, the three times and turns off when
system turns off recirculation and outside conditions affect air
By positioning the right knob conditioning operation. This is
between two modes, a combination runs the air conditioning unless the
outside temperature is less than 4°C normal.
of those two modes is selected.
(40°F). Recirculation cannot be For quicker cool down on hot days:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the selected while in the defog mode.
instrument panel outlets. Do not drive the vehicle until all the 1. Open the windows to let hot air
windows are clear. escape.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and 0 (Defrost): This clears the 2. Select H mode.
floor outlets. Some air is directed windshield of fog or frost more
toward the windshield and side quickly. Air is directed to the 3. Select #.
window outlets. Cooler air is windshield and side window vents, 4. Select the coolest temperature.
directed to the upper outlets and with some to the floor vents. In this
warmer air to the floor outlets. 5. Select the highest fan speed.
mode, outside air is pulled inside
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the the vehicle. Recirculation cannot be 6. Close the windows after the hot
floor outlets, with some of the air selected while in the defrost mode. air has escaped.
directed to the windshield, side The air conditioning system runs 7. Once the vehicle's interior
window, and second row floor automatically in this setting, unless temperature is below the outside
outlets. In this mode, the system the outside temperature is less than
4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicle temperature, select @ mode
until all windows are clear. for faster cooling.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Using recirculation for long periods these modes, the indicator flashes turning off. The defogger will also
of time could cause the air inside three times and turns off. The air turn off when the engine is
the vehicle to become too dry. To conditioning also comes on when turned off.
prevent this from happening, after this mode is activated unless the Do not drive the vehicle until all
the inside of the vehicle has cooled, outside air temperature is less than windows are clear.
turn the recirculation mode off. 4°C (40°F). While in recirculation
mode the windows can fog when For vehicles with heated outside
The air conditioning system rearview mirrors, fog or frost is
removes moisture from the air, so the weather is cold and damp. To
clear the fog, select either the defog cleared from the surface of the
water might drip under the vehicle
while idling or after turning off the or defrost mode and increase the mirror when 1 is pressed.
engine. This is normal. fan speed.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn REAR (Rear Climate Control): { Caution

the recirculation mode on or off. An Press to turn the rear heating and
air conditioning on or off. See Rear Using a razor blade or sharp
indicator light comes on when
Climate Control System on page 8-9 object on the inside rear window
recirculation is on. When the engine
or Rear Climate Control System can damage the antenna or
is turned off, the recirculation mode
automatically turns off and must be (with Rear Seat Audio) on defogger. Repairs would not be
re-selected when the engine is page 8-10. covered by the vehicle warranty.
turned on again. Do not stick anything to the rear
Rear Window Defogger window.
This mode recirculates and helps to The rear window defogger uses a
quickly cool the air inside the warming grid to remove fog from the
vehicle. It can be used to reduce the rear window.
outside air and odors that may enter
the vehicle. 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
The recirculation mode cannot be defogger on or off. The rear window
used with floor, defrost, or defogging defogger stays on for about
modes. If recirculation is selected in 10 minutes, before automatically

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Dual Automatic Climate Control System function along with the inside
temperature setting. The outside
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with temperature is displayed on the
this system. instrument cluster.
( (On/Off): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to turn the climate
control system on or off.
The climate control system will also
turn on if the defrost, AUTO, or air
conditioning buttons are pressed.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): The system
automatically controls the inside
temperature, the air delivery, and
the fan speed.
To use automatic mode:
1. Driver and Passenger Side 7. Rear Window Defogger
Temperature Controls 1. Press the AUTO button.
8. Fan Control
2. Air Delivery Mode Controls When AUTO is selected, the
9. Recirculation current temperature(s) is
3. SYNC (Synchronized 10. A/C (Air Conditioning) displayed and the AUTO
Temperature) indicator light is on.
4. AUTO (Automatic Operation) Display Function
When AUTO is selected, the air
5. REAR (Rear Climate Control) Each time the temperature, mode,
conditioning and air inlet are
or fan controls are adjusted, the
6. Defrost automatically controlled. The air
climate control display shows that
conditioning runs when the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
outside temperature is over To avoid blowing cold air in cold Passenger Side Temperature
4°C (40°F). The system is weather, the system delays Control: Turn clockwise or
automatically set to outside air, turning on the fan until warm air counterclockwise to increase or
unless it is hot outside and then is available. Turn the fan knob to decrease the passenger side
the air inlet changes to override this delay and select temperature. The passenger side
recirculation mode to help the fan speed. display will show the temperature
quickly cool the vehicle. The setting.
recirculation indicator light will Temperature Control
SYNC (Synchronized
come on. The driver and passenger side Temperature): Press to set the
2. Set the temperature for the temperature controls are used to passenger temperature to match the
driver and passenger. adjust the temperature of the air driver temperature setting.
coming through the system. The
To find a comfortable setting, temperature can be adjusted even if Manual Operation
start with a 22°C (73°F) the system is turned off since
temperature setting and allow The air delivery mode or fan speed
outside air still enters the vehicle,
about 20 minutes for the system can be manually adjusted.
unless the recirculation mode is
to regulate. Use the driver side selected. See “Recirculation” later in 9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob
or passenger side temperature this section. clockwise or counterclockwise to
control to adjust the temperature increase or decrease the fan speed.
setting as necessary. The Driver Side Temperature
Control: Turn clockwise or Turning the fan control knob while in
system will remain at the
counterclockwise to increase or automatic control places the fan
selected setting. Choosing the
decrease the driver side speed under manual control.
warmest or coolest temperatures
does not cause the vehicle to temperature. The driver side The air delivery mode remains in
heat or cool more quickly. temperature display will show the automatic control. The fan setting
temperature setting. displays momentarily and then no
longer displays.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Air Delivery Modes: Press H, ), 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the Do not drive the vehicle until all the
6, or - to change the direction floor outlets, with some of the air windows are clear.
of the airflow in the vehicle. directed to the windshield, side Air Conditioning
An indicator light comes on window, and second row floor
in the selected mode button. outlets. In this mode, the system A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to
Pressing a mode button while the uses outside air. turn the air conditioning on and off.
system is off changes the air An indicator light comes on when
- (Defog): This mode clears the A/C is on.
delivery mode without turning the windows of fog or moisture. Air is
system on. Changing the air directed to the windshield, floor The A/C does not work when the
delivery mode while in automatic outlets, and side window vents. outside temperature is below 4°C
control places the system into When this mode is selected, the (40°F). If A/C is pressed the
manual control. The air delivery system turns off recirculation and indicator flashes three times and
mode button indicator displays, and runs the air conditioning compressor turns off to show that the A/C mode
the AUTO button indicator light unless the outside temperature is is not available. If the A/C is on and
turns off. less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive the outside temperature drops
H (Vent): Air is directed to the the vehicle until all the windows are below a temperature which is too
instrument panel outlets. clear. cool for air conditioning to be
effective, the A/C indicator turns off
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided 0 (Defrost): Press to turn the to show that the A/C mode has
between the instrument panel and defrost on or off. This mode quickly been canceled.
floor outlets. Some air is directed clears the windshield of fog or frost.
towards the windshield and side Air is directed to the windshield, On hot days, open the windows
window outlets. Cooler air is side window, and floor vents. In this briefly to let hot inside air escape.
directed to the upper outlets and mode, outside air is pulled inside This helps reduce the time it takes
warmer air to the floor outlets. the vehicle. The air conditioning for the interior of the vehicle to
system runs automatically in this cool down.
setting, unless the outside
temperature is less than 4°C (40°F).

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
The air conditioning system The recirculation mode cannot be R1 (Rear Window Defogger):
removes moisture from the air, so used with floor, defog, or defrosting Press to turn the rear window
water might drip under the vehicle modes. If recirculation is selected in defogger on or off. The rear window
while idling or after turning off the these modes, the indicator flashes defogger stays on for about
engine. This is normal. three times and turns off. While in 10 minutes, before turning off. The
@ (Recirculation): Press to recirculation mode the windows can defogger also turns off when the
alternate between recirculating air fog when the weather is cold and engine is turned off. Do not drive the
inside the vehicle or pulling in damp. To clear the fog, select either vehicle until all the windows are
outside air. An indicator light comes the defog or defrost mode and clear.
on when recirculation mode is increase the fan speed.
If equipped with heated outside
active. With each ignition cycle, the REAR: Press to turn the rear rearview mirrors, fog or frost is
recirculation mode is reset to heating and air conditioning on or cleared from the surface of the
automatic. When the engine is off. See Rear Climate Control mirror when the rear window defog
turned on, outside air or System on page 8-9 or Rear button is pressed.
recirculation is automatically Climate Control System (with Rear
selected for better performance. Seat Audio) on page 8-10.
When recirculation is activated, the
{ Caution
Rear Window Defogger
air conditioning compressor comes Using a razor blade or sharp
on and helps to quickly cool the air The rear window defogger uses a object on the inside rear window
inside the vehicle. This mode also warming grid to remove fog from the can damage the antenna or
helps to reduce the outside air and rear window.
defogger. Repairs would not be
odors that may enter the vehicle. covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not stick anything to the rear
window.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Sensors The interior temperature sensor, on The climate control system uses the
the instrument panel to the right of information from these sensors to
The solar sensor in the defrost grille
the steering column, measures the maintain comfort settings by
in the middle of the instrument
temperature of the air inside the adjusting the temperature, fan
panel, monitors the solar heat. Do
vehicle. speed, and air delivery mode. The
not cover the solar sensor or the
There is also an exterior system may also supply cooler air to
system will not work properly.
temperature sensor behind the front the side of the vehicle facing the
grille. This sensor reads the outside sun. The recirculation mode will also
air temperature and helps maintain be used as needed to maintain cool
the temperature inside the vehicle. outlet temperatures.
Any cover on the front of the vehicle
could cause a false reading in the
displayed temperature.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Rear Climate Control System Independent Mode: This mode

directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the rear
controls. It comes on when any rear
control is adjusted.
Fan Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob to ( to turn the fan off.
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the airflow
temperature.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
1. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front to the desired mode to change the
2. Temperature Control climate control system to control the airflow direction.
rear climate control system. The
3. Air Delivery Mode Control REAR text displays when the rear H (Vent): Air is directed through
system is on. the overhead outlets.
For vehicles with the rear climate
control system, the controls are Sync Mode: This mode matches ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed
located on the rear of the center the rear climate control to the front through the rear floor outlets, as
console. The system can also be climate control settings. It comes on well as the overhead outlets.
controlled with the front controls. when REAR is pressed. 6 (Floor): Air is directed through
the floor outlets. The rear system
floor outlets are located under the
third row seats.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Rear Climate Control System (with Rear Seat Audio) Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the rear
controls. It comes on when any rear
control is adjusted.
D and C (Fan Control): Press the
fan up or down buttons to increase
or decrease the fan speed.
Temperature Control: Press +
or − to increase or decrease
the air temperature. The
temperature settings will display in
0-12 increments, going from the
coolest (0) to the warmest (12)
setting.
1. Fan Control rear controls, except C , are
2. Air Delivery Mode Control pressed. The display is activated N (Air Delivery Mode Control):
when the rear system is on. Press to manually change the
3. Temperature Control direction of the airflow. Repeatedly
The system can also be turned off press the button until the desired
If equipped with the rear climate
control system, the controls are on by pressing C until the fan goes off. mode appears on the display.
the rear of the center console. Sync Mode: This mode matches H (Vent): Air is directed through
Press the REAR button on the front the rear climate control to the front the overhead outlets.
climate control system to control the climate control settings. It comes on
rear climate control system. The when REAR is pressed.
system also turns on if any of the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Use of non-GM approved hood
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed Air Vents deflectors can adversely affect
through the rear floor outlets, as
Use the slider switch in the center of the performance of the system.
well as the overhead outlets.
the outlet, to change the direction of . Keep the path under all seats
6 (Floor): Air is directed through the airflow. Use the thumbwheel clear of objects to help circulate
the floor outlets. The rear system near the outlet to control the amount the air inside the vehicle more
floor outlets are under the third row of airflow or to shut off the airflow. effectively.
seats.
Keep all outlets open whenever . If fogging reoccurs while in vent
possible for best system or bi-level modes with mild
performance. temperature throughout the
Operation Tips vehicle, turn on the air
conditioner to reduce windshield
. Clear away any ice, snow, fogging.
or leaves from the air inlets at
the base of the windshield that
can block the flow of air into the
vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air and inside air when in
recirculation mode.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
See Maintenance Schedule on 2. Twist the compartment 5. Squeeze the housing cover (1)
page 11-2. To find out what type of retainers (1) and pull outward to tabs to remove.
replacement filter to use, see remove.
Maintenance Replacement Parts on 6. Remove the old air filter from the
page 11-13. 3. Lower the instrument panel passenger compartment air filter
compartment assembly (2) housing (2).
1. Open the glove box. beyond the stops. 7. Install the new air filter.
4. If needed, unsnap the instrument 8. Replace the housing cover.
panel compartment assembly (2)
from the instrument panel. When 9. If removed, reinstall the
reinstalling, be sure the instrument panel compartment
instrument panel compartment assembly.
dampener arm is aligned 10. Reinstall the compartment
properly to the dampener gear retainers.
assembly.
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Retained Accessory
9-17 Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/Electronic
Operating Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-18
9-19
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Cruise Control

Parking over Things Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Driving Information
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Driver Assistance Systems
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Running the Vehicle While Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Side Blind Zone
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Transmission Rear Vision
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Lane Departure
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-6 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Drive Systems Fuel
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
California Fuel
Starting and Operating Brakes Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14 Antilock Brake Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-44
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Filling a Portable Fuel
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-28 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
9-2 Driving and Operating
Trailer Towing
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46 distractions.
Driving Characteristics and Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Conversions and Add-Ons activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
Add-On Electrical from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
governments have enacted laws driving.
regarding driver distraction. Become . Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
. Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Allow enough following distance
Control of a Vehicle
{ Warning between you and the driver in
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating
Taking your eyes off the road too are important factors in helping to
. Focus on the task of driving.
long or too often could cause a control a vehicle while driving.
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving. Drunk Driving Braking
Death and injury associated with
Braking action involves perception
Refer to the Infotainment section drinking and driving is a global
time and reaction time. Deciding to
and the infotainment manual for tragedy.
push the brake pedal is perception
more information on using that time. Actually doing it is
system, including pairing and using { Warning reaction time.
a cell phone.
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In
Defensive Driving that time, a vehicle moving at
perceptions, attentiveness, and
Defensive driving means “always judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
expect the unexpected.” The first a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
step in driving defensively is to wear can have a serious — or even distance in an emergency.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
page 3-13. drinking. include:
. Assume that other road users Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and you and the vehicle in front
a driver who has been drinking.
other drivers) are going to be of you.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking.
and be ready. who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
If the engine ever stops while the If the vehicle seems harder to steer
vehicle is being driven, brake than normal when parking or driving Caution (Continued)
normally but do not pump the slowly, there may be a problem with
brakes. Doing so could make the the system. You will still have power damage may occur to the power
pedal harder to push down. If the steering, but steering will be stiffer steering system and there may be
engine stops, there will be some than normal at slow speeds. See loss of power steering assist.
power brake assist but it will be your dealer for service.
used when the brake is applied. Curve Tips
Once the power assist is used up, it Hydraulic Power Steering
can take longer to stop and the This vehicle has hydraulic power
. Take curves at a reasonable
brake pedal will be harder to push. steering. It may require speed.
maintenance. See Power Steering . Reduce speed before entering a
Steering Fluid on page 10-19. curve.
Variable Effort Steering If power steering assist is lost . Maintain a reasonable, steady
because the engine stops, or there speed through the curve.
Some vehicles have a steering is a system malfunction, the vehicle
system that varies the amount of
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
can be steered but may require
effort required to steer the vehicle in the curve before accelerating
increased effort. See your dealer if
relation to the speed of the vehicle. gently into the straightaway.
there is a problem.
The amount of steering effort Steering in Emergencies
required is less at slower speeds to { Caution . There are some situations when
make the vehicle more steering around a problem may
maneuverable and easier to park. At If the steering wheel is turned
be more effective than braking.
faster speeds, the steering effort until it reaches the end of its
increases to provide a sport-like feel travel, and is held in that position . Holding both sides of the
to the steering. This provides for more than 15 seconds, steering wheel allows you to turn
maximum control and stability. 180 degrees without removing
(Continued)
a hand.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Antilock Brake System (ABS) 2. Turn the steering wheel about Defensive drivers avoid most skids
allows steering while braking. one-eighth of a turn, until the by taking reasonable care suited to
right front tire contacts the existing conditions, and by not
Off-Road Recovery pavement edge. overdriving those conditions. But
3. Turn the steering wheel to go skids are always possible.
straight down the roadway. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions:
Loss of Control . Ease your foot off the
Skidding accelerator pedal and steer the
way you want the vehicle to go.
There are three types of skids that The vehicle may straighten out.
correspond to the vehicle's three Be ready for a second skid if it
control systems: occurs.
. Braking Skid — wheels are not . Slow down and adjust your
rolling. driving according to weather
. Steering or Cornering Skid — conditions. Stopping distance
The vehicle's right wheels can drop too much speed or steering in a can be longer and vehicle
off the edge of a road onto the curve causes tires to slip and control can be affected when
shoulder while driving. Follow lose cornering force. traction is reduced by water,
these tips: snow, ice, gravel, or other
. Acceleration Skid — too much material on the road. Learn to
1. Ease off the accelerator and throttle causes the driving recognize warning clues — such
then, if there is nothing in the wheels to spin. as enough water, ice, or packed
way, steer the vehicle so that it snow on the road to make a
straddles the edge of the mirrored surface — and slow
pavement. down when you have any doubt.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Try to avoid sudden steering, There is no hard and fast rule about
acceleration, or braking, Warning (Continued) hydroplaning. The best advice is to
including reducing vehicle speed slow down when the road is wet.
by shifting to a lower gear. Any After driving through a large
sudden changes could cause puddle of water or a car/vehicle Other Rainy Weather Tips
the tires to slide. wash, lightly apply the brake Besides slowing down, other wet
Remember: Antilock brakes help pedal until the brakes work weather driving tips include:
avoid only the braking skid. normally.
. Allow extra following distance.
Flowing or rushing water creates
Driving on Wet Roads strong forces. Driving through
. Pass with caution.
flowing water could cause the . Keep windshield wiping
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle to be carried away. If this equipment in good shape.
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle . Keep the windshield washer fluid
Always drive slower in these types occupants could drown. Do not reservoir filled.
of driving conditions and avoid ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
. Have good tires with proper
driving through large puddles and tread depth. See Tires on
deep‐standing or flowing water. through flowing water.
page 10-35.
{ Warning Hydroplaning
. Turn off cruise control.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water Hill and Mountain Roads
They might not work as well in a can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the Driving on steep hills or through
quick stop and could cause mountains is different than driving
pulling to one side. You could water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
lose control of the vehicle. driving in these conditions include:
enough. When the vehicle is
(Continued) hydroplaning, it has little or no . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
contact with the road. good shape.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Check all fluid levels and brakes, Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
tires, cooling system, and Warning (Continued) (32°F) when freezing rain begins to
transmission. fall, resulting in even less traction.
loss of steering. Always have the Avoid driving on wet ice or in
. Shift to a lower gear when going
engine running and the vehicle freezing rain until roads can be
down steep or long hills.
in gear. treated with salt or sand.
{ Warning . Stay in your own lane. Do not
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
Using the brakes to slow the swing wide or cut across the traction is not lost. Accelerating too
vehicle on a long downhill slope center of the road. Drive at quickly causes the wheels to spin
can cause brake overheating, can speeds that let you stay in your and makes the surface under the
reduce brake performance, and own lane. tires slick, so there is even less
could result in a loss of braking. . Be alert on top of hills; traction.
Shift the transmission to a lower something could be in your lane Traction Control should be turned
gear to let the engine assist the (stalled car, accident). on. See Traction Control/Electronic
brakes on a steep downhill slope. . Pay attention to special road Stability Control on page 9-28.
signs (falling rocks area, winding The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
roads, long grades, passing or improves vehicle stability during
{ Warning no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
hard stops on slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) on dry pavement. See Antilock
or with the ignition off is Winter Driving Brake System (ABS) on page 9-26.
dangerous. This can cause Allow greater following distance on
overheating of the brakes and
Driving on Snow or Ice
any slippery road and watch for
(Continued) Drive carefully when there is snow slippery spots. Icy patches can
or ice between the tires and the occur on otherwise clear roads in
road, creating less traction or grip. shaded areas. The surface of a

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
curve or an overpass can remain icy

when the surrounding roads are { Warning Warning (Continued)
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on
on ice. under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument
cause exhaust gases to get panel.
Turn off cruise control on slippery inside. Engine exhaust contains
surfaces.
. Adjust the climate control
carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that
Blizzard Conditions cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the
cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed
Being stuck in snow can be a death. to the highest setting. See
serious situation. Stay with the
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: “Climate Control Systems”.
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use Roadside . Clear away snow from around For more information about
Assistance. See Roadside the base of your vehicle, carbon monoxide, see Engine
Assistance Program on page 13-5. especially any that is blocking Exhaust on page 9-21.
To get help and keep everyone in the exhaust pipe.
the vehicle safe:
. Check again from time to To save fuel, run the engine for only
. Turn on the hazard warning time to be sure snow does short periods as needed to warm
flashers. not collect there. the vehicle and then shut the engine
. Tie a red cloth to an outside off and close the window most of
. Open a window about 5 cm the way to save heat. Repeat this
mirror. (2 in) on the side of the until help arrives but only when you
vehicle that is away from the feel really uncomfortable from the
wind to bring in fresh air. cold. Moving about to keep warm
(Continued) also helps.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
If it takes some time for help to Slowly spinning the wheels in the
arrive, now and then when you run Warning (Continued) forward and reverse directions
the engine, push the accelerator causes a rocking motion that could
pedal slightly so the engine runs vehicle can overheat, causing an free the vehicle. If that does not get
faster than the idle speed. This engine compartment fire or other the vehicle out after a few tries, it
keeps the battery charged to restart damage. Spin the wheels as little might need to be towed out. If the
the vehicle and to signal for help as possible and avoid going vehicle does need to be towed out,
with the headlamps. Do this as little above 56 km/h (35 mph). see Towing the Vehicle on
as possible to save fuel. page 10-70.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
If the Vehicle Is Stuck it Out Vehicle Load Limits
Slowly and cautiously spin the Turn the steering wheel left and It is very important to know how
wheels to free the vehicle when right to clear the area around the much weight your vehicle can
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. front wheels. Turn off any traction carry. This weight is called the
If stuck too severely for the traction system. Shift back and forth vehicle capacity weight and
system to free the vehicle, turn the between R (Reverse) and a low includes the weight of all
traction system off and use the forward gear, spinning the wheels occupants, cargo, and all
rocking method. See Traction as little as possible. To prevent nonfactory-installed options.
Control/Electronic Stability Control transmission wear, wait until the
Two labels on your vehicle show
on page 9-28. wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
{ Warning pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal Loading Information label and
If the vehicle's tires spin at high when the transmission is in gear. the Certification/Tire label.
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Tire and Loading Information The Tire and Loading

{ Warning Label Information label also shows the
Do not load the vehicle any size of the original equipment
heavier than the Gross tires (3) and the recommended
Vehicle Weight Rating cold tire inflation pressures (4).
(GVWR), or either the For more information on tires
maximum front or rear Gross and inflation see Tires on
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). page 10-35 and Tire Pressure
This can cause systems to on page 10-43.
break and change the way the There is also important loading
vehicle handles. This could information on the vehicle
cause loss of control and a Certification/Tire label. It tells
crash. Overloading can also you the Gross Vehicle Weight
shorten the life of the vehicle. Example Label Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
A vehicle-specific Tire and Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
Loading Information label is the front and rear axle. See
attached to the center pillar “Certification/Tire Label” later in
(B-pillar). The tire and loading this section.
information label shows the “Steps for Determining Correct
number of occupant seating Load Limit–
positions (1), and the maximum 1. Locate the statement "The
vehicle capacity weight (2) in combined weight of
kilograms and pounds. occupants and cargo should

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
never exceed XXX kg or 5. Determine the combined

XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s weight of luggage and cargo
placard. being loaded on the vehicle.
2. Determine the combined That weight may not safely
weight of the driver and exceed the available cargo
passengers that will be riding and luggage load capacity
in your vehicle. calculated in Step 4.
3. Subtract the combined 6. If your vehicle will be towing
weight of the driver and a trailer, load from your trailer
passengers from XXX kg or will be transferred to your
XXX lbs. vehicle. Consult this manual
to determine how this Example 1
4. The resulting figure equals reduces the available cargo
the available amount of cargo 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight
and luggage load capacity of
and luggage load capacity. for Example 1 = 453 kg
your vehicle.”
For example, if the "XXX" (1,000 lbs).
amount equals 1400 lbs. and See Trailer Towing on page 9-50 2. Subtract Occupant Weight
there will be five 150 lb for important information on @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
passengers in your vehicle, towing a trailer, towing safety 136 kg (300 lbs).
the amount of available cargo rules and trailering tips. 3. Available Occupant and
and luggage load capacity is Cargo Weight = 317 kg
650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) (700 lbs).
= 650 lbs.)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
seating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 2 Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight

for Example 2 = 453 kg for Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight 2. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = Label Example
340 kg (750 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs). A vehicle-specific Certification/
3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight = Tire label is attached to the
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). center pillar (B-pillar).
Refer to your vehicle's tire and The label shows the gross
loading information label for weight capacity of your vehicle.
specific information about your This is called the Gross Vehicle
vehicle's capacity weight and Weight Rating (GVWR).

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
The GVWR includes the weight If you put things inside your
of the vehicle, all occupants, { Warning vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
fuel, and cargo. Do not load the vehicle any packages, or anything else, they
The Certification/Tire label also heavier than the Gross will go as fast as the vehicle
tells you the maximum weights Vehicle Weight Rating goes. If you have to stop or turn
for the front and rear axles, (GVWR), or either the quickly, or if there is a crash,
called the Gross Axle Weight maximum front or rear Gross they will keep going.
Rating (GAWR). To find out the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
actual loads on your front and This can cause systems to { Warning
rear axles, you need to go to a break and change the way the Things you put inside the
weigh station and weigh your vehicle handles. This could vehicle can strike and injure
vehicle. Your dealer can help cause loss of control and a people in a sudden stop or
you with this. Be sure to spread crash. Overloading can also turn, or in a crash.
out your load equally on both shorten the life of the vehicle.
sides of the centerline. . Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. Try to
Never exceed the GVWR for spread the weight evenly.
your vehicle or the GAWR for { Caution
either the front or rear axle. . Never stack heavier
Overloading the vehicle may things, like suitcases,
cause damage. Repairs would not inside the vehicle so that
be covered by the vehicle some of them are above
warranty. Do not overload the the tops of the seats.
vehicle.
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Warning (Continued) Starting and Caution (Continued)

Operating
. Do not leave an breaking-in guideline every
unsecured child restraint time you get new brake
New Vehicle Break-In linings.
in the vehicle.
Following break-in, engine speed
. When you carry something { Caution and load can be gradually
inside the vehicle, secure
The vehicle does not need an increased.
it whenever you can.
elaborate break-in. But it will
. Do not leave a seat folded perform better in the long run if
down unless you need to. Ignition Positions
you follow these guidelines:
. Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 805 km (500 mi).
Do not make full-throttle
starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
. Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 mi) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier The ignition switch has four different
replacement. Follow this positions.
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
In order to shift out of P (Park), the This position locks the ignition, 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ transmission, and the steering This can be done while the
ACCESSORY and the brake pedal wheel when the key Is removed vehicle is moving. After shifting
must be applied. from the ignition. The key can be to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
removed in LOCK/OFF. brakes and steer the vehicle to a
{ Caution The steering can bind with the safe location.
wheels turned off center. If this 3. Come to a complete stop, shift
Using a tool to force the key to happens, move the steering wheel to P (Park), and turn the ignition
turn in the ignition could cause from right to left while turning the to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
damage to the switch or break the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this an automatic transmission, the
key. Use the correct key, make does not work, then the vehicle shift lever must be in P (Park) to
sure it is all the way in, and turn it needs service. turn the ignition switch to the
only with your hand. If the key LOCK/OFF position.
Do not turn the engine off when the
cannot be turned by hand, see
vehicle is moving. This will cause a 4. Set the parking brake. See
your dealer. loss of power assist in the brake Parking Brake on page 9-27.
and steering systems and disable
( (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
the airbags. { Warning
If the vehicle must be shut off in an
stopped, turn the ignition switch to emergency: Turning off the vehicle while
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. moving may cause loss of power
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 1. Brake using a firm and steady assist in the brake and steering
will remain active. See Retained pressure. Do not pump the systems and disable the airbags.
Accessory Power (RAP) on brakes repeatedly. This may While driving, only shut the
page 9-18. deplete power assist, requiring
vehicle off in an emergency.
increased brake pedal force.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, battery could be drained. You may
and must be shut off while driving, not be able to start the vehicle if the { Caution
turn the ignition to ACC/ battery is allowed to drain for an
ACCESSORY. extended period of time. Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is / (START): This is the position could damage the transmission.
the position in which you can that starts the engine. When the Shift to P (Park) only when the
operate the electrical accessories or engine starts, release the key. The vehicle is stopped.
items plugged into the accessory ignition switch will return to ON/RUN
power outlets. This position unlocks for driving.
the ignition and steering wheel. Use
Key Lock Release
this position if the vehicle must be
pushed or towed.
{ Caution
The vehicle has an electronic key
R (ON/RUN): This position can be lock release system. This system is If you add electrical parts or
used to operate the electrical to prevent ignition key removal accessories, you could change
accessories and to display some unless the shift lever is in P (Park). the way the engine operates. Any
instrument panel warning and The key lock release will not work if resulting damage would not be
indicator lights. This position can the battery is charged less than covered by the vehicle warranty.
also be used for service and 9-volts, or uncharged. Try charging See Add-On Electrical Equipment
diagnostics, and to verify the proper or jump starting the battery. See on page 9-54.
operation of the malfunction Jump Starting on page 10-67
indicator lamp as may be required
for emission inspection purposes. Starting the Engine
The switch stays in this position
when the engine is running. The Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
transmission is also unlocked in this N (Neutral). The engine will not start
position. If you leave the key in the in any other position. To restart the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN engine when the vehicle is already
position with the engine off, the moving, use N (Neutral) only.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
down. When the engine starts,

{ Caution { Caution let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but
If the steering wheel is turned Cranking the engine for long then stops again, repeat these
until it reaches the end of its periods of time, by returning the steps. This clears the extra
travel, and is held in that position ignition to the START position gasoline from the engine. Do not
while starting the vehicle, damage immediately after cranking has race the engine immediately
may occur to the hydraulic power ended, can overheat and damage after starting it. Operate the
steering system and there may be the cranking motor, and drain the engine and transmission gently
loss of power steering assist. battery. Wait at least 15 seconds until the oil warms up and
between each try, to let the lubricates all moving parts.
Starting Procedure cranking motor cool down.
Engine Heater
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition to START. 2. If the engine does not start after The engine coolant heater can
When the engine starts, let go of five to 10 seconds, especially in provide easier starting and better
the key. The idle speed will slow very cold weather (below −18°C fuel economy during engine
down as the engine warms. Do or 0°F), it could be flooded with warm-up in cold weather conditions
not race the engine immediately too much gasoline. Try pushing at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
after starting it. Operate the the accelerator pedal all the way with an engine coolant heater
engine and transmission gently to the floor and holding it there should be plugged in at least four
to allow the oil to warm up and as you hold the key in START hours before starting. Some models
lubricate all moving parts. for up to a maximum of may have an internal thermostat in
15 seconds. Wait at least the cord which will prevent engine
15 seconds between each try, to coolant heater operation at
allow the cranking motor to cool temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
To Use the Engine Coolant

Warning (Continued)
Retained Accessory
Heater Power (RAP)
1. Turn off the engine. If the cord will not reach, use a These vehicle accessories can be
2. Open the hood and unwrap the heavy-duty three-prong extension used for up to 10 minutes after the
electrical cord. The bundled cord cord rated for at least 15 amps. ignition key is turned off:
is located on the driver side of . Audio System
the engine compartment, 4. Before starting the engine, be
between the engine air cleaner sure to unplug and store the
. Power Windows
and the windshield washer fluid cord as it was before to keep it . Sunroof (if equipped)
reservoir. See Engine away from moving engine parts.
Compartment Overview on If you do not, it could be Power to the windows and sunroof
page 10-5. damaged. will work up to 10 minutes or until a
door is opened.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, The length of time the heater should
grounded 110-volt AC outlet. remain plugged in depends on The radio continues to work for
several factors. Ask a dealer in the 10 minutes or until the driver door is
opened.
{ Warning area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this. For an additional 10 minutes of
Plugging the cord into an operation, close all the doors and
ungrounded outlet could cause an turn the key to ON/RUN and then
electrical shock. Also, the wrong back to LOCK/OFF.
kind of extension cord could All these features will work when the
overheat and cause a fire. You key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/
could be seriously injured. Plug ACCESSORY positions.
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Shifting Into Park Warning (Continued)

regular brake pedal down. Then,
see if you can move the shift lever
1. Hold the brake pedal down and away from P (Park) without first
set the parking brake. See It is dangerous to get out of the pushing the button.
Parking Brake on page 9-27 for vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
more information. in P (Park) with the parking brake If you can, it means that the shift
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. lever was not fully locked in
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) P (Park).
by holding in the button on the Do not leave the vehicle when the
shift lever and pushing the shift engine is running. If you have left Torque Lock
lever all the way toward the front the engine running, the vehicle Torque lock is when the weight of
of the vehicle. can move suddenly. You or others the vehicle puts too much force on
3. Turn the ignition key to could be injured. To be sure the the parking pawl in the
LOCK/OFF. vehicle will not move, even when transmission. This happens when
you are on fairly level ground, parking on a hill and shifting the
4. Remove the key and take it with
always set the parking brake and transmission into P (Park) is not
you. If you can leave the vehicle
move the shift lever to P (Park). done properly and then it is difficult
with the ignition key in your
See Shifting Into Park on to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
page 9-19. If you are towing a torque lock, set the parking brake
Leaving the Vehicle with the trailer, see Driving Characteristics and then shift into P (Park). To find
Engine Running and Towing Tips on page 9-47. out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
listed previously.
{ Warning If you have to leave the vehicle with If torque lock does occur, your
the engine running, be sure the vehicle may need to be pushed
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle is in P (Park) and the uphill by another vehicle to relieve
vehicle with the engine running. parking brake is firmly set before the parking pawl pressure, so you
It could overheat and catch fire. you leave it. After you have moved can shift out of P (Park).
(Continued) the shift lever into P (Park), hold the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Shifting out of Park To shift out of P (Park): Parking over Things

The vehicle is equipped with an 1. Place the ignition in ON/RUN. That Burn
electronic shift lock release system. 2. Apply the brake pedal.
The shift lock release is
designed to: 3. Press the shift lever button. { Warning
. Prevent ignition key removal 4. Move the shift lever to the Things that can burn could touch
desired position. hot exhaust parts under the
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park) with the shift lever If you still are unable to shift out of vehicle and ignite. Do not park
button fully released, and P (Park): over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
. Prevent movement of the shift 1. Fully release the shift lever
lever out of P (Park), unless the button.
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ 2. While holding down the brake
ACCESSORY and the regular pedal, press the shift lever
brake pedal is applied. button again.
The shift lock release is always 3. Move the shift lever to the
functional except in the case of an desired position.
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9-volt) battery. If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), see your dealer.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Engine Exhaust Warning (Continued)

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
{ Warning . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
It is better not to park with the
engine running.
Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not If the vehicle is left with the engine
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed. running, follow the proper steps to
can cause unconsciousness and be sure the vehicle will not move.
If unusual fumes are detected or
even death. See Shifting Into Park on page 9-19
if it is suspected that exhaust is and Engine Exhaust on page 9-21.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
If parking on a hill and pulling a
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows trailer, see Driving Characteristics
with poor ventilation (parking completely down. and Towing Tips on page 9-47.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Automatic then press the button on the back of

{ Warning the shift lever before shifting from
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
P (Park). If you cannot shift out of
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully lever, then push the shift lever all
in P (Park) with the parking brake the way into P (Park) as you
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. maintain brake application. Then
Do not leave the vehicle when the press the shift lever button and
engine is running. If you have left move the shift lever into another
the engine running, the vehicle gear. See Shifting out of Park on
can move suddenly. You or others page 9-20.
could be injured. To be sure the R (Reverse): Use this gear to
vehicle will not move, even when back up.
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and { Caution
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on Shifting to R (Reverse) while the
P (Park): This position locks the page 9-19 and Driving vehicle is moving forward could
front wheels. It is the best position Characteristics and Towing Tips damage the transmission. The
to use when starting the engine on page 9-47. repairs would not be covered by
because the vehicle cannot move the vehicle warranty. Shift to
easily. R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
is stopped.
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. With the ignition in ON/
RUN, fully apply the regular brake,

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
To rock the vehicle back and forth to

get out of snow, ice, or sand without { Caution { Caution
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-9. Shifting out of P (Park) or If the vehicle accelerates slowly,
N (Neutral) with the engine or does not shift gears, the
N (Neutral): In this position, the running at high speed may transmission could be damaged.
engine does not connect with the damage the transmission. The Have the vehicle serviced
wheels. To restart the engine when repairs would not be covered by right away.
the vehicle is already moving, use the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
engine is not running at high If the vehicle is stopped on a hill,
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
speed when shifting the vehicle. with your foot off the brake pedal,
being towed.
the vehicle may roll. This is normal
{ Warning D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
and is due to the torque converter
designed to improve fuel economy
Shifting into a drive gear while the fuel economy. If you need more and performance. Use the brake to
engine is running at high speed is power for passing, and you are: hold the vehicle on a hill. Do not use
dangerous. Unless your foot is the accelerator pedal.
. Going less than 56 km/h
firmly on the brake pedal, the (35 mph), push the accelerator L (Low): This position gives you
vehicle could move very rapidly. pedal about halfway down. access to gear ranges. This
You could lose control and hit provides more engine braking but
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or lower fuel economy than D (Drive).
people or objects. Do not shift
more, push the accelerator all You can use it on very steep hills,
into a drive gear while the engine the way down.
is running at high speed. or in deep snow or mud. See
Manual Mode on page 9-24.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Manual Mode To use this feature: shift into 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus)
1. Move the shift lever to L (Low). button is used or you shift back into
Electronic Range Select D (Drive).
(ERS) Mode 2. Press the plus/minus button on
the shift lever, to increase or While in L (Low), the transmission
ERS mode allows you to choose the decrease the gear range will prevent shifting to a lower gear
top-gear limit of the transmission available. range if the engine speed is too
and the vehicle's speed while high. You have a brief period of time
driving downhill or towing a trailer. When you shift from D (Drive) to to slow the vehicle. If vehicle speed
The vehicle has an electronic shift L (Low), the transmission will shift to is not reduced within the time
position indicator within the a pre-determined lower gear range. allowed, the lower gear range shift
instrument panel cluster. When The highest gear available for this will not be completed. You must
using the ERS mode a number will pre-determined range is displayed further slow the vehicle, then press
display next to the L, indicating the next to the L in the DIC. See Driver the − (Minus) button to the desired
current gear that has been selected. Information Center (DIC) (With DIC lower gear range.
Buttons) on page 5-25 or Driver
Information Center (DIC) (Without Automatic Engine Grade Braking is
DIC Buttons) on page 5-31. The not available when the ERS is
number displayed in the DIC is the active. It is available in D (Drive) for
highest gear that the transmission both normal and Tow/Haul mode.
will be allowed to operate in. This While using the ERS, cruise control
means that all gears below that and the Tow/Haul mode can be
number are available. For example, used. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
when 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the following.
L, 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears
are automatically shifted by the
vehicle. The transmission will not

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Tow/Haul Mode Automatic Engine Grade Drive Systems

Braking
_ (Tow/Haul): If equipped with
Tow/Haul mode, the button is on the Automatic Engine Grade Braking All-Wheel Drive
center stack under the climate assists when driving on a downhill
Vehicles with this feature transfer
controls. grade. It maintains vehicle speed by
engine power, as required, to all
automatically implementing a shift
Press the button to activate the four wheels. It is fully automatic, and
schedule that uses the engine and
system. Press it again to deactivate adjusts itself as needed for road
the transmission to slow the vehicle.
the system. This feature can assist conditions.
The system will automatically
when towing or hauling a When using a compact spare tire on
command downshifts to reduce
heavy load. an AWD vehicle, the system
vehicle speed, until the brake pedal
When Tow/Haul is activated, the is no longer being pressed. automatically detects the compact
Tow/Haul symbol will come on in the spare and reduces AWD
While in the Electronic Range
instrument cluster. See Driving performance to protect the system.
Select (ERS) mode, grade braking
Characteristics and Towing Tips on To restore full AWD operation and
is deactivated, allowing the driver to
page 9-47. prevent excessive wear on the
select a range and limiting the
system, replace the compact spare
highest gear available. Grade
with a full-size tire as soon as
braking is available for normal
possible. See Compact Spare Tire
driving and in Tow/Haul mode.
on page 10-66.
See Automatic Transmission on
page 9-22.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses the wheels are Using ABS
slowing down. If one of the wheels Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
is about to stop rolling, the computer the brake pedal down firmly and let
electronic braking system that helps
will separately work the brakes at ABS work. You may hear the ABS
prevent a braking skid.
each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
When the vehicle begins to drive the brake pedal pulsate. This is
ABS can change the brake pressure
away, ABS checks itself. normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
A momentary motor or clicking noise
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
might be heard while this test is
you steer around the obstacle while
going on, and it might even be ABS allows you to steer and brake
braking hard.
noticed that the brake pedal moves at the same time. In many
a little. This is normal. As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
If there is a problem with ABS, this close to the vehicle in front of you,
warning light stays on. See Antilock there will not be enough time to
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light apply the brakes if that vehicle
on page 5-21.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Parking Brake Brake Assist

{ Caution
The Brake Assist feature is
Driving with the parking brake on designed to assist the driver in
can overheat the brake system stopping or decreasing vehicle
and cause premature wear or speed in emergency driving
damage to brake system parts. conditions. This feature uses the
Make sure that the parking brake stability system hydraulic brake
is fully released and the brake control module to supplement the
warning light is off before driving. power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
To release the parking brake, hold brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
the regular brake pedal down, then stop or slow down the vehicle. The
push down momentarily on the stability system hydraulic brake
parking brake pedal until you feel control module increases brake
To set the parking brake, hold the
the pedal release. Slowly pull your pressure at each corner of the
regular brake pedal down, then
foot up off the parking brake pedal. vehicle until the ABS activates.
push the parking brake pedal down.
If the parking brake is not released Minor brake pedal pulsation or
If the ignition is on, the brake when you begin to drive, the brake pedal movement during this time is
system warning light will come on. system warning light will be on and normal and the driver should
See Brake System Warning Light on a chime will sound warning you that continue to apply the brake pedal as
page 5-20. the parking brake is still on. the driving situation dictates. The
If you are towing a trailer and are Brake Assist feature will
parking on a hill, see Driving automatically disengage when the
Characteristics and Towing Tips on brake pedal is released or brake
page 9-47. pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Hill Start Assist (HSA) Ride Control Systems vehicle wheel brakes to assist the
driver in keeping the vehicle on the
This vehicle has an HSA feature, intended path.
which may be useful when the Traction Control/
vehicle is stopped on a grade If cruise control is being used and
Electronic Stability traction control or StabiliTrak begins
sufficient enough to activate HSA.
This feature is designed to prevent Control to limit wheel spin, cruise control will
the vehicle from rolling, either disengage. Cruise control may be
System Operation turned back on when road
forward or rearward, during vehicle
drive off. After the driver completely The vehicle has a Traction Control conditions allow.
stops and holds the vehicle in a System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an Both systems come on
complete standstill on a grade, HSA electronic stability control system. automatically when the vehicle is
will be automatically activated. These systems help limit wheel slip started and begins to move. The
During the transition period between and assist the driver in maintaining systems may be heard or felt while
when the driver releases the brake control, especially on slippery road they are operating or while
pedal and starts to accelerate to conditions. performing diagnostic checks. This
drive off on a grade, HSA holds the TCS activates if it senses that any is normal and does not mean there
braking pressure for a maximum of of the drive wheels are spinning or is a problem with the vehicle.
two seconds to ensure that there is beginning to lose traction. When this It is recommended to leave both
no rolling. The brakes will happens, TCS applies the brakes to systems on for normal driving
automatically release when the the spinning wheels and reduces conditions, but it may be necessary
accelerator pedal is applied within engine power to limit wheel spin. to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets
the two-second window. It will not
StabiliTrak activates when the stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
activate if the vehicle is in a drive
vehicle senses a difference between See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on
gear and facing downhill, or if the
the intended path and the direction page 9-9 and “Turning the Systems
vehicle is facing uphill and in
the vehicle is actually traveling. Off and On” later in this section.
R (Reverse).
StabiliTrak selectively applies
braking pressure to any one of the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
If d comes on and stays on:

{ Caution
1. Stop the vehicle.
Do not repeatedly brake or
2. Turn the engine off and wait
accelerate heavily when TCS is
15 seconds.
off. The vehicle driveline could be
3. Start the engine. damaged.
The indicator light for both systems
is in the instrument cluster. This Drive the vehicle. If d comes on
light will: and stays on, the vehicle may need To turn off TCS and StabiliTrak,
. Flash when TCS is limiting
more time to diagnose the problem. press and release the 4 button. The
If the condition persists, see your appropriate message displays in the
wheel spin.
dealer. DIC. To turn TCS and StabiliTrak on
. Flash when StabiliTrak is
activated. Turning the Systems Off again, press and release the 4
and On button. The appropriate message
. Turn on and stay on when either displays in the DIC. See Ride
system is not working. Control System Messages on
If either system fails to turn on or to page 5-41.
activate, a message displays in the If TCS is limiting wheel spin when
Driver Information Center (DIC), and
the 4 button is pressed, the system
d comes on and stays on to will not turn off until the wheels stop
indicate that the system is inactive
spinning.
and is not assisting the driver in The button for TCS and StabiliTrak
maintaining control. The vehicle is is on the center stack. Adding accessories can affect the
safe to drive, but driving should be vehicle performance. See
adjusted accordingly. Accessories and Modifications on
page 10-2.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Cruise Control If the Traction Control System (TCS)

or StabiliTrak system begins to limit
With cruise control, a speed of wheel spin while cruise control is
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can being used, the cruise control will
be maintained without keeping your disengage. See Traction Control/
foot on the accelerator. Cruise Electronic Stability Control on
control does not work at speeds page 9-28. If a collision alert occurs
below about 40 km/h (25 mph). when cruise control is activated,
cruise control is disengaged. See
{ Warning Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 9-32. When road
Cruise control can be dangerous conditions allow you to safely use it
where you cannot drive safely at again, cruise control can be
a steady speed. Do not use the turned on. I (On/Off): Press to turn cruise
cruise control on winding roads or If the brakes are applied, cruise control on or off. The indicator light
in heavy traffic. control is disengaged. on the button comes on when the
Cruise control can be dangerous cruise control is on.
on slippery roads. On such roads, +RES (Resume/Accelerate): If
fast changes in tire traction can there is a set speed in memory,
cause excessive wheel slip, and press briefly to resume to that
you could lose control. Do not use speed or press and hold to
cruise control on slippery roads. accelerate. If cruise control is
already active, use to increase
vehicle speed.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
SET–: Press briefly to set the Resuming a Set Speed The speedometer reading can be
speed and activate cruise control. If the cruise control is set at a displayed in either English or metric
If cruise control is already active, desired speed and then the brakes units. See Instrument Cluster on
use to decrease vehicle speed. page 5-12. The increment value
are applied or [ is pressed, the used depends on the units
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage cruise control is disengaged without displayed.
cruise control without erasing the erasing the set speed from memory.
set speed from memory. Reducing Speed While Using
Once the vehicle reaches 40 km/h Cruise Control
Setting Cruise Control (25 mph) or more, press +RES. The
vehicle returns to the previously set If the cruise control system is
If I is on when not in use, SET– already activated:
speed.
or +RES could get pressed and go
into cruise when not desired. Keep Increasing Speed While Using
. Press and hold SET– until the
I off when cruise is not Cruise Control desired lower speed is reached,
being used. then release it.
If the cruise control system is
. To slow down in small
The cruise control light on the already activated:
instrument cluster comes on after increments, press SET– briefly.
. Press and hold +RES until the
the cruise control has been set to For each press, the vehicle goes
desired speed is reached, then about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
the desired speed. release it.
The speedometer reading can be
1. Press I to turn the cruise . To increase vehicle speed in displayed in either English or metric
control system on. small increments, press +RES units. See Instrument Cluster on
2. Get up to the desired speed. briefly. For each press, the page 5-12. The increment value
vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h used depends on the units
3. Press and release SET–. (1 mph) faster. displayed.
4. Remove foot from the
accelerator.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Passing Another Vehicle While Ending Cruise Control Driver Assistance

Using Cruise Control There are four ways to end cruise
Use the accelerator pedal to control:
Systems
increase the vehicle speed. When . Step lightly on the brake pedal.
you take your foot off the pedal, the Forward Collision Alert
vehicle will slow down to the . Press [. (FCA) System
previously set cruise speed. While .
pressing the accelerator pedal or Shift the transmission to If equipped, the FCA system may
shortly following the release to N (Neutral). help to avoid or reduce the harm
override cruise control, briefly . To turn off the cruise control, caused by front-end crashes. When
pressing SET– will result in cruise approaching a vehicle ahead too
press I. quickly, FCA provides a red flashing
control set to the current vehicle
speed. Erasing Speed Memory alert on the windshield and rapidly
beeps. FCA also lights an amber
Using Cruise Control on Hills The cruise control set speed is visual alert if following another
erased from memory if I is vehicle much too closely.
How well the cruise control will work
on hills depends upon the vehicle pressed or the ignition is turned off. FCA detects vehicles within a
speed, load, and the steepness of distance of approximately 60 m
the hills. When going up steep hills, (197 ft) and operates at speeds
you might have to step on the above 40 km/h (25 mph).
accelerator pedal to maintain your
speed. When going downhill, you
might have to brake or shift to a
lower gear to keep your speed
down. If the brake pedal is applied
cruise control will disengage.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

{ Warning { Warning
FCA is a warning system and FCA does not provide a warning
does not apply the brakes. When to help avoid a crash, unless it
approaching a slower-moving or detects a vehicle. FCA may not
stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA
or when following a vehicle too sensor is blocked by dirt, snow,
closely, FCA may not provide a or ice, or if the windshield is
warning with enough time to help FCA warnings will not occur unless damaged. It may also not detect a
the FCA system detects a vehicle
avoid a crash. FCA does not warn vehicle on winding or hilly roads,
ahead. When a vehicle is detected,
of pedestrians, animals, signs, or in conditions that can limit
the vehicle ahead indicator will
guardrails, bridges, construction display green. Vehicles may not be visibility such as fog, rain,
barrels, or other objects. Be ready detected on curves, highway exit or snow, or if the headlamps or
to take action and apply the ramps, or hills; or due to poor windshield are not cleaned or in
brakes. For more information, see visibility. FCA will not detect another proper condition. Keep the
Defensive Driving on page 9-3. vehicle ahead until it is completely windshield, headlamps, and FCA
in the driving lane. sensors clean and in good repair.
FCA can be disabled with the [
button on the center stack.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Collision Alert Tailgating Alert conditions when selecting the alert

timing. The range of selectable alert
timings may not be appropriate for
all drivers and driving conditions.
Unnecessary Alerts
FCA may provide unnecessary
alerts to turning vehicles, vehicles in
When your vehicle approaches The vehicle ahead indicator will other lanes, objects that are not
another detected vehicle too rapidly, display amber if following a detected vehicles, or shadows. These alerts
the red FCA display will flash on the vehicle ahead much too closely. are normal operation and the
windshield. Also, eight rapid vehicle does not need service.
Selecting the Alert Timing
high-pitched beeps will sound from Cleaning the System
the front. When this Collision Alert The Collision Alert button is on the
occurs, the brake system may center stack. Press [ to set the If the FCA system does not seem to
prepare for driver braking to occur alert timing to far, medium, near, operate properly, cleaning the
more rapidly which can cause a or off. The first button press shows outside of the windshield area in
brief, mild deceleration. Continue to the current control setting on the front of the camera sensor may
apply the brake pedal as needed. DIC. Additional button presses will correct the issue.
change this setting. The chosen
setting will remain until it is changed Parking Assist
and will affect both the Collision If available, the Rear Parking Assist
Alert and the Tailgating Alert (RPA) system assists the driver with
features. The timing of both alerts parking and avoiding objects while
will vary based on vehicle speed. in R (Reverse). RPA operates at
The faster the vehicle speed, the speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
farther away the alert will occur.
Consider traffic and weather

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
The sensors on the rear bumper are How the System Works When the System Does Not
used to detect objects up to Seem to Work Properly
RPA comes on automatically when
2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and
the shift lever is moved into The following messages may be
at least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground
R (Reverse). A single beep sounds displayed on the DIC:
and below liftgate level. Detection
to indicate the system is working.
distances may be less during SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this
warmer or humid weather. An obstacle is indicated by audible message occurs, take the vehicle to
beeps. The interval between the your dealer to repair the system.
{ Warning beeps becomes shorter as the
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
OWNERS MANUAL: This
The parking assist system does When the distance is less than
message can occur under the
not detect children, pedestrians, 30 cm (12 in) the beeping is
following conditions:
bicyclists, animals, or objects continuous for five seconds.
below the bumper or that are too
. The sensors are not clean. Keep
Turning the System On and Off the vehicle's rear bumper free of
close or too far from the vehicle.
It is not available at speeds The system can be disabled through mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush.
the Driver Information Center (DIC). For cleaning instructions, see
greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To
See “Park Assist” under Driver Exterior Care on page 10-74.
prevent injury, death, or vehicle
damage, even with parking assist, Information Center (DIC) (With DIC . The sensors are covered by
Buttons) on page 5-25 or Driver frost or ice. Frost or ice can form
always check the area around the
Information Center (DIC) (Without around and behind the sensors
vehicle and check all mirrors
DIC Buttons) on page 5-31. and may not always be seen;
before backing.
Turn off RPA when towing a trailer. this can occur after washing the
vehicle in cold weather. The
RPA defaults to the on setting each message may not clear until the
time the vehicle is started. frost or ice has melted.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. A trailer was attached to the The SBZA warning display will light SBZA Detection Zones
vehicle, or an object was up in the corresponding outside side
hanging out of the liftgate during mirror and will flash if the turn signal
the last drive cycle. Once the is on.
object is removed, RPA will
return to normal operation.
{ Warning
. A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle. SBZA does not alert the driver to
vehicles rapidly approaching
. The bumper is damaged. Take
the vehicle to your dealer to outside of the side blind zones,
repair the system. pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. It may not provide
. Other conditions, such as alerts when changing lanes under
vibrations from a jackhammer or all driving conditions. Failure to
the compression of air brakes on use proper care when changing The SBZA sensor covers a zone of
a very large truck, are affecting approximately one lane over from
lanes may result in injury, death,
system performance. both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m
or vehicle damage. Before
making a lane change, always (11 ft). The height of the zone is
Side Blind Zone check mirrors, glance over your approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
Alert (SBZA) shoulder, and use the turn and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. This
signals. zone starts at approximately the
If equipped, the Side Blind Zone middle of the vehicle and goes back
Alert system is a lane-changing aid 5 m (16 ft).
that assists drivers with avoiding
crashes that occur with vehicles in
the side blind zone (or spot) areas.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
How the System Works detected vehicle, this display will vehicle. This is normal system
flash as an extra warning not to operation; the vehicle does not need
The SBZA symbol lights up in the
change lanes. service.
side mirrors when the system
detects a vehicle in the next lane SBZA can be disabled through the SBZA may not always alert the
over that is in the side blind zone. Driver Information Center (DIC). See driver to vehicles in the side blind
This indicates it may be unsafe to Driver Information Center (DIC) zone, especially in wet conditions.
change lanes. Before making a lane (With DIC Buttons) on page 5-25 or The system does not need to be
change, check the SBZA display, Driver Information Center (DIC) serviced. The system may light up
check mirrors, glance over your (Without DIC Buttons) on page 5-31. due to guardrails, signs, trees,
shoulder, and use the turn signals. If SBZA is disabled by the driver, shrubs, and other non-moving
the SBZA mirror displays will not objects. This is normal system
light up. operation; the vehicle does not need
service.
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly SBZA may not operate when the
SBZA sensors in the left or right
SBZA displays may not come on corners of the rear bumper are
Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror when passing a vehicle quickly or covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
Display Display when towing a trailer. Keep in mind or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For
the SBZA detection zones that cleaning instructions, see "Washing
When the vehicle is started, both extend back from the side of the the Vehicle" under Exterior Care on
outside mirror SBZA displays will vehicle do not move further back page 10-74. If the DIC still displays
briefly come on to indicate the when a trailer is towed. Use extra the system unavailable message
system is operating. When the caution while changing lanes when after cleaning both sides of the
vehicle is moving forward, the left- towing a trailer. SBZA may alert you vehicle toward the rear corners of
or right-side mirror display will light to objects attached to the vehicle, the vehicle, see your dealer.
up if a vehicle is detected in that such as a trailer, bicycle, or object
blind zone. If the turn signal is extending out to either side of the
activated in the same direction of a

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
If the SBZA displays do not light up the video image automatically

when vehicles are in the blind zone { Warning appears on the inside rearview
and the system is clean, the system mirror. Once the driver shifts out of
may need service. Take the vehicle The RVC system does not display R (Reverse), the video image
to your dealer. children, pedestrians, bicyclists, automatically disappears from the
crossing traffic, animals, or any inside rearview mirror.
When SBZA is disabled for any other object located outside the
reason other than the driver turning camera's field of view, below the Turning the RVC System Off or On
it off, the Side Blind Zone Alert ON bumper, or under the vehicle.
option will not be available on the To turn off the RVC system, press
Perceived distances may be and hold z on the inside rearview
DIC menu.
different from actual distances. mirror until the left indicator light
FCC Information Do not back the vehicle using turns off. The RVC display is now
only the RVC screen. Failure to disabled.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-12. use proper care before backing
may result in injury, death, To turn the RVC system on again,
or vehicle damage. Always check press and hold z until the left
Rear Vision behind and around the vehicle indicator light illuminates. The RVC
Camera (RVC) before backing. system display is now enabled and
the display will appear in the mirror
The vehicle may have an RVC
normally.
system. Read this entire section Vehicles with RVC on the
before using it. Vehicles with RVC on the
Rearview Mirror
Infotainment System
The RVC system is designed to
help the driver when backing up by The RVC system is designed to
displaying a view of the area behind help the driver when backing up by
the vehicle. When the key is in the displaying a view of the area behind
ON/RUN position and the driver the vehicle. When the driver shifts
shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse), the vehicle into R (Reverse), the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
video image automatically appears The caution symbols appear when direction, behind the vehicle. When
on the infotainment screen. Once an object has been detected by the an object is detected, three beeps
the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), RPA system. The symbol may cover sound on the left or right side,
the screen will go back to the last the object when viewing the RVC depending on the direction of the
screen that had been displayed, screen. detected vehicle. This system
after a delay. The RVC system may have a detects objects coming from up to
The RVC display remains on after guideline overlay that can help the 20 m (65 ft) from the left or right side
shifting out of R (Reverse) for driver align the vehicle when behind the vehicle.
approximately 10 seconds. Return to backing into a parking spot. Use caution while backing up when
the previous screen sooner by To turn the symbols and guidelines towing a trailer, as the RCTA
performing one of the following: on or off: detection zones that extend out
. Press a hard key on the from the back of your vehicle do not
1. Shift into P (Park). move further back when a trailer is
infotainment system.
2. Press Settings on the Home towed.
. Shift into P (Park). screen of the infotainment The RCTA system can be disabled
. Reach a vehicle speed of system. through the Driver Information
8 km/h (5 mph). 3. Select Rear Camera. The Rear Center (DIC). See Driver
Symbols and Guidelines Camera screen displays. Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
Buttons) on page 5-25 or Driver
The RVC system may have a 4. Select Symbols or Guidelines. Information Center (DIC) (Without
feature that lets the driver view When a checkmark appears next DIC Buttons) on page 5-31.
caution symbols on the RVC screen to the item, it is on.
while using the RVC. The Rear Rear Vision Camera Location
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
Parking Assist (RPA) system must The camera is located above the
not be disabled to use these On vehicles with RCTA, a red license plate.
symbols. See Parking Assist on warning triangle with an arrow may
page 9-34. also display on the RVC screen to
warn of traffic coming from either

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
The area displayed by the camera is

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
limited and does not display objects builds up on the camera lens.
that are close to either corner or Clean the lens, rinse it with
under the bumper. The area water, and wipe it with a soft
displayed can vary depending on cloth.
vehicle orientation or road . The back of the vehicle is in an
conditions. Displayed images may accident. The position and
be farther or closer than they mounting angle of the camera
appear. can change or the camera can
1. View displayed by the camera. be affected. Be sure to have the
The following illustrations show the
field of view that the camera 2. Corner of the rear bumper. camera and its position and
provides. mounting angle checked at your
When the System Does Not dealer.
Seem To Work Properly . There are extreme temperature
The RVC system might not work changes.
properly or display a clear image if:
The RVC system display in the
. The RVC is turned off. See rearview mirror may turn off or not
“Turning the RVC System Off or appear as expected due to one of
On” earlier in this section. the following conditions. If this
. It is dark. occurs the left indicator light on the
mirror will flash.
. The sun or the beam of
headlamps is shining directly
. A slow flash may indicate a loss
into the camera lens. of video signal, or no video
signal present during the reverse
1. View displayed by the camera. cycle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. A fast flash may indicate that the
display has been on for the
Lane Departure Warning (Continued)
maximum allowable time during Warning (LDW)
a reverse cycle, or the display proper condition; or if the sun
If equipped, LDW may help avoid
has reached an Over shines directly into the
crashes due to unintentional lane
Temperature limit. camera.
departures. It may provide an alert if
The fast flash conditions are the vehicle is crossing a lane . Detect road edges.
used to protect the video device without using a turn signal in that . Detect lanes on winding or
from high temperature direction. LDW uses a camera hilly roads.
conditions. Once conditions sensor to detect the lane markings
return to normal the device will at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or If LDW only detects lane
reset and the green indicator will greater. markings on one side of the road,
stop flashing. it will only warn you when
During any of these fault conditions, { Warning departing the lane on the side
where it has detected a lane
the display will be blank and the
The LDW system does not steer marking. Always keep your
indicator will continue to flash as
long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) the vehicle. The LDW system attention on the road and
or until the conditions return to may not: maintain proper vehicle position
normal. . Provide enough time to avoid within the lane, or vehicle
a crash. damage, injury, or death could
Pressing and holding z when the occur. Always keep the
left indicator light is flashing will turn
. Detect lane markings under windshield, headlamps, and
off the video display along with the poor weather or visibility camera sensors clean and in
left indicator light. conditions. This can occur if good repair. Do not use LDW in
the windshield or headlamps
bad weather conditions.
are blocked by dirt, snow,
or ice; if they are not in
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
How the System Works When the System Does Not Fuel
The LDW camera sensor is on the Seem to Work Properly
Use of the recommended fuel is an
windshield ahead of the rearview The system may not detect lanes as important part of the proper
mirror. well when there are: maintenance of this vehicle. When
To turn LDW on and off, press @ on . Close vehicles ahead. driving in the U.S. and Canada, to
the center stack, forward of the shift help keep the engine clean and
. Sudden lighting changes, such
lever. The control indicator will light maintain optimum vehicle
as when driving through tunnels.
when LDW is on. performance, we recommend using
. Banked roads. TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.
If the LDW system is not functioning See www.toptiergas.com for a list of
properly when lane markings are TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.
clearly visible, cleaning the
windshield may help.
LDW alerts may occur due to tar
marks, shadows, cracks in the road,
When LDW is on, @ is green if temporary or construction lane
LDW is available to warn of a lane markings, or other road
departure. If the vehicle crosses a imperfections. This is normal system
detected lane marking without using operation; the vehicle does not need
the turn signal in that direction, @ service. Turn LDW off if these
conditions continue.
changes to amber and flashes.
Additionally, there will be three
beeps on the right or left, depending
on the lane departure direction. Use regular unleaded gasoline
meeting ASTM specification D4814
with a posted octane rating of 87 or

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
higher. Do not use gasoline with an California Fuel

octane rating below 87, as it may { Caution Requirements
cause engine damage and will lower
fuel economy. Do not use fuel containing If the vehicle is certified to meet
methanol. It can corrode metal California Emissions Standards, it is
Use of Seasonal Fuels parts in the fuel system and also designed to operate on fuels that
Use summer and winter fuels in the damage plastic and rubber parts. meet California specifications. See
appropriate season. The fuels That damage would not be the underhood emission control
industry automatically modifies the covered under the vehicle label. If this fuel is not available in
fuel for the appropriate season. warranty. states adopting California Emissions
If fuel is left in the vehicle tank for Standards, the vehicle will operate
long periods of time, driving or Some gasolines, mainly high octane satisfactorily on fuels meeting
starting could be affected. Drive the racing gasolines, can contain an federal specifications, but emission
vehicle until the fuel is at one-half octane-enhancing additive called control system performance might
tank or less, then refuel with the methylcyclopentadienyl manganese be affected. The malfunction
current seasonal fuel. tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use indicator lamp could turn on and the
gasolines and/or fuel additives with vehicle may not pass a smog-check
Prohibited Fuels
MMT as they can reduce spark plug test. See Malfunction Indicator
Gasolines containing oxygenates life and affect emission control Lamp on page 5-18. If this occurs,
such as ethers and ethanol, as well system performance. The return to your authorized dealer for
as reformulated gasolines, are malfunction indicator lamp may turn diagnosis. If it is determined that the
available in some cities. If these on. If this occurs, see your dealer condition is caused by the type of
gasolines comply with the for service. fuel used, repairs may not be
previously described specification, covered by the vehicle warranty.
then they are acceptable to use.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
15% ethanol must be used only in
FlexFuel vehicles.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Fuels in Foreign gasoline additive recommended by

Warning (Continued)
General Motors. It is available at
Countries your dealer. . Keep children away from the
If planning to drive in countries
fuel pump and never let
outside the U.S. or Canada, the Filling the Tank children pump fuel.
proper fuel might be hard to find.
. Fuel can spray out if the fuel
Check regional auto club or fuel
retail brand websites for availability
{ Warning cap is opened too quickly.
in the country where driving. Never Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn This spray can happen if the
use leaded gasoline, fuel containing violently and can cause injury or tank is nearly full, and is
methanol, manganese, or any other death. more likely in hot weather.
fuel not recommended. Costly Open the fuel cap slowly and
repairs caused by use of improper . To help avoid injuries to you wait for any hiss noise to stop
fuel would not be covered by the and others, read and follow then unscrew the cap all
vehicle warranty. all the instructions on the fuel the way.
pump island.
Fuel Additives . Turn off the engine when
To keep fuel systems clean, TOP refueling.
TIER Detergent Gasoline is . Keep sparks, flames, and
recommended. See Fuel on smoking materials away
page 9-42. from fuel.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is . Do not leave the fuel pump
not available, one bottle of Fuel unattended.
System Treatment PLUS added to . Do not reenter the vehicle
the fuel tank at every engine oil while pumping fuel.
change, can help. Fuel System
Treatment PLUS is the only (Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
While refueling, hang the tethered

fuel cap from the hook on the { Warning
fuel door.
If a fire starts while you are
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not refueling, do not remove the
top off or overfill the tank and wait a nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
few seconds after you have finished shutting off the pump or by
pumping before removing the notifying the station attendant.
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted Leave the area immediately.
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 10-74.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure { Caution
The fuel cap is behind a hinged fuel the cap is fully installed. The
door on the driver side of the diagnostic system can determine if If a new fuel cap is needed, be
vehicle. To open the fuel door, push the fuel cap has been left off or sure to get the right type of cap
and release the rearward center improperly installed. This would from your dealer. The wrong type
edge of the door. allow fuel to evaporate into the of fuel cap may not fit properly,
To remove the fuel cap, turn it atmosphere. See Malfunction may cause the malfunction
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel Indicator Lamp on page 5-18. indicator lamp to light, and could
cap has a spring in it; if the cap is damage the fuel tank and
released too soon, it will spring back emissions system. See
to the right. Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5-18.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Filling a Portable Fuel Warning (Continued) Trailer Towing

Container
keep it in contact with the fill General Towing
{ Warning opening until filling is
complete.
Information
Filling a portable fuel container Only use towing equipment that has
. Fill the container no more
while it is in the vehicle can cause been designed for the vehicle.
than 95% full to allow for
fuel vapors that can ignite either Contact your dealer or trailering
expansion.
by static electricity or other dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke, light matches, the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read
means. You or others could be
or use lighters while the entire section before towing a
badly burned and the vehicle pumping fuel. trailer.
could be damaged. Always:
. Avoid using cell phones or For towing a disabled vehicle, see
. Use approved fuel other electronic devices. Towing the Vehicle on page 10-70.
containers. For towing the vehicle behind
. Remove the container from another vehicle such as a motor
the vehicle, trunk, or pickup home, see Recreational Vehicle
bed before filling. Towing on page 10-71.
. Place the container on the
ground.
. Place the nozzle inside the fill
opening of the container
before dispensing fuel, and
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Driving Characteristics Towing a trailer requires a certain

and Towing Tips
{ Warning amount of experience. The
combination you are driving is
When towing a trailer, exhaust longer and not as responsive as the
Driving with a Trailer gases may collect at the rear of vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
When towing a trailer: the vehicle and enter if the the handling and braking of the rig
. Become familiar with the state liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most before setting out for the open road.
and local laws that apply window is open.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
specifically to trailer towing. When towing a trailer: parts and attachments, safety
. Do not tow a trailer during the . Do not drive with the liftgate, chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
first 800 km (500 mi), to prevent trunk/hatch, or rear-most tires and mirrors. If the trailer has
damage to the engine, axle or window open. electric brakes, start the
other parts. combination moving and then apply
. Fully open the air outlets on the trailer brake controller by hand
. Then, during the first 800 km or under the instrument to be sure the brakes work.
(500 mi) trailer towing, do not panel.
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and During the trip, check occasionally
do not make starts at full throttle.
. Also adjust the Climate to be sure that the load is secure
Control system to a setting and the lamps and any trailer
. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive) that brings in only outside air. brakes still work.
but M (Manual Mode) is See “Climate Control
recommended. See Manual Systems” in the Index. Towing with a Stability Control
Mode on page 9-24. Use a lower System
gear if the transmission shifts For more information about
too often. Carbon Monoxide, see Engine When towing, the sound of the
Exhaust on page 9-21. stability control system might be
. Turn off Park Assist when heard. The system is reacting to the
towing. vehicle movement caused by the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
trailer, which mainly occurs during Making Turns lamps also flash, telling other
cornering. This is normal when drivers the vehicle is turning,
towing heavier trailers. { Caution changing lanes or stopping.
Following Distance When towing a trailer, the arrows on
Making very sharp turns while the instrument cluster flash for turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the trailering could cause the trailer to even if the bulbs on the trailer are
vehicle ahead as you would when come in contact with the vehicle. burned out. Check occasionally to
driving the vehicle without a trailer. The vehicle could be damaged. be sure the trailer bulbs are still
This can help to avoid situations Avoid making very sharp turns working.
that require heavy braking and while trailering.
sudden turns. Driving on Grades
Passing When turning with a trailer, make Reduce speed and shift to a lower
wider turns than normal so the gear before starting down a long or
More passing distance is needed steep downgrade. If the
when towing a trailer. Because the trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other transmission is not shifted down, the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go brakes might have to be used so
farther beyond the passed vehicle objects. Use the turn signal well in
advance and avoid jerky or sudden much that they would get hot and no
before returning to the lane. longer work well.
maneuvers.
Backing Up The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Turn Signals When Towing a Use a lower gear if the transmission
Hold the bottom of the steering Trailer
wheel with one hand. To move the shifts too often.
trailer to the left, move your hand to The turn signal indicators on the The Tow/Haul Mode may be used if
the left. To move the trailer to the instrument cluster flash whenever the transmission shifts too often.
right, move your hand to the right. signaling a turn or lane change. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-25.
Always back up slowly and, Properly hooked up, the trailer
if possible, have someone
guide you.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
When towing at high altitude on Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in
steep uphill grades, engine coolant place, release the brake pedal
boils at a lower temperature than at
normal altitudes. If the engine is
{ Warning until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
turned off immediately after towing Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift
at high altitude on steep uphill the trailer attached can be into P (Park).
grades, the vehicle could show dangerous. If something goes
signs similar to engine overheating. 5. Release the brake pedal.
wrong, the rig could start to move.
To avoid this, let the engine run People can be injured, and both Leaving After Parking on a Hill
while parked, preferably on level
the vehicle and the trailer can be
ground, with the transmission in 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
damaged. When possible, always
P (Park) for a few minutes before while you:
turning the engine off. If the park the rig on a flat surface.
. Start the engine.
overheat warning comes on,
see Engine Overheating on If parking the rig on a hill:
. Shift into a gear.
page 10-16. . Release the parking brake.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
uphill. clear of the chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks 4. Stop and have someone pick up

under the trailer wheels. and store the chocks.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Maintenance When Trailer Engine Cooling When Trailer Weight of the Trailer
Towing Towing How heavy can a trailer safely be?
The vehicle needs service more The cooling system may temporarily Speed, altitude, road grades,
often when pulling a trailer. See the overheat during severe operating outside temperature, special
Maintenance Schedule on conditions. See Engine Overheating equipment, and the amount of
page 11-2. Things that are on page 10-16. tongue weight the vehicle can carry
especially important in trailer must be considered. See “Weight of
operation are automatic Trailer Towing the Trailer Tongue” later in this
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle section for more information.
lubricant, belts, cooling system and Three important considerations
brake system. Inspect these before have to do with weight: Maximum trailer weight is calculated
and during the trip. . The weight of the trailer. assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
Check periodically to see that all . The weight of the trailer tongue. required trailering equipment. The
hitch nuts and bolts are tight. . weight of additional optional
The total weight on the vehicle's
tires. equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

Front-Wheel Drive 907 kg (2,000 lb) 3 402 kg (7,500 lb)
Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 2 359 kg (5,200 lb) 4 649 kg (10,250 lb)
All-Wheel Drive 907 kg (2,000 lb) 3 493 kg (7,700 lb)
All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 2 359 kg (5,200 lb) 4 740 kg (10,450 lb)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for trailering If there are a lot of options,

information or advice. equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
Weight of the Trailer Tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is will also reduce the trailer weight the
an important weight to measure vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
because it affects the total gross the tongue load must be added to
weight of the vehicle. The Gross the GVW because the vehicle will
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the be carrying that weight, too. See
curb weight of the vehicle, any Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-9.
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
If a weight-carrying hitch or a It is important that the vehicle does Towing Equipment

weight-distributing hitch is being not exceed any of its ratings —
used, the trailer tongue (1) should GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Hitches
weigh 10-15 percent of the total Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. It is important to have the correct
loaded trailer weight (2). The only way to be sure it is not hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
After loading the trailer, weigh the exceeding any of these ratings is to trucks going by, and rough roads
trailer and then the tongue, weigh the vehicle and trailer. are a few reasons why the right
separately, to see if the weights are Total Weight on the Vehicle's hitch is needed.
proper. If they are not, adjustments Tires . The rear bumper on the vehicle
might be made by moving some is not intended for hitches. Do
items around in the trailer. Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
upper limit for cold tires. These not attach rental hitches or other
Trailering may be limited by the numbers can be found on the bumper-type hitches to it. Use
vehicle's ability to carry tongue Certification label or see Vehicle only a frame-mounted hitch that
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause Load Limits on page 9-9 for more does not attach to the bumper.
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR information. Do not go over the . Will any holes be made in the
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or GVW limit for the vehicle, or the body of the vehicle when the
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle GAWR, including the weight of the trailer hitch is installed? If so,
Weight Rating). The effect of trailer tongue. If using a weight then be sure to seal the holes
additional weight may reduce the distributing hitch, do not go over the when the hitch is removed. If the
trailering capacity more than the rear axle limit before applying the holes are not sealed, dirt, water,
total of the additional weight. weight distribution spring bars. and deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) from the exhaust may get
into the vehicle. See Engine
Exhaust on page 9-21.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Safety Chains Trailer Wiring Harness

Weight Carrying Hitches
Always attach chains between the Basic Trailer Wiring
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of The trailer wiring harness, with a
the trailer to help prevent the tongue seven-pin connector, is located at
from contacting the road if it the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
becomes separated from the hitch. the vehicle's frame. The harness
Always leave just enough slack so connector can be plugged into a
the rig can turn. Never allow safety seven-pin universal heavy-duty
chains to drag on the ground. trailer connector available through
your dealer.
Trailer Brakes The seven-wire harness contains
A loaded trailer that weighs more the following trailer circuits:
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
have its own brake system that is
1. Body-to-Ground Distance adequate for the weight of the
. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
2. Front of Vehicle trailer. Be sure to read and follow Signal
the instructions for the trailer brakes . Brown: Taillamps
When using a weight-distributing so they are installed, adjusted, and
hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so maintained properly.
. Black: Ground
that the distance (1) remains the
Because the vehicle has antilock
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps
same both before and after coupling
the trailer to the tow vehicle. brakes, do not try to tap into the . Red/Black: Battery Feed
vehicle's hydraulic brake system. . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
If you do, both brake systems will
not work well, or at all.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
*The fuse for this circuit is installed Electric Trailer Brake Control Conversions and
in the underhood electrical center, Wiring Provisions
but the wires are not connected. These wiring provisions for an
Add-Ons
They should be connected by your electric trailer brake controller are
dealer or a qualified service center. included with the vehicle as part of Add-On Electrical
If the back-up lamp circuit is not the trailer wiring package. The Equipment
functional, contact your dealer. instrument panel contains blunt cut
If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is wires above the parking brake
assembly for the electric trailer
{ Caution
being charged, press the Tow/Haul
mode switch located on the center brake controller. The harness Some electrical equipment can
console near the climate controls. contains the following wires: damage the vehicle or cause
This will boost the vehicle system . Red/Black: Power Supply components to not work and
voltage and properly charge the . White: Brake Switch Signal would not be covered by the
battery. If the trailer is too light for warranty. Always check with your
Tow/Haul mode, turn on the . Gray: Illumination dealer before adding electrical
headlamps (non-HID only) as a . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal equipment.
second way to boost the vehicle
system and charge the battery.
. Black: Ground
Add-on equipment can drain the
The electric trailer brake controller
vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
should be installed by your dealer or
vehicle is not operating.
a qualified service center.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-34 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-35.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Overheated Engine

Protection
Electrical System
High Voltage Devices and
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-19 Electrical System
General Information Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Fuses and Circuit
California Proposition Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Engine Compartment Fuse
California Perchlorate All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-2 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-23 Instrument Panel Fuse
Accessories and Automatic Transmission Shift Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Lock Control Function
Vehicle Checks Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Wheels and Tires
Doing Your Own Ignition Transmission Lock Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Park Brake and P (Park) Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Engine Compartment Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24 Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Wiper Blade Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-37
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Tire Terminology and
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Headlamp Aiming Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Automatic Transmission
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Bulb Replacement System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Pressure Monitor
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-16 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-27 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-28

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New General Information cause cancer and birth defects or
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 other reproductive harm. Engine
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 For service and parts needs, visit exhaust, many parts and systems,
Different Size Tires and your dealer. You will receive many fluids, and some component
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 genuine GM parts and GM-trained wear by-products contain and/or
Uniform Tire Quality and supported service people. emit these chemicals.
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Genuine GM parts have one of
Wheel Alignment and Tire these marks: California Perchlorate
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-55 Materials Requirements
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Certain types of automotive
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 applications, such as airbag
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-66 and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
Jump Starting may contain perchlorate materials.
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Special handling may be necessary.
Towing the Vehicle For additional information, see
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-70 www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
Recreational Vehicle perchlorate.
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Accessories and
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 California Proposition Modifications
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 65 Warning Adding non‐dealer accessories or
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82 Most motor vehicles, including this making modifications to the vehicle
one, contain and/or emit chemicals can affect vehicle performance and
known to the State of California to safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-3
handling, emissions systems, Vehicle Checks This vehicle has an airbag system.
aerodynamics, durability, and Before attempting to do your own
electronic systems like antilock service work, see Servicing the
brakes, traction control, and stability Doing Your Own Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
control. These accessories or Service Work page 3-34.
modifications could even cause Keep a record with all parts receipts
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
{ Warning and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Damage to vehicle components It can be dangerous to work on Maintenance Records on
resulting from modifications or the your vehicle if you do not have page 11-14.
installation or use of non‐GM the proper knowledge, service
certified parts, including control
module or software modifications, is
manual, tools, or parts. Always
follow owner manual procedures
{ Caution
not covered under the terms of the and consult the service manual Even small amounts of
vehicle warranty and may affect for your vehicle before doing any contamination can cause damage
remaining warranty coverage for service work. to vehicle systems. Do not allow
affected parts. contaminants to contact the fluids,
GM Accessories are designed to If doing some of your own service reservoir caps, or dipsticks.
complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. See your manual. It tells you much more
dealer to accessorize the vehicle about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories than this manual can. To order the
installed by a dealer technician. proper service manual, see Service
Also, see Adding Equipment to the Publications Ordering Information
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on on page 13-11.
page 3-35.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-4 Vehicle Care
Hood 3. After you have partially lifted the

hood, gas struts will
To open the hood: automatically take over to lift and
hold the hood in the fully open
position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
filler caps are on properly.
Pull the hood down to close. Lower
the hood until the lifting pressure of
1. Pull the hood release handle the strut is reduced. Then allow the
with this symbol on it. It is under hood to fall and latch into place
the instrument panel on the under its own weight. Check to
2. At the front of the vehicle, pull make sure the hood is closed. If the
driver side of the vehicle.
up on the center of the hood, hood does not fully latch, gently
and push the secondary hood push the hood down at the front and
release to the right. center of the hood until it is
completely latched.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-5
Engine Compartment Overview

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-6 Vehicle Care
1. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. 8. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Engine Cover
See Jump Starting on View). See “Checking Engine
page 10-67. Oil” under Engine Oil on
2. Engine Compartment Fuse page 10-7.
Block on page 10-29. 9. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of
3. Radiator Pressure Cap (Out of View). See Cooling System on
View). See Cooling System on page 10-12.
page 10-12. 10. Engine Cover on page 10-6.
4. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. 11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
See Cooling System on “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on
page 10-12. page 10-20.
5. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. 12. Windshield Washer Fluid
See Jump Starting on Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
page 10-67. Fluid” under Washer Fluid on 1. Oil Fill Cap
6. Power Steering Reservoir and page 10-19. 2. Engine Cover
Cap (Under Engine Cover). See 13. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on To remove:
Power Steering Fluid on page 10-11.
page 10-19. 1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).
7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When 2. Raise the engine cover (2) to
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine release it from the retainers.
Oil on page 10-7. 3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall
engine cover.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-7
Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil 2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it
with a clean paper towel or cloth,
To ensure proper engine It is a good idea to check the engine
then push it back in all the way.
performance and long life, careful oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
Remove it again, keeping the tip
attention must be paid to engine oil. get an accurate reading, the vehicle
down, and check the level.
Following these simple, but must be on level ground. The
important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. When to Add Engine Oil
your investment: See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10-5 for the location of the
. Always use engine oil approved engine oil dipstick.
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See Obtaining an accurate oil level
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” reading is essential:
in this section. 1. If the engine has been running
. Check the engine oil level recently, turn off the engine and
regularly and maintain the allow several minutes for the oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched
proper oil level. See “Checking to drain back into the oil pan. area at the tip of the dipstick, add
Engine Oil” and “When to Add Checking the oil level too soon 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
Engine Oil” in this section. after engine shutoff will not and then recheck the level. See
provide an accurate oil level “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
. Change the engine oil at the reading. this section for an explanation of
appropriate time. See Engine Oil what kind of oil to use. For engine
Life System on page 10-9.
. Always dispose of engine oil
{ Warning oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
properly. See “What to Do with The engine oil dipstick handle page 12-2.
Used Oil” in this section. may be hot; it could burn you.
Use a towel or glove to touch the
dipstick handle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-8 Vehicle Care
Selecting the Right Engine Oil

{ Caution Selecting the right engine oil
{ Caution
Do not add too much oil. Oil depends on both the proper oil Failure to use the recommended
levels above or below the specification and viscosity grade. engine oil can result in engine
acceptable operating range See Recommended Fluids and damage not covered by the
shown on the dipstick are harmful Lubricants on page 11-12. vehicle warranty. Check with your
to the engine. If you find that you Specification dealer or service provider on
have an oil level above the whether the oil is approved to the
operating range, i.e., the engine Use and ask for licensed engine oils dexos1 specification.
has so much oil that the oil level with the dexos1® approved
certification mark. Engine oils
gets above the cross-hatched Viscosity Grade
meeting the requirements for the
area that shows the proper
vehicle should have the dexos1 Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade
operating range, the engine could approved certification mark. This
be damaged. You should drain engine oil.
certification mark indicates that the
out the excess oil or limit driving oil has been approved to the dexos1 Cold Temperature Operation: In an
of the vehicle and seek a service specification. See area of extreme cold, where the
professional to remove the www.gmdexos.com. temperature falls below −29°C
excess amount of oil. (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
used. An oil of this viscosity grade
will provide easier cold starting for
See Engine Compartment Overview the engine at extremely low
on page 10-5 for the location of the temperatures. When selecting an oil
engine oil fill cap. of the appropriate viscosity grade,
Add enough oil to put the level always select an oil of the correct
somewhere in the proper operating specification. See “Specification”
range. Push the dipstick all the way earlier in this section for more
back in when through. information.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-9
Engine Oil Additives/Engine Used oil can be a threat to the necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
Oil Flushes environment. If you change your OIL SOON message comes on.
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil Change the oil as soon as possible
Do not add anything to the oil. The from the filter before disposal. Never within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
recommended oils with the dexos dispose of oil by putting it in the It is possible that, if driving under
specification and displaying the trash or pouring it on the ground, the best conditions, the oil life
dexos certification mark are all that into sewers, or into streams or system might indicate that an oil
is needed for good performance and bodies of water. Recycle it by taking change is not necessary for up to a
engine protection. it to a place that collects used oil. year. The engine oil and filter must
Engine oil system flushes are not be changed at least once a year
recommended and could cause Engine Oil Life System and, at this time, the system must
engine damage not covered by the be reset. Your dealer has trained
vehicle warranty. When to Change Engine Oil service people who will perform this
This vehicle has a computer system work and reset the system. It is also
What to Do with Used Oil important to check the oil regularly
that indicates when to change the
Used engine oil contains certain engine oil and filter. This is based over the course of an oil drain
elements that can be unhealthy for on a combination of factors which interval and keep it at the proper
your skin and could even cause include engine revolutions, engine level.
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on temperature, and miles driven. If the system is ever reset
your skin for very long. Clean your Based on driving conditions, the accidentally, the oil must be
skin and nails with soap and water, mileage at which an oil change is changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or indicated can vary considerably. For since the last oil change.
properly dispose of clothing or rags the oil life system to work properly, Remember to reset the oil life
containing used engine oil. See the the system must be reset every time system whenever the oil is changed.
manufacturer's warnings about the the oil is changed.
use and disposal of oil products.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it
indicates that an oil change is

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-10 Vehicle Care
How to Reset the Engine Oil engine oil life system has not Automatic Transmission
Life System been reset. Repeat the
procedure.
Fluid
Reset the system whenever the It is not necessary to check the
engine oil is changed so that the If the vehicle has Driver Information
Center (DIC) buttons: transmission fluid level.
system can calculate the next A transmission fluid leak is the only
engine oil change. To reset the 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, reason for fluid loss. If a leak
system: with the engine off. occurs, take the vehicle to the
If the vehicle does not have Driver 2. Press the vehicle information dealer and have it repaired as soon
Information Center (DIC) buttons: button until OIL LIFE as possible.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, REMAINING displays. Change the fluid at the intervals
with the engine off. The vehicle 3. Press and hold the set/reset listed in Maintenance Schedule on
must be in P (Park) to access button until “100%” is displayed. page 11-2, and be sure to use the
this display. Press the trip Three chimes sound and the transmission fluid listed in
odometer reset stem until OIL CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Recommended Fluids and
LIFE REMAINING displays. message goes off. Lubricants on page 11-12.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
reset stem until OIL LIFE
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
{ Caution
REMAINING shows “100%.”
Three chimes sound and the message comes back on when the Use of the incorrect automatic
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON vehicle is started, the engine oil life transmission fluid may damage
message goes off. system has not been reset. Repeat the vehicle, and the damage may
the procedure. not be covered by the vehicle
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. warranty. Always use the
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL automatic transmission fluid listed
SOON message comes back on in Recommended Fluids and
when the vehicle is started, the Lubricants on page 11-12.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-11
The transmission fluid will not reach from vehicle) to release loose dust 4. Inspect or replace the air
the end of the dipstick unless the and dirt. If the filter remains covered cleaner/filter.
transmission is at operating with dirt, a new filter is required. 5. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstall
temperature. If you need to check To inspect or replace the engine air the housing cover and reconnect
the transmission fluid level, please cleaner/filter: the electrical connector to the
take the vehicle to your dealer. sensor.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
{ Warning
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the others to be burned. The air
scheduled maintenance intervals cleaner not only cleans the air; it
and replace it at the first oil change helps to stop flames if the engine
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mile) backfires. Use caution when
interval. See Maintenance Schedule working on the engine and do not
on page 11-2. If driving in dusty/dirty
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
1. Air Duct Clamp
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10-5 for the location of the
2. Electrical Connector
3. Screws
{ Caution
engine air cleaner/filter.
1. Loosen the air duct clamp (1). If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt
How to Inspect the Engine Air can easily get into the engine,
Cleaner/Filter 2. Disconnect the electrical which could damage it. Always
connector (2). have the air cleaner/filter in place
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle 3. Remove the screws (3) and lift when you are driving.
and lightly shake the filter (away the cover assembly.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-12 Vehicle Care
Cooling System
{ Warning { Caution
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan Using coolant other than
working temperature. under the hood can start up even DEX-COOL® can cause
when the engine is not running premature engine, heater core,
and can cause injury. Keep or radiator corrosion. In addition,
hands, clothing, and tools away the engine coolant could require
from any underhood electric fan. changing sooner. Any repairs
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
{ Warning in the vehicle.
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very Engine Coolant
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned. The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL® engine
1. Radiator Pressure Cap Do not run the engine if there is a coolant. See Maintenance Schedule
(Under Sight Shield) leak. If you run the engine, it on page 11-2 and Recommended
2. Engine Coolant could lose all coolant. That could Fluids and Lubricants on
Recovery Tank cause an engine fire, and you page 11-12.
3. Engine Cooling Fans (Out could be burned. Get any leak
The following explains the cooling
of View) fixed before you drive the vehicle. system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10-16.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-13
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL Caution (Continued)
{ Warning coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added. mixture can freeze and crack
This mixture: engine cooling parts. The repairs
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down vehicle warranty. Use only the
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside proper mixture of engine coolant
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. for the cooling system. See
the proper coolant mixture will. . Gives boiling protection up to Recommended Fluids and
The coolant warning system is set 129°C (265°F), engine Lubricants on page 11-12.
for the proper coolant mixture. temperature.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
. Protects against rust and Never dispose of engine coolant by
hot but you would not get the corrosion. putting it in the trash, pouring it on
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts. the ground, or into sewers, streams,
could catch fire and you or or bodies of water. Have the coolant
. Helps keep the proper engine changed by an authorized service
others could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable center, familiar with legal
water and DEX-COOL coolant. requirements regarding used
{ Caution coolant disposal. This will help
protect the environment and your
If improper coolant mixture, health.
inhibitors, or additives are used in
the vehicle cooling system, the Checking Coolant
engine could overheat and be The vehicle must be on a level
damaged. Too much water in the surface when checking the coolant
(Continued) level.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-14 Vehicle Care
Check to see if coolant is visible in When the engine is hot, the level
the coolant recovery tank. If the could be higher than the FULL { Caution
coolant inside the coolant recovery COLD mark or the FULL COLD ISO
tank is boiling, do not do anything symbol mark. If the coolant is below This vehicle has a specific
else until it cools down. If coolant is the FULL COLD mark or the FULL coolant fill procedure. Failure to
visible but the coolant level is not at COLD ISO symbol mark when the follow this procedure could cause
or above the FULL COLD mark or engine is hot, there could be a leak the engine to overheat and be
the FULL COLD ISO symbol mark, in the cooling system. severely damaged.
add a 50/50 mixture of clean, If the coolant is low, add the coolant
drinkable water and DEX-COOL or take the vehicle to your dealer for If recovery tank is empty, check the
coolant at the coolant recovery tank, service. coolant level in the radiator before
but be sure the cooling system is adding coolant to the recovery tank
cool before this is done. See Engine How to Add Coolant to the or take the vehicle to the dealer for
Overheating on page 10-16. Recovery Tank service. See “How to Add Coolant to
the Radiator” later in this section.
{ Warning If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
You can be burned if you spill coolant recovery tank.
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
The coolant recovery tank cap has are hot enough. Do not spill
this symbol on it. coolant on a hot engine.
When the engine is cold, the coolant
level should be at or above the
FULL COLD mark or the FULL
COLD ISO symbol mark on the
recovery tank.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-15
How to Add Coolant to the 2. Remove the radiator pressure

Radiator cap when the cooling system,
including the upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
{ Warning pressure cap slowly
Steam and scalding liquids from a counterclockwise about one
hot cooling system can blow out full turn.
and burn you badly. Never turn If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
the cap when the cooling system, stop. A hiss means there is still
including the surge tank pressure some pressure left in the
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system.
system and surge tank pressure 3. Keep turning the pressure cap
cap to cool. 1. Detach the fasteners and lift off slowly and remove it.
the panel that covers the
radiator cap. 4. Fill the radiator to the base of
If coolant is needed, add the proper the filler neck with the proper
mixture directly to the radiator, but DEX-COOL coolant mixture.
be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done. Then check the
recovery tank and add coolant if
needed.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-16 Vehicle Care
6. Reinstall the cap on the coolant

recovery tank but leave the { Caution
radiator pressure cap off.
If the pressure cap is not tightly
7. Start the engine and let it run installed, coolant loss and
until the upper radiator hose possible engine damage may
feels warm. Any time during this occur. Be sure the cap is properly
procedure, watch out for the and tightly secured.
engine cooling fans.
8. If the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck is low, add Engine Overheating
more of the proper DEX-COOL The vehicle has several indicators
coolant mixture through the filler to warn of engine overheating.
neck until the level is back up to
the base of the filler neck. There is an engine coolant
temperature gauge on the
9. Replace the pressure cap tightly. instrument panel cluster. See
At any time during this Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
procedure if coolant begins to on page 5-14.
flow out of the filler neck,
reinstall the pressure cap. The vehicle may also display an
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE and ENGINE
OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Engine Cooling
System Messages on page 5-36.
5. Fill the coolant recovery tank to
the FULL COLD mark or to the
FULL COLD ISO symbol mark.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-17
You may decide not to lift the hood If Steam Is Coming from the
when this warning appears, but Engine Compartment Warning (Continued)
instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program See Overheated Engine
on page 13-5.
{ Warning Protection Operating Mode on
page 10-18 for information on
If you do decide to lift the hood, Steam from an overheated engine
driving to a safe place in an
make sure the vehicle is parked on can burn you badly, even if you
emergency.
a level surface. just open the hood. Stay away
Then check to see if the engine from the engine if you see or hear
cooling fans are running. If the steam coming from it. Turn it off If No Steam Is Coming from
engine is overheating, both fans and get everyone away from the the Engine Compartment
should be running. If they are not, vehicle until it cools down. Wait If an engine overheat warning is
do not continue to run the engine until there is no sign of steam or displayed but no steam can be seen
and have the vehicle serviced. coolant before you open or heard, the problem may not be
the hood. too serious. Sometimes the engine
{ Caution If you keep driving when the can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
vehicles engine is overheated,
Running the engine without the liquids in it can catch fire. You . Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
coolant may cause damage or a or others could be badly burned.
fire. Vehicle damage would not be
. Stops after high-speed driving.
Stop the engine if it overheats,
covered by the vehicle warranty. and get out of the vehicle until the
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
See Overheated Engine engine is cool. . Tows a trailer.
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10-18 for information on (Continued)
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-18 Vehicle Care
If the overheat warning is displayed If there is no sign of steam, idle the

with no sign of steam: engine for three minutes while { Caution
1. Turn the air conditioning off. parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it After driving in the overheated
2. Turn the heater on to the highest cools down. Also, see “Overheated engine protection operating
temperature and to the highest Engine Protection Operating Mode” mode, the engine oil will be
fan speed. Open the windows as next in this section. severely degraded. Any repairs
necessary. performed before the engine is
3. When it is safe to do so, pull off Overheated Engine cool may cause engine damage.
Allow the engine to cool before
the road, shift to P (Park) or Protection attempting any repair. Repair the
N (Neutral), and let the
engine idle.
Operating Mode cause of coolant loss, change the
This emergency operating mode lets oil, and reset the oil life system.
If the temperature overheat gauge is See Engine Oil on page 10-7.
no longer in the overheat zone or an the vehicle be driven to a safe place
overheat warning no longer in an emergency situation. If an
displays, the vehicle can be driven. overheated engine condition exists,
Continue to drive the vehicle slow an overheat protection mode which
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe alternates firing groups of cylinders
vehicle distance from the car in front helps prevent engine damage. In
of you. If the warning does not come this mode, there is a significant loss
back on, continue to drive normally in power and engine performance.
and have the cooling system The temperature gauge indicates an
checked for proper fill and function. overheat condition exists. Driving
extended distances and/or towing a
If the warning continues, pull over, trailer in the overheat protection
stop, and park the vehicle mode should be avoided.
right away.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-19
Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering What to Use

Fluid To determine what kind of fluid to
To check the power steering fluid: use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-12. Always
1. Turn the key off and let the
use the proper fluid.
engine compartment cool down.
2. Remove the engine cover. See
Engine Cover on page 10-6.
{ Caution
The power steering fluid reservoir is 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the Use of the incorrect fluid may
under the engine cover on the reservoir clean. damage the vehicle and the
passenger side of the vehicle. See damages may not be covered by
Engine Compartment Overview on 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the the vehicle warranty. Always use
page 10-5 for reservoir location. dipstick with a clean rag.
the correct fluid listed in
5. Replace the cap and completely Recommended Fluids and
When to Check Power Steering tighten it. Lubricants on page 11-12.
Fluid
6. Remove the cap again and look
It is not necessary to regularly at the fluid level on the dipstick.
check power steering fluid unless Washer Fluid
you suspect there is a leak in the The fluid level should be
system or you hear an unusual somewhere between the MAX and What to Use
noise. A fluid loss in this system MIN line on the dipstick in room When adding windshield washer
could indicate a problem. Have the temperature. If the fluid is on or fluid, be sure to read the
system inspected and repaired. below the MIN line, add fluid close manufacturer's instructions before
to the MAX line. use. If the vehicle will be operating
in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid
that has sufficient protection against
freezing.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-20 Vehicle Care
Adding Washer Fluid Brakes

When the windshield washer fluid
{ Caution
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID . Do not use engine coolant brake pads have built-in wear
LOW ADD FLUID message will be (antifreeze) in the windshield indicators that make a high-pitched
displayed on the Driver Information washer. It can damage the warning sound when the brake pads
Center (DIC). See Washer Fluid windshield washer system are worn and new pads are needed.
Messages on page 5-44. and paint. The sound can come and go or be
. Do not mix water with heard all the time when the vehicle
ready-to-use washer fluid. is moving, except when applying the
Water can cause the solution brake pedal firmly.
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other { Warning
parts of the washer system.
The brake wear warning sound
. When using concentrated
Open the cap with the washer means that soon the brakes will
washer fluid, follow the
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until not work well. That could lead to
manufacturer instructions for
the tank is full. See Engine a crash. When the brake wear
adding water.
Compartment Overview on warning sound is heard, have the
page 10-5 for reservoir location. . Fill the washer fluid tank only vehicle serviced.
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank { Caution
if it is completely full.
Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly
brake repair.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-21
Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment Brake Fluid

can cause a brake squeal when the
Every time the brakes are applied,
brakes are first applied or lightly
with or without the vehicle moving,
applied. This does not mean
the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are Replacing Brake System Parts
necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is
pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be
inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together The brake master cylinder reservoir
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed indicated on the reservoir cap. See
specifications. See Capacities and and tested with top-quality brake Engine Compartment Overview on
Specifications on page 12-2. parts. When parts of the braking page 10-5 for the location of the
Brake pads should be replaced as system are replaced, be sure to get reservoir.
complete sets. new, approved replacement parts.
There are only two reasons why the
If this is not done, the brakes might
Brake Pedal Travel brake fluid level in the reservoir
not work properly. For example,
might go down:
See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change . The brake fluid level goes down
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and because of normal brake lining
pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The wear. When new linings are
that brake service might be braking performance expected can installed, the fluid level goes
required. change in many other ways if the back up.
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-22 Vehicle Care

. A fluid leak in the brake When the brake fluid falls to a low
hydraulic system can also cause level, the brake warning light comes { Caution
a low fluid level. Have the brake on. See Brake System Warning
hydraulic system fixed, since a Light on page 5-20.
. Using the wrong fluid can
leak means that sooner or later badly damage brake
the brakes will not work well. What to Add hydraulic system parts. For
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid example, just a few drops of
Do not top off the brake fluid. mineral-based oil, such as
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. from a sealed container. See
Recommended Fluids and engine oil, in the brake
If fluid is added when the linings are hydraulic system can damage
worn, there will be too much fluid Lubricants on page 11-12.
brake hydraulic system parts
when new brake linings are Always clean the brake fluid so badly that they will have to
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, reservoir cap and the area around be replaced. Do not let
as necessary, only when work is the cap before removing it. This someone put in the wrong
done on the brake hydraulic system. helps keep dirt from entering the kind of fluid.
reservoir. . If brake fluid is spilled on the
{ Warning vehicle's painted surfaces,
If too much brake fluid is added, it
{ Warning the paint finish can be
can spill on the engine and burn, damaged. Be careful not to
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
if the engine is hot enough. You spill brake fluid on the
brake hydraulic system, the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
or others could be burned, and brakes might not work well. This immediately.
the vehicle could be damaged. could cause a crash. Always use
Add brake fluid only when work is the proper brake fluid.
done on the brake hydraulic
system.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-23
Battery Infrequent Usage: Remove the Starter Switch Check

black, negative (−) cable from the
Refer to the replacement number on battery to keep the battery from
the original battery label when a running down. { Warning
new battery is needed.
Extended Storage: Remove the When you are doing this
black, negative (−) cable from the inspection, the vehicle could
{ Warning battery or use a battery trickle move suddenly. If the vehicle
Battery posts, terminals, and charger. moves, you or others could be
related accessories contain lead injured.
and lead compounds, chemicals All-Wheel Drive
known to the State of California to Transfer case fluid does not require 1. Before starting this check, be
cause cancer and reproductive checking unless there is a fluid leak sure there is enough room
harm. Wash hands after handling. or unusual noise. If required, have around the vehicle.
the transfer case serviced by your
2. Apply both the parking brake
dealer.
Vehicle Storage and the regular brake.
Do not use the accelerator
{ Warning pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
Batteries have acid that can burn starts.
you and gas that can explode.
3. Try to start the engine in each
You can be badly hurt if you are
gear. The vehicle should start
not careful. See Jump Starting on
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
page 10-67 for tips on working If the vehicle starts in any other
around a battery without position, contact your dealer for
getting hurt. service.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-24 Vehicle Care
Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park)
ignition on, but do not start the
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
Mechanism Check
Function Check regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with { Warning
{ Warning normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact When you are doing this check,
When you are doing this your dealer for service. the vehicle could begin to move.
inspection, the vehicle could You or others could be injured
move suddenly. If the vehicle Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
moves, you or others could be Make sure there is room in front
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to
injured.
While parked and with the parking roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake set, try to turn the ignition to brake at once should the vehicle
1. Before starting this check, be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever begin to move.
sure there is enough room position.
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
. The ignition should turn to Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
LOCK/OFF only when the shift vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
2. Apply the parking brake. Be lever is in P (Park). your foot on the regular brake, set
ready to apply the regular brake . The ignition key should come the parking brake.
immediately if the vehicle begins
to move. out only in LOCK/OFF. . To check the parking brake's
Contact your dealer if service is holding ability: With the engine
required. running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-25

. To check the P (Park) be covered by your warranty. Do
mechanism's holding ability: not allow the wiper blade arm to
With the engine running, shift to touch the windshield.
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the 4. Repeat the steps for the other
regular brake. blade.
Contact your dealer if service is Rear Wiper Blade
2. Squeeze the tabs on each side
required. of the wiper blade assembly and To replace the rear wiper blade:
slide the assembly off the end of 1. Pull the wiper blade assembly
Wiper Blade Replacement the wiper arm. away from the backglass.
Front Wiper Blade The rear wiper blade will not lock
Windshield wiper blades should be in a vertical position so care
inspected for wear or cracking. See should be used when pulling it
Maintenance Schedule on away from the vehicle.
page 11-2.
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed in 3. Install the new blade onto the
different ways. For the proper type arm connector and make sure
and size, see Maintenance the tabs are fully set in the
Replacement Parts on page 11-13. locked position.
To replace the wiper blade Allowing the wiper blade arm to
assembly: touch the windshield when no
1. Pull the windshield wiper wiper blade is installed could
assembly away from the damage the windshield. Any
windshield. damage that occurs would not

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-26 Vehicle Care
2. Push the release lever (2) to Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement

disengage the hook and push
the wiper arm (1) out of the Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement
blade assembly (3). should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, page 10-28.
3. Push the new blade assembly
securely in the wiper arm hook the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulb‐changing procedure
until the release lever clicks into If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact
place. necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
4. Return the wiper arm and blade
assembly to the rest position on Taillamps, Turn Signal,
the glass. and Stoplamps
1. Turn Signal Lamp

2. Stoplamp/Taillamp

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-27
To replace one of these bulbs: 6. Turn the bulb socket License Plate Lamp
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate counterclockwise and pull it
straight out to remove it from the To replace one of these bulbs:
on page 2-8.
taillamp assembly. 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
2. Remove the convenience net, on page 2-8.
if the vehicle has one. 7. Pull the old bulb straight out of
the bulb socket.
8. Push the new bulb straight into
the bulb socket.
9. Push the taillamp assembly back
into its original location.
When reinstalling the taillamp
assembly, make sure the pin on
the taillamp assembly lines up
and is inserted correctly into the
opening of the vehicle.
10. Reinstall the two screws that
hold the taillamp assembly in
3. Remove the two taillamp screw place. 2. Push the left end of the lamp
covers. assembly toward the right.
11. Reinstall the two taillamp screw
4. Remove the two screws holding covers. 3. Turn the lamp assembly down to
the taillamp assembly in place. remove it from the liftgate.
5. Pull out the taillamp assembly.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-28 Vehicle Care
8. Push on the lamp side opposite

the clip until the lamp assembly
Electrical System
snaps into place.
Replacement Bulbs Wiring
Bulb
Exterior Lamp
Number { Warning
License Plate Lamp 194 LL Exposure to high voltage can
Rear Turn 7443 NA cause shock, burns, and even
Signal Lamp death. The high voltage
components in the vehicle can
Taillamp/Stop Lamp 7444 LL only be serviced by technicians
4. Turn the bulb socket (1)
counterclockwise to remove it with special training.
For replacement bulbs not listed
from the lamp assembly (3). High voltage components are
here, contact your dealer.
5. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of identified by labels. Do not
the bulb socket. remove, open, take apart,
6. Push the replacement bulb or modify these components.
straight into the bulb socket and High voltage cable or wiring has
turn the bulb socket clockwise to orange covering. Do not probe,
install it into the lamp assembly. tamper with, cut, or modify high
voltage cable or wiring.
7. Turn the lamp assembly into the
liftgate engaging the clip side
first.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-29
Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit

Overload An electrical overload may cause Breakers
the lamps to go on and off, or in
The vehicle has fuses and circuit The wiring circuits in your vehicle
some cases to remain off. Have the
breakers to protect against an are protected from short circuits by
headlamp wiring checked right away
electrical system overload. a combination of fuses, circuit
if the lamps go on and off or
When the current electrical load is breakers and fusible thermal links.
remain off.
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens This greatly reduces the chance of
and closes, protecting the circuit Windshield Wipers fires caused by electrical problems.
until the current load returns to If the wiper motor overheats due to Look at the silver-colored band
normal or the problem is fixed. This heavy snow or ice, the windshield inside the fuse. If the band is broken
greatly reduces the chance of circuit wipers will stop until the motor cools or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
overload and fire caused by and will then restart. you replace a bad fuse with a new
electrical problems. one of the identical size and rating.
Although the circuit is protected
Fuses and circuit breakers protect from electrical overload, overload Fuses of the same amperage can
power devices in the vehicle. due to heavy snow or ice may be temporarily borrowed from
Replace a bad fuse with a new one cause wiper linkage damage. another fuse location, if a fuse goes
of the identical size and rating. Always clear ice and heavy snow out. Replace the fuse as soon as
from the windshield before using the you can.
If there is a problem on the road and windshield wipers.
a fuse needs to be replaced, the Engine Compartment
same amperage fuse can be If the overload is caused by an
borrowed. Choose some feature of electrical problem and not snow or Fuse Block
the vehicle that is not needed to use ice, be sure to get it fixed. The underhood fuse block is in the
and replace it as soon as possible. engine compartment, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-30 Vehicle Care
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/

relay block.
{ Caution
Spilling liquid on any electrical
component on the vehicle may
damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical
component.
To remove fuses, hold the end of

the fuse between your thumb and
index finger and pull straight out.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-31
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. ECM/ Engine Control HVAC BLWR Heating,
Fuses Usage FPM IGN Module/Fuel Pump Ventilation, and Air
Control Module Conditioning
A/C CLTCH Air Conditioning Ignition Blower
Clutch
EMISSION 1 Emission 1 LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam
ABS MTR Antilock Brake Headlamp
System (ABS) EMISSION 2 Emission 2
Motor LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam
EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils
Headlamp
AIRBAG Airbag System FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1
LT PRK Left Parking Lamp
AUX POWER Auxiliary Power FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2
LT TRLR Trailer Left
AUX Auxiliary FPM Fuel Pump Power STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn
VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump Module Signal
AWD All-Wheel-Drive HORN Horn ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils
System
HTD MIR Heated Outside PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate
BATT 1 Battery 1 Rearview Mirror
PWR Power Outlet
BATT 2 Battery 2 HTD Heated Steering OUTLET
BATT 3 Battery 3 STR WHL Wheel
RR APO Rear Accessory
CIGAR Cigarette Lighter HUMIDITY/ Humidity Sensor/ Power Outlet
LIGHTER MAF MAF Sensor
RR DEFOG Rear Defogger
ECM 1 Engine Control RR HVAC Rear Climate
Module 1 Control System

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-32 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage

RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam TRLR Trailer Back-up HID/ High Intensity
Headlamp BCK/UP Lamps LO BEAM Discharge (HID)
Low-Beam
RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam TRLR BRK Trailer Brake
Headlamps
Headlamp
TRLR Trailer Parking
HORN Horn
RT PRK Right PRK LAMP Lamps
Parking Lamp IGN Ignition Main
TRLR PWR Trailer Power
RT TRLR Trailer Right LT TRLR Trailer Left
WPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/
STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn
Washer
Signal Signal Lamp
RVC SNSR Regulated Voltage Relays Usage PRK LAMP Parking Lamp
Control Sensor
A/C Air Conditioning PWR/TRN Powertrain
S/ROOF/ Sunroof CMPRSR Compressor Clutch RR DEFOG Rear Window
SUNSHADE CLTCH Defogger
SERVICE Service Repair AUX Auxiliary RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam
SPARE Spare VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump Headlamp
STOP Stoplamps CRNK Switched Power RT TRLR Trailer Right
LAMPS FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn
Signal Lamp
STRTR Starter FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2
STOP LAMP Stop Lamps
TCM Transmission FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3
Control Module TRLR Trailer Back-up
HI BEAM High-Beam BCK/UP Lamps
TRANS Transmission Headlamps

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-33
Relays Usage The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
WPR Windshield Wiper features shown.
WPR HI Windshield Wiper Fuses Usage
High Speed # GMC NON HID =
Lo Beam
Instrument Panel Fuse
) GMC NON HID =
Block High Shutter
)) Chevy = Fog
Lamps
))) Buick China =
Rear Fog Lamp
AIRBAG Airbag
AMP Amplifier
BCK Back-up Lamp/
UP/STOP Stoplamp
BCM Body Control
Module
The instrument panel fuse block is CNSTR Canister Vent
under the instrument panel on the VENT
passenger side of the vehicle. Pull Fuse Side
CTSY Courtesy Lamps
down on the cover to access the
fuse block. DR LCK Door Locks

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-34 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

DRL/ Daytime Running OBS Rear Park Assist/
LO BEAM Lamps Relay/Low DET/URS Side Blind Zone
Beam Headlamps Alert/Forward
Relay Collision Alert/
Universal Remote
DSPLY Display
System
FRT WSW Front Windshield
PDM Power Mirrors,
Washer
Liftgate Release
HTD/ Heated/Cooling
PWR MODE Power Mode
COOL SEAT Seats
PWR MIR Power Mirrors
HVAC Heating,
Ventilation, and Air RDO Radio
Conditioning
REAR WPR Rear Wiper
INADV PWR Inadvertent Power/
RT TRN SIG Passenger Side
INT LAMPS Interior Light Pipe
Turn Signal
Lamps
STR WHL Steering Wheel
INFOTMNT/ Infotainment/
ILLUM Illumination
MSM Memory Seat
Module USB CHRG USB Charging
LT TRN SIG Driver Side Turn
Signal Relay Side

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-35
Relays Usage Relays Usage Wheels and Tires

LT/ Driver Side Power DRL/ Daytime Running
PWR/SEAT Seat Relay LO BEAM Lamps Relay/ Tires
Low-Beam Every new GM vehicle has
RT/ Passenger Side
Headlamps Relay high-quality tires made by a
PWR/SEAT Power Seat Relay
PWR/WNDW Power Windows
LT/UNLCK Driver Side Unlock leading tire manufacturer. See
Relay the warranty manual for
Relay
DRL/ Daytime Running information regarding the tire
PWR/ Power Steering warranty and where to get
LO BEAM Lamps Relay (If
COLUMN Column Relay
Equipped) service. For additional
L/GATE Liftgate Relay information refer to the tire
FOG LAMPS Fog Lamps Relay
LCK Power Lock Relay manufacturer.
FRT/WSW Front Windshield
REAR/WSW Rear Window Washer Relay
Washer Relay { Warning
UNLCK Power Unlock . Poorly maintained and
Relay improperly used tires are
dangerous.
. Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a
result of too much flexing.
There could be a blowout
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-36 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with
and a serious crash. See . Worn or old tires can all-season tires. These tires are
Vehicle Load Limits on cause a crash. If the tread designed to provide good overall
page 9-9. is badly worn, performance on most road surfaces
replace them. and weather conditions. Original
. Underinflated tires pose equipment tires designed to GM's
the same danger as . Replace any tires that specific tire performance criteria
overloaded tires. The have been damaged by have a TPC specification code
resulting crash could impacts with potholes, molded onto the sidewall. Original
cause serious injury. curbs, etc. equipment all-season tires can be
Check all tires frequently identified by the last two characters
. Improperly repaired tires of this TPC code, which will
to maintain the can cause a crash. Only
recommended pressure. be “MS.”
the dealer or an
Tire pressure should be authorized tire service
Consider installing winter tires on
checked when the tires the vehicle if frequent driving on
center should repair, snow or ice-covered roads is
are cold. replace, dismount, and expected. All-season tires provide
. Overinflated tires are more mount the tires. adequate performance for most
likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in winter driving conditions, but they
or broken by a sudden excess of 56 km/h may not offer the same level of
impact — such as when traction or performance as winter
(35 mph) on slippery tires on snow or ice-covered roads.
hitting a pothole. Keep surfaces such as snow,
tires at the recommended See Winter Tires on page 10-37.
mud, ice, etc. Excessive
pressure. spinning may cause the
(Continued) tires to explode.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-37

. Use only radial ply tires of the
Winter Tires same size, load range, and
Tire Sidewall Labeling
This vehicle was not originally speed rating as the original Useful information about a tire is
equipped with winter tires. Winter equipment tires. molded into its sidewall. The
tires are designed for increased examples show a typical
Winter tires with the same speed
traction on snow and ice-covered passenger vehicle tire and a
rating as the original equipment tires
roads. Consider installing winter
may not be available for H, V, W, Y, compact spare tire sidewall.
tires on the vehicle if frequent
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
driving on ice or snow covered
tires with a lower speed rating are
roads is expected. See your dealer
chosen, never exceed the tire's
for details regarding winter tire
maximum speed capability.
availability and proper tire selection.
Also, see Buying New Tires on
page 10-51. Summer Tires
With winter tires, there may be This vehicle may come with high
decreased dry road traction, performance summer tires. These
increased road noise, and shorter tires have a special tread and
tread life. After changing to winter compound that are optimized for
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle maximum dry and wet road
handling and braking. performance. This special tread and
compound will have decreased Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
If using winter tires: performance in cold climates, and
on ice and snow. We recommend (1) Tire Size: The tire size is a
. Use tires of the same brand and
tread type on all four wheel installing winter tires on the vehicle combination of letters and
positions. if frequent driving at temperatures numbers used to define a
below approximately 5°C (40°F) or particular tire's width, height,
on ice or snow covered roads is aspect ratio, construction type,
expected. See Winter Tires on
page 10-37.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-38 Vehicle Care
and service description. See the digits represent the week (01– performance factors: treadwear,
“Tire Size” illustration later in this 52) and the last two digits, the traction, and temperature
section. year. For example, the third resistance. For more information
(2) TPC Spec (Tire week of the year 2010 would see Uniform Tire Quality
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date Grading on page 10-53.
Specification): Original of 0310. (7) Maximum Cold Inflation
equipment tires designed to (4) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load that
GM's specific tire performance (TIN): The letters and numbers can be carried and the
criteria have a TPC specification following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to
code molded onto the sidewall. of Transportation) code are the support that load.
GM's TPC specifications meet or Tire Identification Number (TIN).
exceed all federal safety The TIN shows the
guidelines. manufacturer and plant code,
(3) DOT (Department of tire size, and date the tire was
Transportation): The manufactured. The TIN is
Department of Transportation molded onto both sides of the
(DOT) code indicates that the tire, although only one side may
tire is in compliance with the have the date of manufacture.
U.S. Department of (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
Transportation Motor Vehicle of cord and number of plies in
Safety Standards. the sidewall and under the tread.
DOT Tire Date of (6) Uniform Tire Quality Compact Spare Tire Example
Manufacture: The last four Grading (UTQG): Tire (1) Tire Ply Material : The type
digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufacturers are required to of cord and number of plies in
manufactured date. The first two grade tires based on three the sidewall and under the tread.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-39
(2) Temporary Use Only: The (4) Maximum Cold Inflation criteria have a TPC specification
compact spare tire or temporary Load Limit: Maximum load that code molded onto the sidewall.
use tire should not be driven at can be carried and the GM's TPC specifications meet or
speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). maximum pressure needed to exceed all federal safety
The compact spare tire is for support that load. guidelines.
emergency use when a regular (5) Tire Inflation: The
road tire has lost air and gone temporary use tire or compact Tire Designations
flat. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size
spare tire, see Compact Spare 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
Tire on page 10-66 and If a Tire The following is an example of a
information on tire pressure and
Goes Flat on page 10-56. typical passenger vehicle
inflation see Tire Pressure on
tire size.
(3) Tire Identification Number page 10-43.
(TIN): The letters and numbers (6) Tire Size: A combination of
following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a
of Transportation) code are the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
Tire Identification Number (TIN). construction type, and service
The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the
manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size
tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
manufactured. The TIN is use only. The United States version of a
molded onto both sides of the metric tire sizing system. The
tire, although only one side may (7) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in
have the date of manufacture. Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-40 Vehicle Care
vehicle tire engineered to (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of automatic transmission, power
standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. windows, power seats, and air
and Rim Association. (6) Service Description: These conditioning.
(2) Tire Width: The three-digit characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship
number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width.
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents Belt: A rubber coated layer of
sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire cords between the plies and the
(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit is certified to carry. The speed tread. Cords may be made from
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a steel or other reinforcing
height-to-width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load. materials.
For example, if the tire size Bead: The tire bead contains
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel
item 3 of the illustration, it would cords that hold the tire onto
mean that the tire's sidewall is Air Pressure: The amount of the rim.
60 percent as high as it is wide. air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
(4) Construction Code: A letter in which the plies are laid at
code is used to indicate the type the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than
of ply construction in the tire. 90 degrees to the centerline of
The letter R means radial ply or psi (pounds per square inch).
the tread.
construction; the letter D means Accessory Weight: The
diagonal or bias ply combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The
construction; and the letter B accessories. Some examples of amount of air pressure in a tire,
means belted-bias ply optional accessories are measured in kPa (kilopascal)
construction. or psi (pounds per square inch)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-41
before a tire has built up heat GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure:
from driving. See Tire Pressure Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to
on page 10-43. Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated.
Curb Weight: The weight of a page 9-9. The maximum air pressure is
motor vehicle with standard and GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight molded onto the sidewall.
optional equipment including the Rating for the rear axle. See Maximum Load Rating: The
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the
and coolant, but without page 9-9. maximum permissible inflation
passengers and cargo. Intended Outboard Sidewall : pressure for that tire.
DOT Markings: A code molded The side of an asymmetrical tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle
into the sidewall of a tire that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb
signifying that the tire is in when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight,
compliance with the U.S. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric vehicle capacity weight, and
Department of Transportation unit for air pressure. production options weight.
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Normal Occupant Weight: The
Standards. The DOT code Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and number of occupants a vehicle
includes the Tire Identification is designed to seat multiplied by
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric some multipurpose passenger
vehicles. 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load
designator which can also Limits on page 9-9.
identify the tire manufacturer, Load Index: An assigned
production plant, brand, and number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution :
date of production. that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight carrying capacity of a tire.
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-9.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-42 Vehicle Care
Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the tread
outward when mounted on a 90 degrees to the centerline of of a tire when only 1.6 mm
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread. (1/16 in) of tread remains. See
contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire When It Is Time for New Tires
white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads on page 10-50.
manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
model name molding that is Grading Standards): A tire
higher or deeper than the same Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead. information system that provides
moldings on the other sidewall consumers with ratings for a
of the tire. Speed Rating: An tire's traction, temperature, and
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A alphanumeric code assigned to treadwear. Ratings are
tire used on passenger cars and a tire indicating the maximum determined by tire
some light duty trucks and speed at which a tire can manufacturers using
multipurpose vehicles. operate. government testing procedures.
Recommended Inflation Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the
Pressure: Vehicle the tire and the road surface. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
manufacturer's recommended The amount of grip provided. Tire Quality Grading on
tire inflation pressure as shown page 10-53.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
on the tire placard. See Tire comes into contact with
Pressure on page 10-43 and the road.
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-9.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-43
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The The Tire and Loading

number of designated seating { Caution Information label on the vehicle
positions multiplied by Neither tire underinflation indicates the original equipment
68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated nor overinflation is good. tires and the correct cold tire
cargo load. See Vehicle Load Underinflated tires, or tires inflation pressures. The
Limits on page 9-9. that do not have enough air, recommended pressure is the
Vehicle Maximum Load on the can result in: minimum air pressure needed to
Tire: Load on an individual tire support the vehicle's maximum
. Tire overloading and load carrying capacity. See
due to curb weight, accessory overheating which could
weight, occupant weight, and Vehicle Load Limits on
lead to a blowout. page 9-9.
cargo weight.
. Premature or How the vehicle is loaded
Vehicle Placard: A label irregular wear.
permanently attached to a affects vehicle handling and ride
vehicle showing the vehicle . Poor handling. comfort. Never load the vehicle
capacity weight and the original with more weight than it was
. Reduced fuel economy. designed to carry.
equipment tire size and
Overinflated tires, or tires that
recommended inflation pressure. When to Check
See “Tire and Loading have too much air, can
result in: Check the tires once a month or
Information Label” under Vehicle
Unusual wear. more. Do not forget the compact
Load Limits on page 9-9. .
spare, if the vehicle has one.
. Poor handling. The cold compact spare tire
Tire Pressure . Rough ride. pressure should be at 420 kPa
Tires need the correct amount of (60 psi). See Compact Spare
air pressure to operate
. Needless damage from Tire on page 10-66.
effectively. road hazards.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-44 Vehicle Care
How to Check Recheck the tire pressure with tire inflation pressure label, you
the tire gauge. should determine the proper tire
Use a good quality pocket-type inflation pressure for those tires.)
gauge to check tire pressure. Return the valve caps on the
Proper tire inflation cannot be valve stems to prevent leaks As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
determined by looking at the tire. and keep out dirt and moisture.
tire pressure monitoring system
Check the tire inflation pressure (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
when the tires are cold, meaning Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more
the vehicle has not been driven System of your tires is significantly
for at least three hours or no under-inflated.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
more than 1.6 km (1 mi). (TPMS) uses radio and sensor Accordingly, when the low tire
Remove the valve cap from the technology to check tire pressure pressure telltale illuminates, you
tire valve stem. Press the tire levels. The TPMS sensors monitor should stop and check your tires as
gauge firmly onto the valve to the air pressure in your tires and soon as possible, and inflate them
get a pressure measurement. transmit tire pressure readings to a to the proper pressure. Driving on a
receiver located in the vehicle. significantly under-inflated tire
If the cold tire inflation pressure
causes the tire to overheat and can
matches the recommended Each tire, including the spare (if
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
pressure on the Tire and provided), should be checked
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
Loading Information label, no monthly when cold and inflated to
tread life, and may affect the
further adjustment is necessary. the inflation pressure recommended
vehicle's handling and stopping
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
If the inflation pressure is low, vehicle placard or tire inflation
ability.
add air until the recommended pressure label. (If your vehicle has Please note that the TPMS is
pressure is reached. If the tires of a different size than the size not a substitute for proper tire
inflation pressure is high, press indicated on the vehicle placard or maintenance, and it is the driver's
on the metal stem in the center responsibility to maintain correct tire
of the tire valve to release air. pressure, even if under-inflation has

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-45
not reached the level to trigger Always check the TPMS malfunction monitor the air pressure in the tires
illumination of the TPMS low tire telltale after replacing one or more and transmits the tire pressure
pressure telltale. tires or wheels on your vehicle to readings to a receiver located in the
Your vehicle has also been ensure that the replacement or vehicle.
equipped with a TPMS malfunction alternate tires and wheels allow the
indicator to indicate when the TPMS to continue to function
system is not operating properly. properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is See Tire Pressure Monitor
combined with the low tire pressure Operation on page 10-45.
telltale. When the system detects a See Radio Frequency Statement on
malfunction, the telltale will flash for page 13-12.
approximately one minute and then When a low tire pressure condition
remain continuously illuminated. is detected, the TPMS illuminates
This sequence will continue upon Tire Pressure Monitor the low tire pressure warning light
subsequent vehicle start-ups as Operation located on the instrument cluster.
long as the malfunction exists. If the warning light comes on, stop
This vehicle may have a Tire
as soon as possible and inflate the
When the malfunction indicator is Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
tires to the recommended pressure
illuminated, the system may not be The TPMS is designed to warn the
shown on the tire loading
able to detect or signal low tire driver when a low tire pressure
information label. See Vehicle Load
pressure as intended. TPMS condition exists. TPMS sensors are
Limits on page 9-9.
malfunctions may occur for a variety mounted onto each tire and wheel
of reasons, including the installation assembly, excluding the spare tire
of replacement or alternate tires or and wheel assembly, if the vehicle
wheels on the vehicle that prevent has one. The TPMS sensors
the TPMS from functioning properly.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-46 Vehicle Care
A message to check the pressure in A Tire and Loading Information label

a specific tire displays in the Driver shows the size of the original Caution (Continued)
Information Center (DIC). The low equipment tires and the correct
tire pressure warning light and the inflation pressure for the tires when the GM approved tire sealant
DIC warning message come on at they are cold. See Vehicle Load available through your dealer or
each ignition cycle until the tires are Limits on page 9-9, for an example included in the vehicle.
inflated to the correct inflation of the Tire and Loading Information
pressure. Using the DIC, tire label and its location. Also see Tire TPMS Malfunction Light and
pressure levels can be viewed. For Pressure on page 10-43. Message
additional information and details The TPMS can warn about a low
about the DIC operation and The TPMS will not function properly
tire pressure condition but it does if one or more of the TPMS sensors
displays see Driver Information not replace normal tire
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on are missing or inoperable. When the
maintenance. See Tire Inspection system detects a malfunction, the
page 5-25 or Driver Information on page 10-48, Tire Rotation on
Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) low tire warning light flashes for
page 10-49 and Tires on about one minute and then stays on
on page 5-31 and Tire Messages on page 10-35.
page 5-42. for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
{ Caution displays. The malfunction light and
DIC warning message come on at
the vehicle is first started, and then Tire sealant materials are not all each ignition cycle until the problem
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This the same. A non-approved tire is corrected. Some of the conditions
could be an early indicator that the sealant could damage the TPMS that can cause these to come
air pressure is getting low and sensors. TPMS sensor damage on are:
needs to be inflated to the proper caused by using an incorrect tire . One of the road tires has been
pressure. sealant is not covered by the
replaced with the spare tire,
vehicle warranty. Always use only if your vehicle has one. The
(Continued) spare tire does not have a

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-47
TPMS sensor. The malfunction

. Replacement tires or wheels do performed after replacing a spare
light and DIC message should not match the original equipment tire with a road tire containing the
go off after the road tire is tires or wheels. Tires and wheels TPMS sensor. The malfunction
replaced and the sensor other than those recommended light and the DIC message should
matching process is performed could prevent the TPMS from go off at the next ignition cycle.
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor functioning properly. See Buying The sensors are matched to
Matching Process" later in this New Tires on page 10-51. the tire/wheel positions, using a
section. . Operating electronic devices or TPMS relearn tool, in the following
. The TPMS sensor matching being near facilities using radio order: driver side front tire,
process was not done or not wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger
completed successfully after TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear.
rotating the tires. The sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to
malfunction light and the DIC purchase a relearn tool. A TPMS
If the TPMS is not functioning relearn tool can also be purchased.
message should go off after properly, it cannot detect or signal a
successfully completing the See Tire Pressure Monitor
low tire condition. See your dealer Sensor Activation Tool at
sensor matching process. See for service if the TPMS malfunction
"TPMS Sensor Matching www.gmtoolsandequipment.com or
light and DIC message comes on call 1-800-GM TOOLS
Process" later in this section. and stays on. (1-800-468-6657).
. One or more TPMS sensors are TPMS Sensor Matching
missing or damaged. The There are two minutes to match the
malfunction light and the DIC
Process first tire/wheel position, and
message should go off when the Each TPMS sensor has a unique five minutes overall to match all four
TPMS sensors are installed and identification code. The identification tire/wheel positions. If it takes
the sensor matching process is code needs to be matched to a new longer, the matching process stops
performed successfully. See tire/wheel position after rotating the and must be restarted.
your dealer for service. tires or replacing one or more of the
TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor
matching process should also be

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-48 Vehicle Care
The TPMS sensor matching process 6. Proceed to the passenger side Tire Inspection
is outlined below: front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. We recommend that the tires,
1. Set the parking brake.
including the spare tire, if the
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with 7. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the vehicle has one, be inspected
the engine off. for signs of wear or damage at
procedure in Step 5.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry least once a month.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
(RKE) transmitter's Q and K tire, and repeat the procedure in Replace the tire if:
buttons at the same time for Step 5. The horn sounds two
approximately five seconds. The
. The indicators at three or
times to indicate the sensor
horn sounds twice to signal the identification code has been
more places around the tire
receiver is in relearn mode and matched to the driver side rear can be seen.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE tire, and the TPMS sensor . There is cord or fabric
message displays on the DIC matching process is no longer
screen. showing through the tire's
active. The TIRE LEARNING rubber.
4. Start with the driver side ACTIVE message on the DIC
front tire. display screen goes off. . The tread or sidewall is
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. cracked, cut, or snagged
5. Place the relearn tool against
the tire sidewall, near the valve deep enough to show cord or
10. Set all four tires to the fabric.
stem. Then press the button to recommended air pressure
activate the TPMS sensor. level as indicated on the Tire . The tire has a bump, bulge,
A horn chirp confirms that the and Loading Information label. or split.
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and 11. Put the valve caps back on the
wheel position. valve stems.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-49

. The tire has a puncture, cut, Anytime unusual wear is If the vehicle has a compact
or other damage that cannot noticed, rotate the tires as soon spare tire, do not include it in the
be repaired well because of as possible, check for proper tire tire rotation.
the size or location of the inflation pressure, and check for
damage. Adjust the front and rear tires to
damaged tires or wheels. If the the recommended inflation
unusual wear continues after the pressure on the Tire and
Tire Rotation rotation, check the wheel Loading Information label after
Tires should be rotated every alignment. See When It Is Time the tires have been rotated. See
12 000 km (7,500 mi). See for New Tires on page 10-50 Tire Pressure on page 10-43
Maintenance Schedule on and Wheel Replacement on and Vehicle Load Limits on
page 11-2. page 10-55. page 9-9.
Tires are rotated to achieve a Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
uniform wear for all tires. The System. See Tire Pressure
first rotation is the most Monitor Operation on
important. page 10-45.
Check that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities
and Specifications on
page 12-2.
Use this rotation pattern when

rotating the tires.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-50 Vehicle Care
Check that the spare tire, if the Treadwear indicators are one way to
{ Warning vehicle has one, is stored tell when it is time for new tires.
properly. Push, pull, and then try Treadwear indicators appear when
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
parts to which it is fastened, can to rotate or turn the tire. If it
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
make wheel nuts become loose moves, tighten the cable. See
Inspection on page 10-48 and Tire
after time. The wheel could come Tire Changing on page 10-57. Rotation on page 10-49.
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any When It Is Time for New The rubber in tires ages over time.
This also applies to the spare tire,
rust or dirt from places where the Tires if the vehicle has one, even if it is
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
Factors such as maintenance, never used. Multiple factors
an emergency, a cloth or a paper including temperatures, loading
temperatures, driving speeds,
towel can be used; however, use conditions, and inflation pressure
vehicle loading, and road conditions
a scraper or wire brush later to maintenance affect how fast aging
affect the wear rate of the tires.
remove all rust or dirt. takes place. GM recommends that
tires, including the spare if
Lightly coat the center of the equipped, be replaced after six
wheel hub with wheel bearing years, regardless of tread wear. The
tire manufacture date is the last four
grease after a wheel change or digits of the DOT Tire Identification
tire rotation to prevent corrosion Number (TIN) which is molded into
or rust build-up. Do not get one side of the tire sidewall. The
grease on the flat wheel first two digits represent the week
mounting surface or on the (01–52) and the last two digits, the
wheel nuts or bolts. year. For example, the third week of
the year 2010 would have a
four-digit DOT date of 0310.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-51
Vehicle Storage replacement tires are needed, Braking and handling

Tires age when stored normally GM strongly recommends performance may be adversely
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park buying tires with the same TPC affected if all the tires are not
a vehicle that will be stored for at Spec rating. replaced at the same time.
least a month in a cool, dry, clean GM's exclusive TPC Spec If proper rotation and
area away from direct sunlight to
system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
slow aging. This area should be free all four tires should wear out at
of grease, gasoline, or other critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of the about the same time. See Tire
substances that can deteriorate Rotation on page 10-49.
rubber. vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, However, if it is necessary to
Parking for an extended period can replace only one axle set of
cause flat spots on the tires that
traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring worn tires, place the new tires
may result in vibrations while on the rear axle.
driving. When storing a vehicle for performance. GM's TPC Spec
at least a month, remove the tires or number is molded onto the tire's Winter tires with the same speed
raise the vehicle to reduce the sidewall near the tire size. If the rating as the original equipment
weight from the tires. tires have an all-season tread tires may not be available for H,
design, the TPC Spec number V, W, Y and ZR speed rated
Buying New Tires will be followed by MS for mud tires. Never exceed the winter
GM has developed and matched and snow. See Tire Sidewall tires’ maximum speed capability
specific tires for the vehicle. The Labeling on page 10-37. when using winter tires with a
original equipment tires installed GM recommends replacing worn lower speed rating.
were designed to meet General tires in complete sets of four.
Motors Tire Performance Criteria Uniform tread depth on all tires
Specification (TPC Spec) will help to maintain the
system rating. When performance of the vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-52 Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading

{ Warning { Warning Information label indicates the
Tires could explode during Using bias-ply tires on the original equipment tires on the
improper service. Attempting vehicle may cause the wheel vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
to mount or dismount a tire rim flanges to develop cracks on page 9-9.
could cause injury or death. after many miles of driving.
Only your dealer or authorized A tire and/or wheel could fail Different Size Tires and
tire service center should suddenly and cause a crash. Wheels
mount or dismount the tires. Use only radial-ply tires with If wheels or tires are installed that
the wheels on the vehicle. are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
performance, including its braking,
{ Warning If the vehicle tires must be
ride and handling characteristics,
replaced with a tire that does not stability, and resistance to rollover
Mixing tires of different sizes, have a TPC Spec number, make may be affected. If the vehicle has
brands, or types may cause sure they are the same size, electronic systems such as antilock
loss of control of the vehicle, load range, speed rating, and brakes, rollover airbags, traction
resulting in a crash or other construction (radial) as the control, electronic stability control,
vehicle damage. Use the original tires. or All-Wheel Drive, the performance
correct size, brand, and type of these systems can also be
of tires on all wheels. Vehicles that have a tire affected.
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low-pressure warning if non-TPC
Spec rated tires are installed.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10-44.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-53
Treadwear 200 Traction AA must also conform to federal

{ Warning Temperature A safety requirements and
If different sized wheels are used, The following information relates additional General Motors Tire
there may not be an acceptable to the system developed by the Performance Criteria (TPC)
level of performance and safety if United States National Highway standards.
tires not recommended for those Traffic Safety Administration All Passenger Car Tires Must
wheels are selected. This (NHTSA), which grades tires by Conform to Federal Safety
increases the chance of a crash treadwear, traction, and Requirements In Addition To
and serious injury. Only use GM temperature performance. This These Grades.
specific wheel and tire systems applies only to vehicles sold in
developed for the vehicle, and Treadwear
the United States. The grades
have them properly installed by a The treadwear grade is a
are molded on the sidewalls of
GM certified technician.
most passenger car tires. The comparative rating based on the
Uniform Tire Quality Grading wear rate of the tire when tested
See Buying New Tires on (UTQG) system does not apply under controlled conditions on a
page 10-51 and Accessories and to deep tread, winter tires, specified government test
Modifications on page 10-2. course. For example, a tire
compact spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of graded 150 would wear one and
Uniform Tire Quality 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), one-half (1½) times as well on
Grading or to some limited-production the government course as a tire
Quality grades can be found tires. graded 100. The relative
where applicable on the tire performance of tires depends
While the tires available on
sidewall between tread shoulder upon the actual conditions of
General Motors passenger cars
and maximum section width. For their use, however, and may
and light trucks may vary with
example: depart significantly from the
respect to these grades, they
norm due to variations in driving

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-54 Vehicle Care
habits, service practices and Temperature overloaded. Excessive speed,

differences in road The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
characteristics and climate. (the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
Traction
to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
The traction grades, from
ability to dissipate heat when
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire
and C. Those grades represent Balance
conditions on a specified indoor
the tire's ability to stop on wet
laboratory test wheel. Sustained The tires and wheels were aligned
pavement as measured under
high temperature can cause the and balanced at the factory to
controlled conditions on
material of the tire to degenerate provide the longest tire life and best
specified government test overall performance. Adjustments to
and reduce tire life, and
surfaces of asphalt and wheel alignment and tire balancing
excessive temperature can lead
concrete. A tire marked C may are not necessary on a regular
to sudden tire failure. The grade
have poor traction performance. basis. Consider an alignment check
C corresponds to a level of
Warning: The traction grade if there is unusual tire wear or the
performance which all vehicle is significantly pulling to one
assigned to this tire is based on
passenger car tires must meet side or the other. Some slight pull to
straight-ahead braking traction
under the Federal Motor Safety the left or right, depending on the
tests, and does not include
Standard No. 109. Grades B and crown of the road and/or other road
acceleration, cornering,
A represent higher levels of surface variations such as troughs
hydroplaning, or peak traction
performance on the laboratory or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is
characteristics. vibrating when driving on a smooth
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The road, the tires and wheels may need
temperature grade for this tire is to be rebalanced. See your dealer
established for a tire that is for proper diagnosis.
properly inflated and not

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-55
Wheel Replacement Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement { Warning
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Replacing a wheel with a used
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and nuts can be dangerous. It could
one is dangerous. How it has
wheel nuts should be replaced. affect the braking and handling of
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. been used or how far it has been
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
Some aluminum wheels can be driven may be unknown. It could
and cause loss of control, causing
repaired. See your dealer if any of fail suddenly and cause a crash.
a crash. Always use the correct
these conditions exist. When replacing wheels, use a
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
new GM original equipment
Your dealer will know the kind of nuts for replacement.
wheel.
wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity, { Caution Tire Chains
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the one it The wrong wheel can also cause { Warning
replaces. problems with bearing life, brake
cooling, speedometer or Do not use tire chains. There is
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
odometer calibration, headlamp not enough clearance. Tire chains
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) sensors with new aim, bumper height, vehicle used on a vehicle without the
GM original equipment parts. ground clearance, and tire or tire proper amount of clearance can
chain clearance to the body and cause damage to the brakes,
chassis. suspension, or other vehicle
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-56 Vehicle Care
If a Tire Goes Flat

Warning (Continued) { Warning
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
parts. The area damaged by the while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause
tire chains could cause loss of are maintained properly. See Tires permanent damage to the tire.
control and a crash. on page 10-35. If air goes out of a Re-inflating a tire after it has been
Use another type of traction tire, it is much more likely to leak driven on while severely
out slowly. But if there ever is a underinflated or flat may cause a
device only if its manufacturer
blowout, here are a few tips about blowout and a serious crash.
recommends it for the vehicle's what to expect and what to do:
tire size combination and road Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
conditions. Follow that If a front tire fails, the flat tire that has been driven on while
manufacturer's instructions. To creates a drag that pulls the vehicle severely underinflated or flat.
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow toward that side. Take your foot off Have your dealer or an authorized
and readjust or remove the the accelerator pedal and grip the tire service center repair or
traction device if it contacts the steering wheel firmly. Steer to replace the flat tire as soon as
maintain lane position, and then possible.
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
gently brake to a stop, well off the
If traction devices are used, install
road, if possible.
them on the front tires.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
{ Warning
may require the same correction as Lifting a vehicle and getting
used in a skid. Stop pressing the under it to do maintenance or
accelerator pedal and steer to repairs is dangerous without the
straighten the vehicle. It may be appropriate safety equipment and
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake training. If a jack is provided with
to a stop, well off the road,
the vehicle, it is designed only for
if possible.
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-57
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),

Warning (Continued) { Warning use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement of
changing a flat tire. If it is used for Changing a tire can be the wheel blocks (1).
anything else, you or others could dangerous. The vehicle can slip
be badly injured or killed if the off the jack and roll over or fall
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack causing injury or death. Find a
is provided with the vehicle, only level place to change the tire. To
use it for changing a flat tire. help prevent the vehicle from
moving:
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
and wheel damage by driving slowly 2. Put an automatic
to a level place, well off the road, transmission in P (Park) or a
if possible. Turn on the hazard manual transmission in
warning flashers. See Hazard 1 (First) or R (Reverse). 1. Wheel Block
Warning Flashers on page 6-3. 2. Flat Tire
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle The following information explains
is raised. how to repair or change a tire.
4. Do not allow passengers to Tire Changing
remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks on both Removing Tools
sides of the tire at the The tools needed to remove the
opposite corner of the tire spare tire are located in the storage
being changed. compartment on the driver side, at
the rear of the vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-58 Vehicle Care
4. Turn the jack on its side, with the Removing the Spare Tire
bottom facing toward you.
The compact spare tire is located
5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom under the vehicle, in front of the rear
first. bumper. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 10-66 for more information.
1. Tool Bag
2. Wing Bolt
3. Jack
1. Open the jack storage
compartment by pulling on the
latch tab, located toward the rear 1. Jack
of the vehicle, and pulling the 2. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown, 1. Rear Convenience Center
cover off. One-Piece Similar) 2. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,
2. Remove the wing bolt (2) by The tools you will be using include One-Piece Similar)
turning it counterclockwise. the jack (1) and wrench (2). 3. Carpet Cutout
4. Hoist Shaft
3. Push the jack (3) up out of the 5. Compact Spare Tire
holding bracket and remove the
6. Retainer
tool bag (1).

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-59
1. Open the storage compartment 5. Tilt the retainer and slip it 2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover,
door of the convenience through the wheel opening to loosen the plastic nut caps with
center (1) that is nearest the remove the spare tire from the the wheel wrench. They will not
liftgate. cable. come off. Then, using the flat
2. Open the carpet cutout (3) that 6. Turn the wrench clockwise to end of the wheel wrench, pry
is located through the hole of the raise the cable back up after along the edge of the cover until
storage compartment. removing the spare tire. it comes off. Be careful; the
edges may be sharp. Do not try
3. Attach the wrench (2) into the Do not store a full-size or a flat to remove the cover with your
hoist shaft (4). road tire under the vehicle. See bare hands.
4. Turn the wrench (2) “Storing the Spare Tire” and
“Storing the Flat Tire” later in this Store the wheel cover securely
counterclockwise to lower the in the rear of the vehicle until
spare tire (5) to the ground. section.
you have the flat tire repaired or
Continue turning the wrench until Removing the Flat Tire and replaced.
the spare tire can be pulled out Installing the Spare Tire
from under the vehicle. If the vehicle has aluminum
1. Do a safety check before wheels, remove the wheel nut
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes caps using the wheel wrench.
Flat on page 10-56 for more
information.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-60 Vehicle Care
Caution (Continued)
damaged. Do not use an impact
wrench to remove the wheel nuts
if this vehicle has wheel locks.
3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do Triangle Shown, Without Similar

not remove them — using the The triangle may be located
wrench. For wheels with a wheel 4. To identify the appropriate near each wheel on the vehicle's
lock key, use the wheel lock key jacking location, find the triangle exterior.
between the lock nut and or rectangular notch about
wrench. The key is supplied in 30.5 cm (12 in) from the front tire
the front passenger door pocket. or about 27 cm (10.5 in) from the { Caution
rear tire.
If a jack is used to raise the
{ Caution vehicle without positioning it
correctly, the vehicle could be
If this vehicle has wheel locks and damaged. When raising the
an impact wrench is used to vehicle on a jack, avoid contact
remove the wheel nuts, the lock with the rear axle control arms.
nut or wheel lock key could be
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-61
5. Attach the wrench to the jack,

and turn the wrench clockwise to Warning (Continued)
raise the jack head 7.6 cm (3 in).
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
6. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put head into the proper location
the compact spare tire near you. before raising the vehicle.
{ Warning 7. Raise the vehicle by turning the

Getting under a vehicle when it is wrench clockwise in the jack.
lifted on a jack is dangerous. Raise the vehicle far enough off
If the vehicle slips off the jack, the ground so that there is
enough room for the spare tire to
you could be badly injured or
fit under the wheel well. 9. Remove the plastic spare tire
killed. Never get under a vehicle
when it is supported only by 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and heat shield by pulling the rubber
a jack. the flat tire. latch. Store the plastic spare tire
heat shield. See “Storing the
Spare Tire” later in this section
for more information.
{ Warning
Raising the vehicle with the jack
{ Warning
improperly positioned can Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
damage the vehicle and even parts to which it is fastened, can
make the vehicle fall. To help make wheel nuts become loose
avoid personal injury and vehicle after time. The wheel could come
(Continued) off and cause an accident. When
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-62 Vehicle Care
mounting surface. Make sure

Warning (Continued) the rounded end is toward the { Caution
wheel.
changing a wheel, remove any Improperly tightened wheel nuts
rust or dirt from places where the 13. Lower the vehicle by attaching can lead to brake pulsation and
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In the wrench to the jack and rotor damage. To avoid expensive
an emergency, a cloth or a paper turning the wrench brake repairs, evenly tighten the
towel can be used; however, use counterclockwise. Lower the wheel nuts in the proper
a scraper or wire brush later to jack completely. sequence and to the proper
remove all rust or dirt. torque specification. See
{ Warning Capacities and Specifications for
the wheel nut torque specification.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
{ Warning incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
Never use oil or grease on bolts come off. The wheel nuts should
or nuts because the nuts might be tightened with a torque wrench
come loose. The vehicle's wheel to the proper torque specification
could fall off, causing a crash. after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
10. Remove any rust or dirt from aftermarket manufacturer when
the wheel bolts, mounting using accessory locking wheel
surfaces, and spare wheel. nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12-2 for
11. Place the spare tire on the
original equipment wheel nut
wheel mounting surface.
torque specifications.
12. Put the nuts on by hand by
turning them clockwise until the
wheel is held against the

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-63
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in 2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire
a crisscross sequence, as Warning (Continued) heat shield on the compact
shown. spare tire.
the vehicle was being driven, the
tire might contact a person or 3. Slide the cable retainer through
{ Caution another vehicle, causing injury the center of the wheel and start
and damage to itself. Be sure the to raise the compact spare tire.
Wheel covers will not fit on the
vehicle's compact spare. If you try underbody-mounted spare tire is Make sure the retainer is fully
to put a wheel cover on the stored with the valve stem seated across the underside of
compact spare, the cover or the pointing down. the wheel.
spare could be damaged. 4. When the compact spare tire is
almost in the stored position,
Storing the Spare Tire { Warning turn the tire so the valve is
toward the rear of the vehicle.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other This position helps when
{ Warning equipment in the passenger checking the air pressure in the
The underbody-mounted spare compartment of the vehicle could compact spare tire.
tire needs to be stored with the cause injury. In a sudden stop or
5. Raise the tire fully against the
valve stem pointing down. If the collision, loose equipment could underside of the vehicle.
spare tire is stored with the valve strike someone. Store all these in Continue turning the wrench until
stem pointing upwards, the the proper place. you feel more than two clicks.
secondary latch will not work This indicates that the compact
properly and the spare tire could To store the spare tire: spare tire is secure and the
loosen and suddenly fall from the cable is tight. The spare tire
1. Lay the compact spare tire near hoist cannot be overtightened.
vehicle. If this happened when the rear of the vehicle with the
(Continued) valve stem down.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-64 Vehicle Care
Storing the Flat Tire 3. Put the flat tire in the rear
storage area with the valve stem
pointing toward the rear of the
vehicle.
4. Pull the cable (1) through the
door striker (5), the center of the
wheel (4), and the plastic spare
tire heat shield (3), as shown.
6. Make sure the tire is stored

securely. Push, pull, and then try
to turn the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wrench to tighten the 1. Cable
cable. 2. Liftgate Hinges
3. Spare Tire Heat Shield
4. Center of the Wheel
5. Door Striker
1. Remove the cable package from
the jack storage area. 5. Hook the cable onto the outside
2. Remove the small center cap by portion of the liftgate hinges (2).
tapping the back of the cap with 6. Hook the other end of the cable
the extension of the shaft, if the onto the outside portion of the
vehicle has aluminum wheels. liftgate hinge on the other side of
the vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-65
7. Pull on the cable to make sure it Storing the Tools 3. Turn the jack (3) on its side and
is secure. place down on the holding
bracket.
4. Reinstall the wing bolt (2) by
turning clockwise.
5. To replace the cover, line up the
tab at the front of the cover with
the notch in the cover opening.
Push the cover in place and
make sure that the rear clips are
in the slots and push the cover
closed.
Store the center cap or the plastic
bolt-on wheel covers until a full size
1. Tool Bag tire is put back on the vehicle. When
8. Make sure the metal tube is 2. Wing Bolt
centered at the striker. Push the you replace the compact spare with
3. Jack a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on
tube toward the front of the
vehicle. Put back all tools as they were wheel covers or the center cap.
stored in the jack storage Hand-tighten them over the wheel
9. Close the liftgate and make sure compartment and put the nuts, using the wrench.
it is latched properly. compartment cover back on.
1. Ensure that the bottom of the
jack is facing toward you.
2. Replace the tool bag (1).

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-66 Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire (50 mph). To conserve the tread of

the spare tire, have the standard tire { Caution
repaired or replaced as soon as
{ Warning convenient and return the spare tire When the compact spare is
to the storage area. installed, do not take the vehicle
Driving with more than one through an automatic car wash
compact spare tire at a time could When using a compact spare tire, with guide rails. The compact
result in loss of braking and the ABS and Traction Control spare can get caught on the rails
handling. This could lead to a systems may engage until the spare which can damage the tire, wheel,
crash and you or others could be tire is recognized by the vehicle,
and other parts of the vehicle.
injured. Use only one compact especially on slippery roads. Adjust
spare tire at a time. driving to reduce possible
wheel slip. Do not use the compact spare on
Performance of the All-Wheel other vehicles.
If this vehicle has a compact spare
tire, it was fully inflated when new; Drive (AWD) system will be Do not mix the compact spare tire or
however, it can lose air over time. automatically reduced to protect the wheel with other wheels or tires.
Check the inflation pressure system when using the compact They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
regularly. It should be 420 kPa spare. To restore the AWD and and its wheel together.
(60 psi). prevent excessive wear on the
Stop as soon as possible and check
clutch in the AWD, replace the
compact spare tire with a full-size
{ Caution
that the spare tire is correctly tire as soon as possible. Tire chains will not fit the compact
inflated after being installed on the spare. Using them can damage
vehicle. The compact spare tire is the vehicle and the chains. Do not
designed for temporary use only. use tire chains on the compact
The vehicle will perform differently
spare.
with the spare tire installed and it is
recommended that the vehicle
speed be limited to 80 km/h

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-67
Jump Starting { Caution

2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
For more information about the but be sure the vehicles are not
vehicle battery, see Battery on Ignoring these steps could result touching each other. If they are,
page 10-23. in costly damage to the vehicle it could cause a ground
that would not be covered by the connection you do not want. You
If the vehicle battery has run down, vehicle warranty. Trying to start
you may want to use another would not be able to start your
the vehicle by pushing or pulling it vehicle, and the bad grounding
vehicle and some jumper cables to
will not work, and it could damage could damage the electrical
start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the vehicle. systems.
the following steps to do it safely.
To avoid the possibility of the
{ Warning 1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
Batteries can hurt you. They can negative ground system. involved in the jump start
be dangerous because: procedure. Put an automatic
. They contain acid that can { Caution transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in Neutral
burn you.
If the other vehicle does not have before setting the parking brake.
. They contain gas that can a 12-volt system with a negative If one of the vehicles is a
explode or ignite. ground, both vehicles can be four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
. They contain enough damaged. Only use a vehicle that the transfer case is not in
electricity to burn you. has a 12-volt system with a Neutral.
negative ground for jump starting.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-68 Vehicle Care
4. Open the hoods and locate the

{ Caution positive (+) and negative (−) Warning (Continued)
terminal locations on the other
If any accessories are left on or vehicle. Your vehicle has a add water to take care of that
plugged in during the jump remote positive (+) and a remote first. If you do not, explosive gas
starting procedure, they could be negative (−) jump starting could be present.
damaged. The repairs would not terminal. See Engine Battery fluid contains acid that
be covered by the vehicle Compartment Overview on can burn you. Do not get it on
warranty. Whenever possible, turn page 10-5 for the terminal you. If you accidentally get it in
off or unplug all accessories on locations. your eyes or on your skin, flush
either vehicle when jump starting. the place with water and get
{ Warning medical help immediately.
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary Using a match near a battery can
accessories plugged into the cause battery gas to explode.
cigarette lighter or the accessory People have been hurt doing this, { Warning
power outlets. Turn off the radio and some have been blinded.
and all lamps that are not Use a flashlight if you need more Fans or other moving engine
needed. This will avoid sparks light. parts can injure you badly. Keep
and help save both batteries. your hands away from moving
Be sure the batteries have parts once the engine is running.
And it could save the radio! enough water. You do not need to
add water to the ACDelco®
battery (or batteries) installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-69
5. Check that the jumper cables do 8. Now connect the black

not have loose or missing negative (−) cable to the
insulation. If they do, you could negative (−) terminal of the good
get a shock. The vehicles could battery. Use a remote
be damaged too. negative (−) terminal if the
Before you connect the cables, vehicle has one.
here are some basic things you Do not let the other end touch
should know. Positive (+) will go anything until the next step. The
to positive (+) or to a remote other end of the negative (−)
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle cable does not go to the dead
has one. Negative (−) will go to a battery. It goes to a heavy,
heavy, unpainted metal engine unpainted metal engine part,
part or to a remote negative (−) 6. Connect the red positive (+) or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one. cable to the positive (+) terminal terminal on the vehicle with the
Do not connect positive (+) to of the dead battery. dead battery.
negative (−) or you will get a Use a remote positive (+)
short that would damage the terminal if the vehicle has one.
battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the 7. Do not let the other end touch
negative (−) cable to the metal. Connect it to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead positive (+) terminal of the good
battery because this can cause battery. Use a remote
sparks. positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-70 Vehicle Care
9. Connect the other end of the Towing the Vehicle

negative (−) cable to the remote { Caution
negative (−) terminal of the dead
battery. If the jumper cables are { Caution
connected or removed in the
Your vehicle has a remote wrong order, electrical shorting Incorrectly towing a disabled
negative (−) terminal for this may occur and damage the vehicle may cause damage. The
purpose. vehicle. The repairs would not be damage would not be covered by
10. Now start the vehicle with the covered by the vehicle warranty. the vehicle warranty.
good battery and run the Always connect and remove the
engine for a while. jumper cables in the correct order, Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed
11. Try to start the vehicle that had making sure that the cables do car carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.
the dead battery. If it will not not touch each other or other If a wheel lift tow truck is used, the
start after a few tries, it metal. drive wheels cannot contact the
probably needs service. road while the vehicle is being
Jumper Cable Removal towed. A wheel dolly must be used
to lift all drive wheels off the ground.
Reverse the sequence exactly when
removing the jumper cables. Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-71

. The proper towing equipment.
Recreational Vehicle See your dealer or trailering
by putting the front wheels on a
dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this
Towing professional for additional advice section.
Recreational vehicle towing means and equipment
recommendations. If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it
towing the vehicle behind another can be dinghy towed from the front.
vehicle – such as behind a motor . If the vehicle is ready to be These vehicles can also be towed
home. The two most common types towed. Just as preparing the by placing them on a platform trailer
of recreational vehicle towing are vehicle for a long trip, make sure with all four wheels off of the
known as dinghy towing and dolly the vehicle is prepared to be ground. These vehicles cannot be
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the towed. towed using a dolly.
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. Dolly towing is towing the Dinghy Towing For vehicles being dinghy towed,
vehicle with two wheels on the the vehicle should be run at the
ground and two wheels up on a beginning of each day and at each
device known as a dolly. RV fuel stop for about five minutes.
This will ensure proper lubrication of
Here are some important things to transmission components. Reinstall
consider before recreational vehicle the fuse to start the vehicle.
towing:
To tow the vehicle from the front
. The towing capacity of the with all four wheels on the ground:
towing vehicle. Be sure to read
the tow vehicle manufacturer's 1. Position the vehicle to be towed,
recommendations. shift the transmission to
P (Park), and turn the ignition to
. How far the vehicle will be LOCK/OFF.
towed. Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, it 2. Secure the vehicle to the towing
long they can be towed. can be dinghy towed from the front. vehicle.
These vehicles may also be towed 3. Set the parking brake.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-72 Vehicle Care
4. Turn the ignition to ACC/

ACCESSORY. Caution (Continued) { Caution
5. Shift the transmission to damaged. Be sure to follow all Do not tow a vehicle with the front
N (Neutral). steps of the dinghy towing drive wheels on the ground if one
6. To prevent the battery from procedure prior to and after of the front tires is a compact
draining while the vehicle is towing the vehicle. spare tire. Towing with two
being towed, remove the 15 amp different tire sizes on the front of
ECM fuse and the 15 amp the vehicle can cause severe
Onstar fuse. These are in the damage to the transmission.
battery compartment behind the { Caution
passenger seat on the floor.
If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceeded Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive
Also, remove the 50 amp BATT1
fuse from the underhood fuse while towing the vehicle, it could Vehicles)
block and store all fuses in a be damaged. Never exceed
safe location. See Engine 105 km/h (65 mph) while towing
Compartment Fuse Block on the vehicle.
page 10-29.
7. Release the parking brake. Once the destination is reached:
1. Set the parking brake.
{ Caution 2. Reinstall the fuses.
If the vehicle is towed without 3. Shift the transmission to
performing each of the steps P (Park), turn the ignition to
listed under “Dinghy Towing,” the LOCK/OFF and remove the key
automatic transmission could be from the ignition.
(Continued) 4. Disconnect the vehicle from the
towing vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-73
All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

towed with two wheels on the 3. Set the parking brake.
ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a
a platform trailer with all four wheels straight-ahead position with a
off of the ground or dinghy towed clamping device designed for
from the front. towing.
Dolly Towing 5. Remove the key from the
ignition.
(Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles Only) 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Towing the Vehicle From
the Rear
{ Caution
Towing the vehicle from the rear
could damage it. Also, repairs
vehicle warranty. Never have the
vehicle towed from the rear.
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.
To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle

from the front with two wheels on
the ground:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-74 Vehicle Care
Appearance Care Caution (Continued)

washed. This could cause damage
that would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Exterior Care products can be obtained from
your dealer. Follow all If using an automatic car wash,
Locks manufacturer directions regarding follow the car wash instructions. The
Locks are lubricated at the factory. correct product usage, necessary windshield wiper and rear window
Use a de-icing agent only when safety precautions, and wiper, if equipped, must be off.
absolutely necessary, and have the appropriate disposal of any Remove any accessories that may
locks greased after using. See be damaged or interfere with the car
vehicle care product.
Recommended Fluids and wash equipment.
Lubricants on page 11-12. Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
Washing the Vehicle { Caution cleaning agents completely. If they
To preserve the vehicle's finish, are allowed to dry on the surface,
wash it often and out of direct Avoid using high-pressure they could stain.
sunlight. washes closer than 30 cm (12 in)
to the surface of the vehicle. Use Dry the finish with a soft, clean
of power washers exceeding chamois or an all-cotton towel to
{ Caution 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
Do not use petroleum-based, in damage or removal of paint
acidic, or abrasive cleaning and decals. Finish Care
agents as they can damage the Application of aftermarket clearcoat
vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic The e symbol is on any sealant/wax materials is not
parts. If damage occurs, it would underhood compartment electrical recommended. If painted surfaces
not be covered by the vehicle center that should not be power are damaged, see your dealer to
warranty. Approved cleaning have the damage assessed and
(Continued) repaired. Foreign materials such as

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-75
calcium chloride and other salts, ice The bright metal moldings on the
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree Caution (Continued) vehicle are aluminum or stainless
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from steel. To prevent damage always
industrial chimneys, etc., can may damage it. Use only follow these cleaning instructions:
damage the vehicle's finish if they non-abrasive waxes and polishes
. Be sure the molding is cool to
remain on painted surfaces. Wash that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the the touch before applying any
the vehicle as soon as possible. cleaning solution.
If necessary, use non-abrasive vehicle.
cleaners that are marked safe for . Use a cleaning solution
painted surfaces to remove foreign approved for aluminum or
To keep the paint finish looking new,
matter. keep the vehicle garaged or stainless steel. Some cleaners
covered whenever possible. are highly acidic or contain
Occasional hand waxing or mild alkaline substances and can
polishing should be done to remove Protecting Exterior Bright Metal damage the moldings.
residue from the paint finish. See Moldings
your dealer for approved cleaning . Always dilute a concentrated
products. cleaner according to the
Do not apply waxes or polishes to
{ Caution manufacturer’s instructions.
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, Failure to clean and protect the
. Do not use chrome cleaners.
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint bright metal moldings can result . Do not use cleaners that are not
as damage can occur. in a hazy white finish or pitting. intended for automotive use.
This damage would not be . Use a nonabrasive wax on the
{ Caution covered by the vehicle warranty. vehicle after washing to protect
Machine compounding or and extend the molding finish.
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
(Continued)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-76 Vehicle Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

. Aftermarket appearance caps or Air Intakes
Lenses, Emblems, Decals and covers while the lamps are
illuminated, due to excessive Clear debris from the air intakes,
Stripes heat generated. between the hood and windshield
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a when washing the vehicle.
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps, lenses,
{ Caution Windshield and Wiper Blades
emblems, decals and stripes. Follow Failure to clean lamps properly Clean the outside of the windshield
instructions under "Washing the can cause damage to the lamp with glass cleaner.
Vehicle" previously in this section. cover that would not be covered Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
Lamp covers are made of plastic, by the vehicle warranty. cloth or paper towel soaked with
and some have a UV protective windshield washer fluid or a mild
coating. Do not clean or wipe them detergent. Wash the windshield
when dry. thoroughly when cleaning the
Do not use any of the following on
{ Caution blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
lamp covers: Using wax on low gloss black treatments may cause wiper
. Abrasive or caustic agents. finish stripes can increase the streaking.
gloss level and create a
. Washer fluids and other cleaning non-uniform finish. Clean low Replace the wiper blades if they are
agents in higher concentrations gloss stripes with soap and worn or damaged. Damage can be
than suggested by the water only. caused by extreme dusty
manufacturer. conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, snow, and ice.
or other harsh cleaners.
. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-77
Weatherstrips Wheels and Trim — Aluminum

Apply Dielectric silicone grease on or Chrome { Caution
weatherstrips to make them last Use a soft, clean cloth with mild To avoid surface damage, do not
longer, seal better, and not stick or soap and water to clean the wheels. use strong soaps, chemicals,
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at After rinsing thoroughly with clean abrasive polishes, cleaners,
least once a year. Hot, dry climates water, dry with a soft, clean towel. brushes, or cleaners that contain
may require more frequent A wax may then be applied. acid on aluminum or
application. Black marks from chrome-plated wheels. Use only
rubber material on painted surfaces
can be removed by rubbing with a
{ Caution approved cleaners. Also, never
drive a vehicle with aluminum or
clean cloth. See Recommended Chrome wheels and other chrome chrome-plated wheels through an
Fluids and Lubricants on trim may be damaged if the automatic car wash that uses
page 11-12. vehicle is not washed after driving silicone carbide tire cleaning
Tires on roads that have been sprayed brushes. Damage could occur
with magnesium, calcium, and the repairs would not be
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to or sodium chloride. These
clean the tires. covered by the vehicle warranty.
chlorides are used on roads for
conditions such as ice and dust.
{ Caution Always wash the chrome with Steering, Suspension, and
soap and water after exposure. Chassis Components
Using petroleum-based tire
dressing products on the vehicle Visually inspect steering,
may damage the paint finish and/ suspension, and chassis
components for damaged, loose,
or tires. When applying a tire
or missing parts or signs of wear at
dressing, always wipe off any
least once a year.
overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-78 Vehicle Care
Inspect power steering for proper repair shop applies anti-corrosion Interior Care
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, material to parts repaired or
chafing, etc. replaced to restore corrosion To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
protection. regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Visually check constant velocity joint Immediately remove any soils. Note
boots and axle seals for leaks. Original manufacturer replacement that newspapers or dark garments
parts will provide the corrosion that can transfer color to home
Body Component Lubrication protection while maintaining the furnishings can also permanently
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, vehicle warranty. transfer color to the vehicle's
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steel interior.
fuel door hinge, unless the Finish Damage
components are plastic. Applying Quickly repair minor chips and Use a soft bristle brush to remove
silicone grease on weatherstrips scratches with touch-up materials dust from knobs and crevices on the
with a clean cloth will make them available from your dealer to avoid instrument cluster. Using a mild
last longer, seal better, and not stick corrosion. Larger areas of finish soap solution, immediately remove
or squeak. damage can be corrected in your hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
dealer's body and paint shop. repellent from all interior surfaces or
Underbody Maintenance permanent damage may result.
At least twice a year, spring and fall
Chemical Paint Spotting Your dealer may have products for
use plain water to flush any Airborne pollutants can fall upon cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
corrosive materials from the and attack painted vehicle surfaces specifically designed for the
underbody. Take care to thoroughly causing blotchy, ring-shaped surfaces being cleaned to prevent
clean any areas where mud and discolorations, and small, irregular permanent damage. Apply all
other debris can collect. dark spots etched into the paint cleaners directly to the cleaning
surface. See “Finish Care” cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
Sheet Metal Damage previously in this section. on any switches or controls.
If the vehicle is damaged and Cleaners should be removed
requires sheet metal repair or quickly. Never allow cleaners to
replacement, make sure the body

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-79
remain on the surface being

. Do not use laundry detergents or
cleaned for extended periods dishwashing soaps with { Caution
of time. degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
use approximately 20 drops per To prevent scratching, never use
Cleaners may contain solvents that 3.8 L (1 gal) of water. abrasive cleaners on automotive
can become concentrated in the A concentrated soap solution will glass. Abrasive cleaners or
interior. Before using cleaners, read leave a residue that creates aggressive cleaning may damage
and adhere to all safety instructions streaks and attracts dirt. Do not the rear window defogger.
on the label. While cleaning the use solutions that contain strong
interior, maintain adequate or caustic soap.
ventilation by opening the doors and Cleaning the windshield with water
windows.
. Do not heavily saturate the during the first three to six months
upholstery when cleaning. of ownership will reduce tendency
To prevent damage, do not clean to fog.
the interior using the following
. Do not use solvents or cleaners
cleaners or techniques: containing solvents. Speaker Covers
. Never use a razor or any other Interior Glass Vacuum around a speaker cover
sharp object to remove a soil To clean, use a terry cloth fabric gently, so that the speaker will not
from any interior surface. dampened with water. Wipe droplets be damaged. Clean spots with just
. Never use a brush with stiff left behind with a clean dry cloth. water and mild soap.
bristles. Commercial glass cleaners may be Coated Moldings
. Never rub any surface used, if necessary, after cleaning
the interior glass with plain water. Coated moldings should be cleaned.
aggressively or with excessive
pressure. . When lightly soiled, wipe with a
sponge or soft lint-free cloth
dampened with water.
. When heavily soiled, use warm
soapy water.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-80 Vehicle Care
Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and
Start by vacuuming the surface
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to Radio Displays
using a soft brush attachment. If a
a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being For vehicles with high gloss
prevent forcing the soil in to the
used during vacuuming, only use it surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
following techniques: longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners
solution followed only by plain or solvents. Periodically hand wash
. For solid soils, remove as much the microfiber cloth separately,
water.
as possible prior to vacuuming. using mild soap. Do not use bleach
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to and air dry before next use.
1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
colorfast cloth with water. cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
Microfiber cloth is recommended hidden area for colorfastness before { Caution
to prevent lint transfer to the using a commercial upholstery
fabric or carpet. Do not attach a device with a
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
formation occurs, clean the entire suction cup to the display. This
2. Remove excess moisture by may cause damage and would
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not be covered by the warranty.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-81
Instrument Panel, Leather, Cargo Cover and

Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Caution (Continued) Convenience Net
Low Gloss Paint Surfaces and these solvents can permanently Wash with warm water and mild
Natural Open Pore Wood change the appearance and feel detergent. Do not use chlorine
Surfaces of leather or soft trim and are not bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
Use a soft microfiber cloth recommended. then dry completely.
dampened with water to remove Care of Safety Belts
dust and loose dirt. For a more Do not use cleaners that increase
thorough cleaning, use a soft Keep belts clean and dry.
gloss, especially on the instrument
microfiber cloth dampened with a panel. Reflected glare can decrease
mild soap solution. visibility through the windshield { Warning
under certain conditions.
{ Caution Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
Soaking or saturating leather, { Caution a crash, they might not be able to
especially perforated leather, as Use of air fresheners may cause provide adequate protection.
well as other interior surfaces, permanent damage to plastics Clean safety belts only with mild
may cause permanent damage. and painted surfaces. If an air soap and lukewarm water.
Wipe excess moisture from these freshener comes in contact with
surfaces after cleaning and allow any plastic or painted surface in
them to dry naturally. Never use the vehicle, blot immediately and
heat, steam, spot lifters, or spot clean with a soft cloth dampened
removers. Do not use cleaners with a mild soap solution.
that contain silicone or wax-based Damage caused by air fresheners
products. Cleaners containing would not be covered by the
(Continued) vehicle warranty.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-82 Vehicle Care
Floor Mats brake pedal. Always check that

the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals.
{ Warning . Use the floor mat with the
If a floor mat is the wrong size or correct side up. Do not turn
is not properly installed, it can it over.
interfere with the pedals. . Do not place anything on top of
Interference with the pedals can the driver side floor mat.
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
. Use only a single floor mat on
distance which can cause a crash the driver side.
and injury. Make sure the floor . Do not place one floor mat on
mat does not interfere with the top of another. Removing and Replacing the
pedals. Floor Mat
Button Retainer
1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
Some vehicles have floor mats with unlock and remove.
Use the following guidelines for a button-type retainer.
proper floor mat usage. 2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining
up the floor mat openings over
. The original equipment floor
the carpet retainers and
mats were designed for your
snapping into position.
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended 3. Make sure the floor mat is
that GM certified floor mats be properly secured and verify that
purchased. Non-GM floor mats it does not interfere with the
may not fit properly and may pedals.
interfere with the accelerator or

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Care 10-83
Knob Retainer 2. Pull up on the floor mat.

Some vehicles have floor mats with 3. Center the slot in the floor mat
a knob retainer. grommet with the knob on the
floor and set into position.
4. Turn the knob until it is
perpendicular to the slot in the
grommet to lock the mat in
place.
5. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
pedals.
Removing and Replacing the

Floor Mat
1. Turn the knob until it is aligned
with the slot in the floor mat
grommet.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
10-84 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Maintenance Schedule
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance. It may
{ Caution
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 also help to maintain the value of Damage caused by improper
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the maintenance can lead to costly
Special Application Services responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application repairs and may not be covered
all required maintenance performed. by the vehicle warranty.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Your dealer has trained technicians Maintenance intervals, checks,
Additional Maintenance who can perform required inspections, recommended fluids,
and Care maintenance using genuine and lubricants are important to
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have keep the vehicle in good working
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 up-to-date tools and equipment for condition.
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids, dealers have extended evening and
Lubricants, and Parts Saturday hours, courtesy The Tire Rotation and Required
Recommended Fluids and transportation, and online Services are the responsibility of the
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 scheduling to assist with service vehicle owner. It is recommended to
Maintenance Replacement needs. have your dealer perform these
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Your dealer recognizes the Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records importance of providing keep the vehicle in good working
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14 competitively priced maintenance condition, improves fuel economy,
and repair services. With trained and reduces vehicle emissions.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use

. Frequently towing a trailer.
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
Maintenance
. Used for high speed or
There may need to be more competitive driving. Schedule
frequent checks and services. The
Additional Required Services -
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery Owner Checks and Services
Normal are for vehicles that: service.
At Each Fuel Stop
. Carry passengers and cargo Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
. Check the engine oil level. See
within recommended limits on Engine Oil on page 10-7.
the Tire and Loading Information Required Services - Severe chart.
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Once a Month
on page 9-9. { Warning . Check the tire inflation
. Are driven on reasonable road Performing maintenance work can pressures. See Tire Pressure on
surfaces within legal driving page 10-43.
be dangerous and can cause
limits. serious injury. Perform . Inspect the tires for wear. See
. Use the recommended fuel. See maintenance work only if the Tire Inspection on page 10-48.
Fuel on page 9-42. required information, proper tools, . Check the windshield washer
Refer to the information in the and equipment are available. fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
Maintenance Schedule Additional If they are not, see your dealer to page 10-19.
Required Services - Normal chart. have a trained technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
The Additional Required Services -
Service Work on page 10-3.
Severe are for vehicles that are:
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic
in hot weather.
. Mainly driven in hilly or
mountainous terrain.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Engine Oil Change Tire Rotation and Required

. Visually inspect windshield wiper
Services Every 12 000 km/ blades for wear, cracking,
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL or contamination. See Exterior
SOON message displays, have the 7,500 mi Care on page 10-74. Replace
engine oil and filter changed within Rotate the tires, if recommended for worn or damaged wiper blades.
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven the vehicle, and perform the See Wiper Blade Replacement
under the best conditions, the following services. See Tire on page 10-25.
engine oil life system may not Rotation on page 10-49.
indicate the need for vehicle service
. Check tire inflation pressures.
for up to a year.
. Check engine oil level and oil See Tire Pressure on
life percentage. If needed, page 10-43.
The engine oil and filter must be change engine oil and filter, and
changed at least once a year and
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire
reset oil life system. See Engine
the oil life system must be reset. Inspection on page 10-48.
Oil on page 10-7 and Engine Oil
Your trained dealer technician can Life System on page 10-9. . Visually check for fluid leaks.
perform this work. If the engine oil .
. Check engine coolant level. See Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
life system is reset accidentally,
Engine Coolant on page 10-12. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
service the vehicle within 5 000 km/
page 10-11.
3,000 mi since the last service. . Check windshield washer fluid
Reset the oil life system when the level. See Washer Fluid on . Inspect brake system.
oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life page 10-19.
System on page 10-9.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Visually inspect steering, . Check starter switch. See Starter . Check accelerator pedal for
suspension, and chassis Switch Check on page 10-23. damage, high effort, or binding.
components for damaged, loose, . Check automatic transmission Replace if needed.
or missing parts or signs of shift lock control function. See . Visually inspect gas strut for
wear. See Exterior Care on Automatic Transmission Shift signs of wear, cracks, or other
page 10-74. Lock Control Function Check on damage. Check the hold open
. Check restraint system page 10-24. ability of the strut. See your
components. See Safety System . Check ignition transmission lock. dealer if service is required.
Check on page 3-21. See Ignition Transmission Lock . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
. Visually inspect fuel system for Check on page 10-24. if equipped. See Sunroof on
damage or leaks. . Check parking brake and page 2-19.
. Visually inspect exhaust system automatic transmission park
and nearby heat shields for mechanism. See Park Brake and
loose or damaged parts. P (Park) Mechanism Check on
. Lubricate body components. See page 10-24.
Exterior Care on page 10-74.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

12 000 km/7,500 m i
24 000 km/15,000 m i
36 000 km/22,500 m i
48 000 km/30,000 m i
60 000 km/37,500 m i
72 000 km/45,000 m i
84 000 km/52,500 m i
96 000 km/60,000 m i
108 000 km/67,500 mi
120 000 km/75,000 mi
132 000 km/82,500 mi
144 000 km/90,000 mi
156 000 km/97,500 mi
168 000 km/105,000 mi
180 000 km /112,500 mi
192 000 km/120,000 mi
204 000 km/127,500 mi
216 000 km/135,000 mi
228 000 km/142,500 mi
240 000 km/150,000 mi

Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
AWD. (4)
@
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Footnotes — Maintenance (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (5) Or every five years, whichever
Schedule Additional Required and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first. See Cooling System on
Services - Normal routing, and condition. page 10-12.
(1) Or every two years, whichever (3) Or every four years, whichever (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. More frequent comes first. comes first. Inspect for fraying,
replacement may be needed if the excessive cracking, or damage;
(4) Do not directly power wash the
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy transfer case output seals. High replace, if needed.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, pressure water can overcome the (7) Or every 10 years, whichever
or areas with high dust levels. seals and contaminate the transfer comes first.
Replacement may also be needed if
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
there is a reduction in air flow, decrease the life of the transfer
excessive window fogging, or odors. case and should be replaced.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

12 000 km/7,500 m i
24 000 km/15,000 m i
36 000 km/22,500 m i
48 000 km/30,000 m i
60 000 km/37,500 m i
72 000 km/45,000 m i
84 000 km/52,500 m i
96 000 km/60,000 m i
108 000 km/67,500 mi
120 000 km/75,000 mi
132 000 km/82,500 mi
144 000 km/90,000 mi
156 000 km/97,500 mi
168 000 km/105,000 mi
180 000 km /112,500 mi
192 000 km/120,000 mi
204 000 km/127,500 mi
216 000 km/135,000 mi
228 000 km/142,500 mi
240 000 km/150,000 mi

Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Change automatic transmission fluid. @ @ @
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
AWD. (4)
@ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @
Footnotes — Maintenance vehicle is driven in areas with heavy (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
Schedule Additional Required traffic, areas with poor air quality, and hoses for proper hook-up,
Services - Severe or areas with high dust levels. routing, and condition.
(1) Or every two years, whichever Replacement may also be needed if (3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first. More frequent there is a reduction in air flow, comes first.
replacement may be needed if the excessive window fogging, or odors.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
(4) Do not directly power wash the Special Application Additional

transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the Services Maintenance and Care
seals and contaminate the transfer . Severe Commercial Use Your vehicle is an important
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis investment and caring for it properly
decrease the life of the transfer
components every 5 000 km/ may help to avoid future costly
case and should be replaced.
3,000 mi. repairs. To maintain vehicle
(5) Or every five years, whichever . performance, additional
Have underbody flushing service
comes first. See Cooling System on maintenance services may be
performed. See "Underbody
page 10-12. required.
Maintenance" in Exterior Care
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever on page 10-74. It is recommended that your dealer
comes first. Inspect for fraying, perform these services — their
excessive cracking, or damage; trained dealer technicians know
replace, if needed. your vehicle best. Your dealer can
(7) Or every 10 years, whichever also perform a thorough
comes first. assessment with a multi-point
inspection to recommend when your
vehicle may need attention.
The following list is intended to
explain the services and conditions
to look for that may indicate
services are required.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Battery Brakes Hoses

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are Hoses transport fluids and should
the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving. be regularly inspected to ensure
additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include that there are no cracks or leaks.
. To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing With a multi-point inspection, your
start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping. dealer can inspect the hoses and
battery with full cranking power. advise if replacement is needed.
. Trained dealer technicians have
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment Lamps
the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and Properly working headlamps,
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts taillamps, and brake lamps are
connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle. important to see and be seen on
corrosion-free. the road.
Fluids
Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
. Signs that the headlamps need
. Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems attention include dimming, failure
squeak or show signs of and components. See to light, cracking, or damage.
cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and The brake lamps need to be
Lubricants on page 11-12 for GM checked periodically to ensure
. Trained dealer technicians have that they light when braking.
access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
. With a multi-point inspection,
to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be your dealer can check the lamps
replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill. and note any concerns.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Shocks and Struts Tires

. Trained dealer technicians can
inspect and recommend the right
Shocks and struts help aid in control Tires need to be properly inflated, tires. Your dealer can also
for a smoother ride. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining provide tire/wheel balancing
. Signs of wear may include the tires can save money and fuel, services to ensure smooth
steering wheel vibration, bounce/ and can reduce the risk of tire vehicle operation at all speeds.
sway while braking, longer failure. Your dealer sells and services
stopping distance, or uneven . Signs that the tires need to be name brand tires.
tire wear. replaced include three or more
Vehicle Care
. As part of the multi-point visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the To help keep the vehicle looking like
inspection, trained dealer
rubber; cracks or cuts in the new, vehicle care products are
technicians can visually inspect
tread or sidewall; or a bulge or available from your dealer. For
the shocks and struts for signs
split in the tire. information on how to clean and
of leaking, blown seals,
protect the vehicle’s interior and
or damage, and can advise
exterior, see Interior Care on
when service is needed.
page 10-78 and Exterior Care on
page 10-74.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Wheel Alignment Windshield Wiper Blades

Wheel alignment is critical for For safety, appearance, and the Wiper blades need to be cleaned
ensuring that the tires deliver best viewing, keep the windshield and kept in good condition to
optimal wear and performance. clean and clear. provide a clear view.
. Signs that the alignment may . Signs of damage include . Signs of wear include streaking,
need to be adjusted include scratches, cracks, and chips. skipping across the windshield,
pulling, improper vehicle . Trained dealer technicians can and worn or split rubber.
handling, or unusual tire wear. inspect the windshield and . Trained dealer technicians can
. Your dealer has the required recommend proper replacement check the wiper blades and
equipment to ensure proper if needed. replace them when needed.
wheel alignment.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 ® specification of the proper
SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended.
See Engine Oil on page 10-7.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-12.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in
Canada 19299819).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON ®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Carrier Assembly – Differential (Rear SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, in
Drive Module) and Transfer Case Canada 89021678).
(Power Transfer Unit)
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C
Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 20958479 CF179C
Spark Plugs 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 25941805 —
Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 25941804 —
Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 20865139 —

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Odometer
Reading

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Odometer
Reading

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-12 for more information.
Capacities
Application Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System 11.3 L 11.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal
Transfer Case Fluid 1.0 L 1.0 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-8 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
Radio Frequency or parts manager, contact the owner
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-12 of your dealership or the general
Radio Frequency manager.
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business Bureaus,
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington , VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge or write to: the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited United States and Puerto Rico
c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Center
claims. The program provides for Oshawa , Ontario L1H 8P7 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our From U.S. Virgin Islands:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9994
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Canada Assistance Center. Any TTY user in I (Service History): View and
the U.S. can communicate with print dealer-recorded service
General Motors of Canada Limited
Chevrolet by dialing: records and self-recorded service
Customer Care Centre,
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records.
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive D (Preferred Dealer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Information): Select a preferred
www.gm.ca Online Owner Center dealer and view dealer location,
1-800-263-3777 (English) Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
1-800-263-7854 (French) (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com J (Warranty Tracking
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Information): Track the vehicle’s
The Chevrolet online owner
Telephone devices (TTYs)) warranty information.
experience is a one-stop resource
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
that allows interaction with J (Recall Information): View
Chevrolet and keeps important active recalls by Vehicle
Overseas vehicle-specific information in one Identification Number (VIN). See
place. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Please contact the local General
on page 12-1.
Motors Business Unit. Membership Benefits
E (Vehicle Information): H (Other Account Information):
Customer Assistance for View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view
radio (if equipped), and OnStar
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific how-to videos.
account information.
Users G (Maintenance Information): F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
View maintenance schedules,
To assist customers who are deaf, with online help representatives.
alerts, OnStar onboard vehicle
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
diagnostic information, and
and who use Text Telephones
schedule service appointments. your vehicle.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.ca
Reimbursement Program or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner for details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. This program is available to 1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone
. Locate owner resources such as qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)
lease-end, financing, and reimbursement of eligible For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
warranty information. aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800.
. required for the vehicle, such as
Retrieve your favorite articles, Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/
quizzes, tips, and multimedia 365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
Sections. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information
. Download the owner manual for
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready:
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Find the 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and
Chevrolet-recommended home telephone number.
maintenance services for your . Telephone number of your
vehicle. location.
. Location of the vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14

. Model, year, color, and license driver if they decide the claims are must be in good condition and
plate number of the vehicle. made too often, or the same type of properly inflated. It is the owner's
. Odometer reading, Vehicle claim is made many times. responsibility for the repair or
Identification Number (VIN), and replacement of the tire if it is not
Services Provided covered by the warranty.
delivery date of the vehicle.
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Description of the problem.
Delivery of enough fuel for the jump start a dead battery.
Coverage vehicle to get to the nearest
service station. Services Not Included in
Services are provided up to 5 years/
. Lock-Out Service: Service to Roadside Assistance
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first. unlock the vehicle if you are . Impound towing caused by
locked out. A remote unlock may violation of any laws.
In the U.S., anyone driving the be available if you have OnStar.
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Legal fines.
For security reasons, the driver
person driving the vehicle without must present identification . Mounting, dismounting,
permission from the owner is not before this service is given. or changing of snow tires,
covered. chains, or other traction devices.
. Emergency Tow from a Public
Roadside Assistance is not a part of Road or Highway: Tow to the Service is not provided if a vehicle
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. nearest Chevrolet dealer for is in an area that is not accessible
General Motors North America and warranty service, or if the vehicle to the service vehicle or is not a
Chevrolet reserve the right to make was in a crash and cannot be regularly traveled or maintained
any changes or discontinue the driven. Assistance is not given public road, which includes ice and
Roadside Assistance program at when the vehicle is stuck in the winter roads. Off-road use is not
any time without notification. sand, mud, or snow. covered.
General Motors North America and . Flat Tire Change: Service to
Chevrolet reserve the right to limit change a flat tire with the spare
services or payment to an owner or tire. The spare tire, if equipped,

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Services Specific to permission to get local safety related. If it is, please call
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles emergency road service. You will your dealership, let them know this,
receive payment, up to $100, and ask for instructions.
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement after sending the original receipt
is up to 7 liters. Diesel fuel If your dealer requests you to bring
to Roadside Assistance. the vehicle for service, you are
delivery may be restricted. Mechanical failures may be
Propane and other fuels are not urged to do so as early in the work
covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for
provided through this service. parts and labor for repairs not same-day repair.
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle covered by the warranty are the
registration is required. owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Program
Assistance: Must be over Scheduling Service
150 kilometers from where your Appointments To enhance your ownership
trip was started to qualify. experience, we and our participating
When the vehicle requires warranty dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
General Motors of Canada
service, contact your dealer and Transportation, a customer support
Limited requires
request an appointment. By program for vehicles with the
pre-authorization, original
scheduling a service appointment Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
detailed receipts, and a copy of
and advising the service consultant Coverage period in Canada),
the repair orders. Once
of your transportation needs, your extended powertrain, and/or
authorization has been received,
dealer can help minimize your hybrid-specific warranties in both
the Roadside Assistance advisor
inconvenience. the U.S. and Canada.
will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive If the vehicle cannot be scheduled Several Courtesy Transportation
payment. into the service department options are available to assist in
. immediately, keep driving it until it reducing inconvenience when
Alternative Service: If
can be scheduled for service, warranty repairs are required.
assistance cannot be provided
unless, of course, the problem is
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Courtesy Transportation is not a by GM for shuttle service. If U.S. It may not be possible to provide a
part of the New Vehicle Limited customers arrange their own like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Warranty. A separate booklet transportation, limited
entitled “Limited Warranty and reimbursement for reasonable fuel Additional Program
Owner Assistance Information” expenses may be available. Claim Information
furnished with each new vehicle amounts should reflect actual costs All program options, such as shuttle
provides detailed warranty coverage and be supported by original service, may not be available at
information. receipts. See your dealer for every dealer. Contact your dealer
information. for specific availability.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle General Motors reserves the right to
Warranty service can generally be
For an overnight warranty repair, the unilaterally modify, change,
completed while you wait. However,
dealer may provide an available or discontinue Courtesy
if you are unable to do so, your
courtesy rental vehicle or provide for Transportation at any time and to
dealer may offer the following
reimbursement of a rental vehicle. resolve all questions of claim
transportation options:
Reimbursement is limited and must eligibility pursuant to the terms and
Shuttle Service be supported by original receipts as conditions described herein at its
well as a signed and completed sole discretion.
This includes one-way or round-trip
shuttle service within reasonable rental agreement and meet state/
time and distance parameters of provincial, local, and rental vehicle Collision Damage Repair
your dealer's area. provider requirements. If the vehicle is involved in a
Requirements vary and may include collision and it is damaged, have the
Public Transportation or Fuel minimum age requirements,
Reimbursement damage repaired by a qualified
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. technician using the proper
If overnight warranty repairs are Additional fees such as fuel usage equipment and quality replacement
needed, and public transportation is charges, taxes, levies, usage fees, parts. Poorly performed collision
used, the expense must be excessive mileage, or rental usage repairs diminish the vehicle resale
supported by original receipts and beyond the completion of the repair
within the maximum amount allowed are also your responsibility.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
value, and safety performance can these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained
be compromised in subsequent are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any equipment.
related failures are not covered by
Collision Parts that warranty. Insuring the Vehicle
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also Protect your investment in the GM
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by vehicle with comprehensive and
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may collision insurance coverage. There
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle. are significant differences in the
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit quality of coverage afforded by
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms.
ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide
appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM
are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not vehicle by limiting compensation for
GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle damage repairs through the use of
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some
Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not
may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts are typically removed from When purchasing insurance, we
vehicles that were total losses in Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the
prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts.
undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever If such insurance coverage is not
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer available from your current
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier.
designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment In the event that the vehicle requires
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
Genuine Manufacturer replacement .
that you take an active role in its
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
you may be charged at the end of repair facility of choice, take the
the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year.
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
leave the scene of a crash until all
. Insurance company and policy recycled parts will not be covered by
matters have been taken care of.
number. the GM vehicle warranty.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
officer. Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
to police and other parties involved See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
in the crash. section. the repair professional, and insist on
For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Roadside Assistance Program on Will You See after an Airbag if the vehicle is leased, you may be
page 13-5. Inflates? on page 3-28. obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions Current and Past Models
company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
Technical Service Bulletins and
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
Manuals are available for current
repair valuation based on that
Owner Information and past model GM vehicles.
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written ORDER TOLL FREE:
contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The For Credit Card Orders Only
long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
models.
Service Publications Or write to:
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Manual. Attention: Customer Service
Service Manuals 47911 Halyard Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 – Plymouth, MI 48170
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $40.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
and repair information on the shipping fees. Prices are subject to change without
engines, transmission, axle, notice and without incurring
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Pouch: Owner Manual only. obligation. Allow ample time for
steering, body, etc. RETAIL SELL PRICE: delivery.
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
Service Bulletins
shipping fees. funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
Service Bulletins give additional funds.
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Radio Frequency Radio Frequency Reporting Safety

Identification (RFID) Statement Defects
RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that Reporting Safety Defects
pressure monitoring and ignition complies with Part 15/Part 18 of the
system security, as well as in Federal Communications
to the United States
connection with conveniences such Commission (FCC) rules and with Government
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Industry Canada Standards If you believe that your vehicle
transmitters for remote door locking/ RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
has a defect which could cause
unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage a crash or could cause injury or
two conditions: death, you should immediately
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause inform the National Highway
personal information or link with any harmful interference. Traffic Safety Administration
other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
personal information. interference received, including General Motors.
interference that may cause If NHTSA receives similar
undesired operation of the complaints, it may open an
device.
investigation, and if it finds that
Changes or modifications to any of a safety defect exists in a group
these systems by other than an of vehicles, it may order a recall
authorized service facility could void and remedy campaign.
authorization to use this equipment.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
To contact NHTSA, you may call Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects
the Vehicle Safety Hotline to the Canadian to General Motors
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
http://www.safercar.gov; or If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
write to: believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors.
defect, notify Transport Canada Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA immediately, and notify General
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Chevrolet Motor Division
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Washington, D.C. 20590 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Transport Canada at
Center
You can also obtain other 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170
information about motor Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170
vehicle safety from Road Safety Branch
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
http://www.safercar.gov. 80 rue Noel
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau , QC J8Z 0A1
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a
better understanding of the
Recording and This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
Privacy main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a
The vehicle has a number of record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
computers that record information crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under
about the vehicle’s performance and bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no
how it is driven. For example, the obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender,
vehicle uses computer modules to understanding how a vehicle’s age, and crash location) are
monitor and control engine and systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties,
transmission performance, to designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could
monitor the conditions for airbag vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type
deployment and deploy them in a systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data
crash, and, if equipped, to provide typically 30 seconds or less. The routinely acquired during a crash
antilock braking to help the driver EDR in this vehicle is designed to investigation.
control the vehicle. These modules record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR,
may store data to help the dealer . How various systems in your special equipment is required, and
technician service the vehicle. vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is
Some modules may also store data needed. In addition to the vehicle
about how the vehicle is operated,
. Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as
such as rate of fuel consumption or law enforcement, that have the
average speed. These modules may buckled/fastened;
.
special equipment, can read the
retain personal preferences, such as How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
radio presets, seat positions, and depressing the accelerator and/ the vehicle or the EDR.
temperature settings. or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
GM will not access this data or OnStar® Infotainment System

share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or, If the vehicle is equipped with If the vehicle is equipped with a
if the vehicle is leased, with the OnStar® and has an active navigation system as part of the
consent of the lessee; in response subscription, additional data may be infotainment system, use of the
to an official request by police or collected through the OnStar system may result in the storage of
similar government office; as part of system. This includes information destinations, addresses, telephone
GM's defense of litigation through about the vehicle’s operation; numbers, and other trip information.
the discovery process; or, as collisions involving the vehicle; the See the infotainment manual for
required by law. Data that GM use of the vehicle and its features; information on stored data and for
collects or receives may also be and, in certain situations, the deletion instructions.
used for GM research needs or may location and approximate GPS
be made available to others for speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
research purposes, where a need is OnStar Terms and Conditions and
shown and the data is not tied to a Privacy Statement on the OnStar
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. website.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
2 NOTES

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview existing public emergency service

providers. OnStar may collect
information about you and your
vehicle, including location
OnStar Overview
information. See OnStar’s Terms
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
and Conditions and Privacy
OnStar Services Statement for more details
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 including system limitations at
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 = Voice Command Button www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Q Blue OnStar Button The OnStar system status light is
Vehicle Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 next to the OnStar buttons. If the
> Emergency Button status light is:
OnStar Additional Information
OnStar Additional This vehicle may be equipped with a . Solid Green: System is on.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live OnStar . Flashing Green: On a call.
Advisor for Emergency, Security, . Red: Indicates a problem.
Navigation, Connection, and
Diagnostic Services. OnStar
. Off: System is off. Press the blue
services may require a paid OnStar button twice to speak
subscription. OnStar requires the with an OnStar Advisor.
vehicle battery and electrical Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
system, cellular service, and GPS (1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
satellite signals to be available and Advisor.
operating. OnStar acts as a link to

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
14-2 OnStar
. Receive On-Demand
Press = to: Diagnostics for a check of the OnStar Services
. Make a call, end a call, vehicle’s key operating systems.
or answer an incoming call. . Receive Roadside Assistance.
Emergency
. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling With Automatic Crash Response,
. Manage WiFi Settings (if
voice commands. the OnStar system can
equipped).
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn automatically connect to an OnStar
Navigation voice commands. Press > to get a priority connection Emergency Advisor. The built-in
Requires a specific OnStar to an OnStar Emergency Advisor system can automatically connect to
subscription plan. available 24/7 to: help in certain crashes.
. Obtain the WiFi network name,
. Get help for an emergency. Press > to connect to an OnStar
or Service Set Identifier or SSID, . Be a Good Samaritan or Emergency Advisor. GPS
and passphrase (if equipped). respond to an AMBER Alert. technology is used to identify the
vehicle location and can provide
Press Q to connect to a live . Get assistance in severe important information to emergency
Advisor to: weather or other crisis and personnel. OnStar Emergency
evacuation routes. Advisors are trained to provide
. Verify account information or
update contact information. assistance and link to existing
public emergency service providers
. Get driving directions. Requires in emergency situations.
a specific OnStar
subscription plan.. With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially
trained Crisis Advisors are available
24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to
provide a central point of contact,
assistance, and information if a
crisis occurs.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
OnStar 14-3
Security 4. Follow the voice-guided 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds

commands. with the last direction given, then
OnStar provides services including responds with “OnStar ready,”
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote Using Voice Commands then a tone.
Ignition Block, and Roadside During a Planned Route
Assistance, if equipped. OnStar can Get My Destination
unlock the vehicle doors remotely, Cancel Route
1. Press =. System responds:
if equipped with automatic door 1. Press =. System responds:
locks, and can help police locate the “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say
vehicle if it is stolen. “Cancel route.” System 2. Say “Get my destination.”
responds: “Do you want to System responds with the
Navigation cancel directions?” address and the distance to the
destination, then responds with
OnStar navigation requires a 2. Say “Yes.” System responds: “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
specific OnStar subscription plan. “OK, request completed, thank
you, goodbye.” Other Navigation Services
Press Q to receive directions or Available from OnStar
have them sent to the vehicle Route Preview
navigation screen, if equipped. OnStar eNav: Subscribers can
Destinations can also be forwarded 1. Press =. System responds: send destinations from
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com. “OnStar ready,” then a tone. MapQuest.com to the vehicle
2. Say “Route preview.” System Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
Turn-by-Turn Navigation responds with the next three screen-based navigation system (if
maneuvers. equipped). When ready, the
1. Press Q to connect to a live
directions will be downloaded to the
Advisor. Repeat vehicle.
2. Request directions.
1. Press =. System responds:
3. Directions are downloaded to the “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
vehicle.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
14-4 OnStar
Destination Download: Press Q, WiFi Connectivity (If Equipped) pressure (if the vehicle is equipped
then request the Advisor to The vehicle has a WiFi hotspot that with the tire pressure monitoring
download directions to the provides a high-speed, wireless system); or activate remote horn
navigation system in the vehicle (if Internet connection to connect and lights. Also remote start the
equipped). After the call ends, press multiple mobile devices (data plan vehicle (if factory equipped) or
the “Go” button on the navigation required). unlock the doors from anywhere
screen to begin driving directions. with a wireless connection (if
1. To retrieve WiFi hotspot equipped with automatic locks).
If directions are downloaded to the information, press = and select With a required specific OnStar
navigation system, the route can or say “WiFi settings.” subscription plan, a destination can
only be canceled through the be sent to the vehicle. For OnStar
navigation system. 2. The WiFi settings will display the RemoteLink information and
WiFi network name/SSID, compatibility, see www.onstar.com
Destinations can also be passphrase, and level of
downloaded on the go. For (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
encryption.
information about eNav or OnStar RemoteLink® Key Fob
Destination Download, see 3. To change the SSID or
Services
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or passphrase, press Q or call
www.onstar.ca (Canada). 1-888-4-ONSTAR to connect This feature is included for five
with an Advisor. years and allows for remote door
Connections lock/unlock (if equipped with
OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App automatic locks), remote start (if
The required specific Onstar (If Equipped) factory equipped), or activation of
subscription plan includes the horn and lights from anywhere with
Download the OnStar RemoteLink
services that follow to help a wireless signal. Download the app
mobile app to select Apple®,
customers stay connected. and start using it any time during the
Android™, and BlackBerry® or
For coverage maps, see Windows 7 or 8 mobile devices. trial period to get started.
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or From the mobile device, check the
www.onstar.ca (Canada). vehicle’s fuel level, oil life, or tire

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
OnStar 14-5
OnStar Hands-Free Calling 4. Say “Call.” System responds: 4. Pick a name tag. System
“OK, dialing 911.” responds: “About to store <name
This service allows calls to be made
tag>. Does that sound OK?”
and received from the vehicle. Retrieve My Number
5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
To Make a Call 1. Press =. System responds: again. System responds: “OK,
1. Press =. System responds: “OnStar ready.” storing <name tag>.”
“OnStar ready.” 2. Say “My number.” System Place a Call Using a Stored
2. Say “Call.” System responds: responds: “Your OnStar Number
“Please say the name or number Hands-Free Calling number is,”
to call.” then says the number. 1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready.”
3. Say the entire number without End a Call
pausing, including a “1” and the 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
Press =. System responds: “Call responds: “OK, calling
area code. System responds:
“OK calling.” ended.” <name tag>.”
Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed Verify Minutes and Expiration
Dialing
1. Press =. System responds: Press = and say “Minutes” then
“OnStar Ready,” followed by 1. Press =. System responds: “Verify” to check how many minutes
a tone. “OnStar ready.” remain and their expiration date.
2. Say “Call.” System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
“Please say the name or number “Please say the number you
to call.” would like to store.”
3. Say “911” without pausing. 3. Say the entire number without
System responds: “911.” pausing. System responds:
“Please say the name tag.”

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
14-6 OnStar
Vehicle Diagnostics OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works

OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics can Information Automatic Crash Response,
perform a vehicle check every Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
month. It will check the engine, Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
transmission, antilock brakes, Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
and other major vehicle systems. Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
It also checks the tire pressures, eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
if the vehicle is equipped with the can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
Tire Pressure Monitoring System. account information. all OnStar services are available
If an On-Demand Diagnostics check everywhere or on all vehicles. For
Selling/Transferring the more information, a full description
is needed, press Q, and an Advisor Vehicle of OnStar services, system
can run a check.
Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR immediately limitations, and OnStar terms and
to terminate your OnStar services if conditions:
the vehicle is disposed of, sold, . Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
transferred, or if the lease ends. (1-888-466-7827).
Reactivation for Subsequent . See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
Owners . See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Press Q and follow the prompts to . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible. The Advisor will update
. Press Q to speak with an
vehicle records and explain the Advisor.
OnStar service options available. OnStar services cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
OnStar 14-7
in that area. The wireless service Services for People with OnStar Personal Identification
provider must also have coverage, Disabilities Number (PIN)
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar Advisors provide services to help A PIN is needed to access some of
services. Service involving location subscribers with physical disabilities the OnStar services, like Remote
information about the vehicle cannot and medical conditions. Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
work unless GPS signals are Assistance. The PIN will need to be
Press Q for help with: changed the first time when
available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar . Locating a gas station with an speaking with an Advisor. To
hardware. OnStar services may not attendant to pump gas. change the OnStar PIN, contact an
work if the OnStar equipment is not . Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or
properly installed or it has not been that meets accessibility needs. calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR.
properly maintained. If equipment or
software is added, connected,
. Providing directions to the Warranty
or modified, OnStar services may closest hospital or pharmacy in OnStar equipment may be
not work. Other problems beyond urgent situations. warranted as part of the vehicle
the control of OnStar may prevent TTY Users warranty.
service such as hills, tall buildings,
tunnels, weather, electrical system OnStar has the ability to Languages
design and architecture of the communicate to deaf, The vehicle can be programmed to
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired respond in multiple languages.
crash, or wireless phone network customers while in the vehicle. The
available dealer-installed TTY Press Q and ask for an Advisor.
congestion or jamming. Advisors are available in English,
system can provide in-vehicle
See Radio Frequency Statement on access to all of the OnStar services, Spanish, and French. Available
page 13-12. except Virtual Advisor and OnStar languages may vary by country.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
14-8 OnStar
Potential Issues A temporary loss of GPS can cause to function properly. These systems
loss of the ability to send a may not operate if the battery is
OnStar cannot perform Remote
Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The discharged or disconnected.
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Advisor may give a verbal route or
Assistance after the vehicle has Add-on Electrical Equipment
may ask for a call back after the
been off continuously for five days.
vehicle is driven into an open area. The OnStar system is integrated
After five days, OnStar can contact
Roadside Assistance and a into the electrical architecture of the
Cellular and GPS Antennas vehicle. Do not add any electrical
locksmith to help gain access to the
vehicle. Do not place items over or near the equipment. See Add-On Electrical
antenna to prevent blocking cellular Equipment on page 9-54. Added
Global Positioning and GPS signal reception. Cellular electrical equipment may interfere
System (GPS) reception is required for OnStar to with the operation of the OnStar
send remote signals to the vehicle. system and cause it to not operate.
. Obstruction of the GPS can
occur in a large city with tall Unable to Connect to OnStar Privacy
buildings; in parking garages; Message The complete OnStar Privacy
around airports; in tunnels,
If there is limited cellular coverage Statement may be found at
underpasses; or in an area with
or the cellular network has reached www.onstar.com (U.S.),
very dense trees. If GPS signals
maximum capacity, this message or www.onstar.ca (Canada). We
are not available, the OnStar
may come on. Press Q to try the recommend that you review it.
system should still operate to
call again or try again after driving a If you have any questions, call
call OnStar. However, OnStar
few miles into another cellular area. 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
could have difficulty identifying
the exact location. or press Q to speak with an
Vehicle and Power Issues Advisor. Users of wireless
. In emergency situations, OnStar communications are cautioned
OnStar services require a vehicle
can use the last stored GPS that the privacy of any information
electrical system, wireless service,
location to send to emergency sent via wireless cellular
and GPS satellite technologies to be
responders. communications cannot be assured.
available and operating for features

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
OnStar 14-9
Third parties may unlawfully THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED unzip:

intercept or access transmissions “AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF This is version 2005-Feb-10 of
and private communications without ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR the Info-ZIP copyright and license.
consent. IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT The definitive version of this
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES document should be available
OnStar - libcurl and unzip OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
acknowledgments at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE license.html indefinitely.
Certain OnStar components include AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
libcurl and unzip software. Below THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All
are the notices and licenses EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR rights reserved.
associated with this software: COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE For the purposes of this copyright
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as
libcurl: DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, the following set of individuals:
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,
NOTICE
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed
Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris
All rights reserved. USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
THE SOFTWARE. Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,
Permission to use, copy, modify, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,
and distribute this software for any Except as contained in this notice, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,
purpose with or without fee is the name of a copyright holder shall Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,
hereby granted, provided that the not be used in advertising or Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
above copyright notice and this otherwise to promote the sale, use George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
permission notice appear in all or other dealings in this Software Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,
copies. without prior written authorization of Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
the copyright holder.

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
14-10 OnStar
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception “MacZip” without the explicit
Rich Wales, Mike White. to this condition is redistribution permission of Info-ZIP. Such
This software is provided “as is,” of a standard UnZipSFX binary altered versions are further
without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a prohibited from
express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is misrepresentative use of the
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the addresses or of the
incidental, special or consequential normal SFX banner has not Info-ZIP URL(s).
damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
inability to use this software. disabled. the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
Permission is granted to anyone to 3. Altered versions–including, but “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new “Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports and “MacZip” for its own source
and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces, and binary releases.
freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
restrictions: library versions–must be plainly
marked as such and must not be
1. Redistributions of source code misrepresented as being the
must retain the above copyright original source. Such altered
notice, definition, disclaimer, and versions also must not be
this list of conditions. misrepresented as being
2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releases–including, but
(compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
notice, definition, disclaimer, and “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Appearance Care

What Will You See after an Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Accessories and
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
When Should an Airbag Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Assistance Program,
Add-On Electrical
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-25 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Airbags Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-22
Additional Information
Adding Equipment to the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-22
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24, 7-29
Additional Maintenance
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-17 Audio System
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Adjustments
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Automatic
Air Filter, Passenger
Alarm Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Alert Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Airbag System
Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-36 Automatic Transmission
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
How Does an Airbag
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-25, 10-23 Shift Lock Control
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, 7-12 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Passenger Sensing
Antenna Auxiliary
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31
What Makes an Airbag
Antilock Brake
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Cargo

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-27 Cautions, Danger, and
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Voltage and Charging
and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-25
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Bluetooth
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34 C Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-17
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Check
Brake
California Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-20
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Ignition
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Perchlorate Materials Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-24
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Child Restraints
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Infants and Young
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Camera Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Rear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38 Lower Anchors and
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-44
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Capacities and Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-53
Carbon Monoxide Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Cleaning
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
INDEX i-3
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 D

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-8
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Danger, Warnings, and
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Courtesy Transportation
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9, 8-10 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 5-8 Cover
Daytime Running Lamps/
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Automatic Headlamp
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-8 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Compartments Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Connections Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Devices
Control Text Telephone (TTY)
Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31
Traction and Electronic Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Customer Information
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Service Publications
Door
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Customer Satisfaction
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Coolant Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engine Temperature
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Engine Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
i-4 INDEX
Drive Systems E Engine (cont'd)

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-25, 10-23 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Electrical Equipment,
Driver Information Cooling System Messages . . .5-36
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25, 5-31 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Electrical System
Driving Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Engine Compartment
Characteristics and Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Fuses and Circuit
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Instrument Panel Fuse
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-27 Overheated Protection
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-6 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Emergency
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Engine
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-21
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Check and Service Engine
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Dual Automatic Climate Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Coolant Temperature
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
INDEX i-5
F Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 Gauges (cont'd)

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Features
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Filter,
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46 Warning Lights and
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 General Information
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Requirements, California . . . . .9-43 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Fuses Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Fluid
Engine Compartment GM Mobility Reimbursement
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-10
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Fuses and Circuit
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 H
Instrument Panel Fuse Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Fog Lamps
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Headlamps
Forward Collision Alert G Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Frequency Statement Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52 Daytime Running Lamps/
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Gauges Automatic Headlamp
Front Seats Engine Coolant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Heated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
i-6 INDEX
Headlamps (cont'd) I L
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-37
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Ignition Transmission Lock Lamps
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Heated
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Indicator Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Heated and Cooled Front
Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Infants and Young Children, Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Heater
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Lane Departure
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Instrument Panel Lane Departure Warning
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-16 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-6
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii LATCH System
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Replacing Parts after a
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 J Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
How to Wear Safety Belts
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-38
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
INDEX i-7
Lighting Locks Messages

Delayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Battery Voltage and
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Lights Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-36
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Antilock Brake System Lower Anchors and Tethers Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 for Children (LATCH Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Object Detection System . . . . .5-39
Engine Coolant Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-23 M Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Maintenance Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Maintenance and Care Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-22 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 11-2 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15 Recommended Fluids Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-23 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
i-8 INDEX
Mirrors O Operating Mode

Automatic Dimming Overheated Engine
Object Detection System
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Operation, Infotainment
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5, 7-8
Off-Road
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Ordering
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11
Oil
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Outlets
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9
Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-16 Overheated Engine
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Monitor System, Tire Protection
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-36
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24, 7-29 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Overview, Infotainment
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5
OnStar®
N System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Navigation OnStar® Additional P
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Park
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
OnStar® Vehicle
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
INDEX i-9
Parking Pregnancy, Using Safety Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-38

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5
Brake and P (Park) Privacy Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24 Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . 13-14 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-20 Program Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7 Recommended Fluids and
Passenger Airbag Status Proposition 65 Warning, Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Records
Passenger Compartment Air Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 R Recreational Vehicle
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-30 Radio Frequency Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Perchlorate Materials Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Reimbursement Program,
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-2 Radio Frequency GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Personalization Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 Radios System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Phone AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, 7-12 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Power Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 7-18 Replacement Parts
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Rear Climate Control Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9, 8-10 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-36
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Replacing LATCH System
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Rear Seat Entertainment System Replacing Safety Belt
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-32 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-22
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
i-10 INDEX
Reporting Safety Defects S Seats (cont'd)

Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Restraints Securing Child
How to Wear Safety Belts
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-53
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Retained Accessory Security
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Ride Control Systems Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-21
Roads Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Safety Defects Reporting
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Roadside Assistance Service
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Accessories and
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Roof Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 7-18
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Maintenance, General
Seats
Running the Vehicle While Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Publications Ordering
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Services
Special Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
INDEX i-11
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 T

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Shift Lock Control Function Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Taillamps
Check, Automatic Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Turn Signal and
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2, 5-3
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Shifting Storage Areas
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Side Blind Zone Cargo Management System . . . 4-3
Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 5-8
Signals, Turn and Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Spare Tire Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Special Application Services . . . 11-8 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Specifications and Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
StabiliTrak Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-45
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 System
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Forward Collision
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 13-15
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-44
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
i-12 INDEX
Tires (cont'd) Transmission Vehicle (cont'd)

Terminology and Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Uniform Tire Quality Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Transportation Program, Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Wheel Alignment and Tire Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Turn and Lane-Change Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-55 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
When It Is Time for New Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 U Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-22
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Care
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-52 Vehicle Data Recording
Towing Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55 and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-47 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52 Vehicle Diagnostics
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-46 Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-71 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50 V Voltage Devices and
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Vehicle Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Traction Control/Electronic Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Trademarks and License Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 Identification
Trailer Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
INDEX i-13
W Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-25

Wipers
Warning
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Wiring, High Voltage
Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-41
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Warning Lights, Gauges,
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-43
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

7576032) - 2015 - CRC - 3/27/14
i-14 INDEX
2 NOTES

Traverse 2015

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Traverse 2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2k15_chev_traverse_23121149A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2015 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2015 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Danger, Warnings, and Vehicle Symbol Chart

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

21. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on Initial Drive

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Power Door Locks K: Press to unlock the doors.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Windows Seat Adjustment To adjust a manual seat:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Second Row Seats To fold the third row seatback:

3. Pull up on the release lever on

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Folding Mirrors Interior Mirror Steering Wheel

For vehicles with power folding Manual Rearview Mirror

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3. Pull or push the steering wheel Dome Lamp Override

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Exterior Lighting 5 : Turns on the headlamps

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Climate Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle Features Radio(s)

O : Press to turn the system on f : Select radio stations or set

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Radio with Touchscreen D : Press to go to the Home Page.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

See Satellite Radio (Radio without Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

c /x : Press to reject an Steering Wheel Controls SRCE: Press to switch between

+ e or − e : Press to increase or to + e or − e : Press to increase or to

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Keep the sensors on the vehicle's Universal Remote System

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2. If the vehicle has Driver 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1